
li ii i ; ;rl 9 ai i, 




COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT. 

























I 



“ Yo’-all will have to stop and explain.” — Page 302 







WAR FOR THE UNION SERIES 


For the Stars and Stripes 


BY ^ 

\ D?' 

EVERETT Ti- TOMLINSON 

Author of “The Boy Soldiers of 1812,” “Camping on the St. Lawrence,” 
“Four Boys in the Yellowstone,” “The Campfire of Mad 
Anthony,” “Ward Hill at Weston,” etc., etc. 


ILLUSTRATED BY FRANK VINING SMITH 


iteo 1804 i<<>i 



BOSTON 

LOTHROP, LEE & SHEPARD CO. 


Published, August, 1909 



Copyright, 1909, 

By Lothrop, Lee & Shepard Co. 


All rights reserved 


For the Stars and Stripes 


245749 

AUa 23 1909 


NORWOOD PRESS 
BERWICK & SMITH CO. 
NORWOOD, MASS. 

U. S. A. 


PEEFACE 


Many excellent stories and histories of the 
great Civil War in the United States have 
been written. To attempt to improve their 
plan or scope would be as pretentious as it 
would be well-nigh impossible. Merely to in- 
crease the number of such books is certainly 
undesirable. 

In this little story a word of explanation is 
therefore in order from the writer. Not the 
study of the causes of the struggle, nor a 
chronological record of its great events has 
been his purpose, but rather to present one of 
the many phases of the long conflict. The 
life of the soldiers in camp, the deeds on the 
battlefield or on the sea, each has its own 
distinctive place. In this story the experi- 
ences of the prisoners in the ‘‘pens,’’ or in 
their attempts to escape, have provided the 
theme. Every event or adventure incorpo- 
rated in the tale is founded upon fact. 

To glorify war or to revive the bitterness 
5 


6 


PREFACE 


of the struggle is not desired. The Civil 
War, however, is a matter of history, and as 
such cannot be ignored. To-day it is possi- 
ble for each side to honor the bravery, patri- 
otism, and devotion of the other. Out of such 
elements only can a united or reunited na- 
tion be permanently formed. 

The writer expresses the hope that his boy 
readers may be led by their interest in the 
story to read the histories of the struggle 
itself. Then with all bitterness forgotten, 
with malice toward none and charity for all 
to realize the fundamental elements of char- 
acter which alone can make any nation great 
— even that over which to-day the Stars and 
Stripes float. It is only the land of the brave 
which can be made the home of the free. 

Eveeett % Tomlinson. 


Elizabeth, New Jeksey. 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTEB PAGE 

I. Excitement in Camp . . .. . . . 11 

II. Tunnels 24 

III. The Needle .......... 36 

IV. Uncle Sam ........... 49 

V. A Scheme ........ ;. . . 62 

VI. Near the Fires . .. . i., . . 74 

VII. Failure >, . . 87 

VIII. Outside ....... .. . 100 

IX. In the Swamp .' . . 112 

X. The Master of the Hounds !.,... 125 

XI. A Halt 137 

XII. The Cabin 150 

XIII. Nebo’s Cunning 163 

XIV. An Improvised Pest-House 176 

XV. The Word on the Bank 188 

XVI. A Search . * 201 

XVII. A Black Leader . 213 

XVIII. The Blind Road . 225 

XIX. A Warm Defender . . .■ .... 237 

XX. A Piece of Paper . . ., .. >, . . 250 

XXI. In the Mansion .......... 262 

XXII. Intercepted Flight . . . , . . .274 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTEB PAGE 

XXIII. A Borrowed Horse ....... 286 

XXIV. Captain Hitt’s Band 298 

XXV. Under Guard 311 

XXVI. Carrying a Load 324 

XXVII. The Jail 337 

XXVIII. An Enlarged Force ....... 349 

XXIX. A Friend in Need ....... 361 

XXX. A Strange Kefuge . .374 

XXXI. From Night to Night ....... 387 

XXXII. Conclusion . . ... ., ..j i. . i. 400 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


“Yo’-all will have to stop and explain” (Page 
302) Frontispiece 

facing page 


The unexpected hail plainly startled the man . 86 

The heavy dog was scrambling desperately . . 134 

In a brief time the young soldier crowded himself 

INTO the narrow SPACE 164 

Up the broad stairway she quietly conducted Tay- 
lor 270 


Qlhckly the trio departed from the strange hut . 396 



'V 


i . '.:■ A-. 

B ,. . -u.. '■> 


• 7 - • T ,• V • ' 


•» '. 




e^u' 


WS^tA. •' U''- ■■ 'ar' ■■aB™-'' ■ 4 ' ■ 


*. ~r 


)i.\ '. 




Wit 


m 




■/\ 


I 




r t. 


Ll - • ■* ' 




;i- <s 


r\ 




■j* >«• 1 ' 


i^M- 








rt * 



o * , » ' 


'i U^. !> 




•r.' 




.1/ ' 










It 


.t-i\ 


»vh 


r/.ii 


i-'iV 


)' f. 


!k.‘ i 






•»' -r, 




' r * u 


'> . rr- 


»r../.- 


•*i li 






a 


■t: 






1 L’ » 


;v» *v/ 


El*' * ■ .Vv*«i‘’V' '‘ ' ' ‘ • 

;r ■, V ;.'Ti ■•,v-lr.- "... 

.w -M/W ’ f.Nv 4 , ;t' ,:■■. ■■’ '- 4 '. ,;■. 












•ili 


\ ' 


;V 


m 


'M 




;i; 


/ s 


f / 


y^f 


t « ' * V* 


Vf ^ -•;n, 




ff 7 i 




•K'y, 


■ ■ 


t ( 


■ w’ 


^ . 


' I , 






j § 


nL.j 








'i\ 




, : ' ^ 'J !?• 


fiV., • I 


. |.f'(.l 74 


nf;}* 


V.-is 


.1 


•^ , 'U 


,■ > 


i' 




t 


:> <■ 


Mf'.\ 






Wr 


^:\r w 


U. 




■Iv/’I' / 




v; 








•ft 


T' 


y-: 


» w'. 


I^r 


J* 




I • 


'Mil 


>> 


k'>i I 




T' n 


■ft 


WA 


• *^ 




•r..*W 


. */ 




ri V< 

t -v" ' 


m: 


m 


.i 


'i(>5; 






»«< Wt 

I 










• *•. • ».^‘ 

-m 


hVMr' 

, 'i‘' W£ 


Vr. A^, 


« • 




x':\\ 




'■ 


i- % 


n)' 


I / 












M 


14 . 1 'i*'./ 


4 •t* ^ 


'. 1 










t*i 




■» . * 


I . I , • 


^•iM' 


* /I 


rn., 1 






'iHJl 


m 






E'-li 


't>W . 

‘ ' it .’ 'A 

. ^ vv 


.,.\7 1 f .t '. 


I.f 


•'V'J 


r.. t 


-' I i» 


■I.* 


f » 




j'.LI'/ fJ 




fJVi 


t.TlI 


'>V t-v'”'. '*■ '■*'■ / ^ •' v 

lA^ ' . . . -■ ^ '.• “^ . V' 'W' k, 


Kl' ••' -'V '\v 

1 ,;.^:iii 


% 


^ -M 


Wj^4.*,.vh ,% 


:/'i 


tif/f ‘V'J» ' • . . ’ ' ■ » • 

c3-i A* J 4K'‘ ‘ *> / • I U'rf-' •,'»%' * • ' ' • ' \ ' 




■X 


\'Wr:^s 

VW»!r I ^ . 


.V 


■ .,-r 




•A J 




‘ill'. 


’:: 7 


I' '■ J •* *#"♦' 


(' 

'jyfr./ 


Mi! 


11'. 4 J I 


.i >J 


*V 


■4” f 


Mr 




m 


il l>r. 

m 




V"' 




N '» .-•> 




* -M. 


» •»• 




’h> 


Hi 




MfU 


I' .'./»< 


w. 


I'r.ii'- 


,9 


m 


rr, 




g \ 9 

'i 




>A*. 


IPS 


rf/r. 


rTiV:< 


ri ,* 


wr 


p. 


't<i 


l\.‘- 


SJ^/S 


V . / 


.' . > 




r*M4 


i \‘ 






■iv; ' . , , . ;j./ 

• • ' , , ’V ^- 

, . ' . ’ * ‘ ■ t 

, . . . •’ t , . • ,‘A « I ; , 

v»' / • • » « < • • / • , ‘ > i- ' 

iit. . ••x#. '. :• ; 












FOB THE STABS AND STBIPES 


CHAPTER I 

EXCITEMENT IN CAMP 

‘^Look! What^s the excitement? Come 
on ! We must join the crowd ! ’ ^ 

Erwin Smith qnickly sat erect at the sharp 
call of his friend, Taylor Cooper, and gazed 
at a dozen or more men who, shouting and 
calling, were running across the field of the 
prison pen. The sun had risen only an hour 
before and the camp was covered with its 
glow. The warmth of its beams had been so 
tempting that the two young prisoners, 
neither of whom was twenty years of age, 
had stretched themselves upon the ground to 
obtain a little sleep. The night air had been 
so chilly that both boys had not attempted to 
obtain any rest and through the hours of 
the dreary night they had been pacing back 
and forth, keeping well within the dead line, 
11 


12 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


striving in this manner to keep themselves 
warm. Even in South Carolina the Novem- 
ber nights were cold, at least for those whose 
clothing was worn and scant, and for whom 
there was no shelter from the biting winds. 

Not many weeks before the time when our 
story opens, the two young soldiers had been 
brought to Camp Sorghum to share the ex- 
periences of hundreds of their unfortunate 
comrades who had been captured by the Con- 
federate army. Taylor for many weeks had 
been a prisoner in Eichmond in Libby Prison, 
as the dilapidated old building which before 
the war was known as a storehouse of Libby 
& Son, was termed. Of his sufferings there 
he had told Erwin so many tales that they 
seemed almost to be a part of the latter’s own 
experiences. From Libby, Taylor had been 
taken by train with many of his fellow pris- 
oners to Danville, which also is in Vir- 
ginia, and then from that place had been sent 
on to Columbia, South Carolina, where in 
the prison pen he had met his friend and 
schoolmate, Erwin Smith, who already had 
been confined in Camp Sorghum for several 
weeks. 


EXCITEMENT IN CAMP 


13 


The meeting of the boys under such cir- 
cumstances had at once revived the friend- 
ship of their school days, and day and night 
had found them drawn more closely together. 
Indeed, among their friends they were com- 
monly referred to as the twins — so insep- 
erable had they become. 

Boused by the sharp call of Taylor, Erwin 
stood for a moment watching the band that 
was speeding across the field on which the 
camp was located. A moment only he de- 
layed and then he hastily followed his friend, 
who now was running swiftly in the direction 
of the noisy group that had halted for a brief 
time not far away. 

Before Erwin could join the assembly it 
had started on once more and the noisy 
shouts were redoubled. The guard by this 
time had been aroused. Men in uniforms 
of gray, holding in their hands rifles which 
were ready for use, were also speeding in 
the direction of the shouting band of prison- 
ers, although as yet the cause of the excite- 
ment could not be seen. 

When Erwin at last forced his way into 
the midst of the men he saw there a terrified 


14 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


little brown pig. The little animal was 
squealing loudly and darting here and there 
in its frantic etforts to escape through the 
lines of its pursuers. 

Every man will have the part of the pig 
he can grab!’^ shouted one of the prisoners. 

<<IVe got a ham!’’ loudly cried one, as his 
hand was placed on a leg of the frightened 
little animal. The pig, emitting another 
squeal of terror, eluded his captor and then 
redoubled its efforts to escape. 

‘‘You’ll have to be satisfied with the squeal, 
Tom, ’ ’ laughed one of the band as he noticed 
the expression of dismay on his friend’s face 
at the loss of the prize. 

Most of the men, however, were terribly in 
earnest and in no mood for light retorts. 
Hunger, weakness, homesickness, hope de- 
ferred — all the awful elements of the life of 
a prisoner in war time were to be seen in 
the faces of the struggling men. They were 
in deadly earnest now and the prospect of 
such food as the pig could provide had 
brought out all the selfish traits of human 
nature. The chase had become no laughing 
matter on their part, although the guard, 


EXCITEMENT IN CAMP 


15 


now aware of the cause of the commotion, 
were shouting their bantering words of ap- 
proval, ^‘Go it, Yank! Catch him. Blue 
Belly ! Fresh pork 1 ^ ^ and other similar cries 
greeted the ears of the pursuers, although 
few gave any heed even if they heard the 
mocking words. 

At last, when the helpless victim had been 
seized, Erwin was holding fast to a leg, Tay- 
lor was grasping the pig^s tail, while another 
held an ear or foot, and some even were cling- 
ing to the long bristles on the hack or sides. 
The pig was lying helpless and breathless on 
the ground beneath the bodies of those who 
had flung themselves upon it. 

‘^Let the lieutenant decide,’^ called one of 
the men as all clung tenaciously to the part 
of the pig’s body each had secured. 

^ Lieutenant Brown advanced and good- 
naturedly agreed to the proposal, calling out 
each name and the part that belonged to him 
as he proceeded in his investigation. ‘‘Pri- 
vate Smith, a ham!” “Private Cooper, one 
pig’s tail,” he shouted. Those who were 
among the fortunate ones laughed as Tay- 
lor’s portion was announced, but those who 


16 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


had not succeeded in laying hands upon the 
pig listened glumly and made no response. 
To them it was not a laughing matter to fail 
in their attempt to secure a bit of the only 
fresh meat that had been seen in the camp. 

Within a half hour after Lieutenant Brown 
had declared his awards a fire had been 
made and the little pig, cut into many por- 
tions, was boiling in one of the iron kettles 
that belonged to the camp. Few words were 
spoken by the men who gathered about the 
fire and waited — afraid to leave the place be- 
fore the final distribution had been made. 
The odors from the kettle served to deepen 
the gloom of the luckless ones who lingered 
with the others about the fire. The only 
eager ones were those who had been named 
by the lieutenant when he had acted as ar- 
biter in the dispute. 

Before the meal had been thoroughly 
cooked the distribution was made and Erwin 
with his ham and Taylor with the tail, which, 
with due solemnity, had been given him, de- 
parted. The wistful eyes of some of his 
friends were more than Erwin could endure, 
and his invitations to join him in his repast 


EXCITEMENT IN CAMP 17 

were many— so many, in fact, that there was 
but a bit of boiled ham for any one. 

Just as the repast was begun by the hun- 
gry men, Samuel Carson, better known as 
Uncle Sam — a tall, thin, sour-visaged young 
man, whom Erwin had known in the village 
in New York from which he himself had 
come, approached the group. 

Where is my share, Erwin U’ demanded 
Samuel. 

^ ^You’re too late, I^m afraid,’^ said Erwin, 
as he held forth to view the small piece 
which he was holding in his hand. 

<< There’s never anything for me when you 
have the say!” 

Erwin’s face flushed slightly and he hesi- 
tated. The men about him were ravenously 
devouring the bits which had been given 
them. His own portion was pitifully small 
and he was intensely hungry. 

^‘Why didn’t you get your hand on the 
pig?” demanded Taylor sharply. 

tried hard, and I did, for that matter. 
I had hold of the foot before Erwin did. He 
pushed me off,” retorted Samuel gruffly. 

‘ ‘ I didn ’t know it, ’ ’ laughed Erwin. ‘ ‘ Per- 


18 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


haps I did. It was such a scramble I didn’t 
know just what I was doing. I’ll give you a 
part of mine anyway,” he added as he di- 
vided the tiny strip he was holding. 

“Hold on a minute!” exclaimed Taylor as 
he arose from his seat on the ground and 
faced the newcomer. “Uncle Sam, haven’t 
you had any of the pig? I saw you coming 
from the lieutenant’s mess.” 

‘ ^ Only a mouthful. ’ ’ 

“If you had all your mouth could hold you 
had more than any of us had. Keep your 
meat and swallow it now before some one else 
tries to get it away from you,” he added 
sharply as he turned to his friend. 

Hungry and weak, Erwin hastily did as 
he was bidden. Samuel watched him, his 
anger apparent in the malignant expression 
of his face, and then turning abruptly on his 
heel he said as he departed — ‘ ‘ That pig meat 
will cost you more than any you ever had or 
are ever likely to have ! I shan’t forget your 
generosity.” 

“Don’t!” retorted Taylor as Erwin made 
no response. “And don’t forget either how 
you had some of the pork at the lieutenant’s 


EXCITEMENT IN CAMP 


19 


mess and then came over here and tried to 
get some of ours too. Don’t forget that, 
please, and the next time a stray pig runs 
into camp we’ll try to cook that and not you, 
though there’s mighty little difference be- 
tween you.” 

The derisive shout of laughter that rose 
from the men followed the departing Samuel, 
« who looked behind, plainly showing his an- 
ger. 

‘‘I wish I’d divided with him,” said Erwin. 

<<I’m glad you didn’t. Sometimes I think 
Uncle Sam is not worth feeding at all. I’ve 
heard — ” 

‘‘What have you heard!” inquired Erwin 
as Taylor stopped abruptly. 

“Never mind, now. Perhaps I’ll tell you 
later. ’ ’ 

The two friends by this time had returned 
to the place where the one blanket which they 
shared in turn had been left. For several 
days they had been sleeping in the daytime 
as the nights were so cold that rest was well- 
nigh impossible. The clothing of the boys 
was in tatters, and even the shoes on their 
feet were in shreds. Only the preceding day 


20 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


Erwin had secured an old felt hat which some 
one had cast away as useless, and from it had 
fashioned soles for his shoes, sewing the 
cloth to the worn leather by strings which 
one of the guard had generously given him. 
His ‘^new shoes were a source of envy to 
many of his comrades, who had not thought 
of his plan of repairing, but felt hats no 
longer were to be found and other means 
were not to be had. 

Eice and salt pork had been the chief sta- 
ples of food, and as these were cooked by the 
prisoners themselves the diet was not one 
upon which the men were likely to thrive. 
Not a word could be heard as to the actions 
of the army to which the boys belonged, and 
the uncertainty that resulted had intensified 
the feeling of homesickness, which more than 
any other one cause, was doing much to make 
the long confinement in the prison pen un- 
bearable. 

Erwin had keenly suffered from this cause, 
and, had it not been for his friend Taylor, 
would have been even worse than he now was. 
The spirits of the latter apparently never 
failed, and, though Erwin was not aware of 


EXCITEMENT IN CAMP 


21 


the fact, many of his efforts were directed 
toward the one purpose of preventing his 
friend from becoming entirely hopeless. 

‘^This night makes me think of home,’’ 
said Erwin thoughtfully, as the boys seated 
themselves. ^‘You know our farm is only a 
half mile out from the village and this time 
of the year the boys used to come there. 
There were bushels of apples and barrels of 
cider, and sparerib and — ” 

‘‘That’s all right,” broke in Taylor cheer- 
ily. “You’ll be there again pretty soon. 
This war isn’t going to last forever. ‘When 
Johnny comes marching home again,’ why, 
all the boys and girls will turn out to see 
the brave soldier boy! There’ll be music 
and all the sparerib you can eat and twice as 
many barrels of cider as the old orchard ever 
saw, and more apples, too. You’ll be glad 
to see all the family and — ” 

“If I ever do see them,” interrupted Er- 
win. 

“See them? Of course we’ll see them! 
We’ll be exchanged or — ” 

“Or what?” said Erwin as his friend 
paused. 


22 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


we’ll get away from this pen.” 

‘^Doesn’t look much like it now,” mur- 
mured Erwin, as he glanced at the guards 
patroling the camp. 

‘‘Of course it doesn’t just now. You don’t 
suppose we’ll walk out and find no one ready 
to stop us, do you? That isn’t' the way it’s 
done. ’ ’ 

“How is it done?” 

“Oh, there are a hundred ways.” 

“Mention one.” 

“Well, there was Tom Woods who was in 
Libby when I was there. He didn ’t feel very 
well one day and the next day he was worse 
and he was taken to the hospital. He kept 
getting worse and worse and finally he was 
taken to the dead room — ” 

“Was he dead? That isn’t the way I 
mean. ’ ’ 

“I’ve had my doubts about Tom’s being 
so very dead. You see he’d told me his plans 
and just how he was going to go through 
what it was said he did go through. I’ve a 
notion that the darkies, when they took out 
the dead that day when Tom ‘died,’ got a 
scare that made their wool straighten out.” 


EXCITEMENT IN CAMP 


23 


“You don’t really think Tom was dead?” 

“No, I don’t. At least I have my doubts. 
It won’t scare me any when I take his hand 
when I get home. I know that much any- 
way. ’ ’ 

“You always find something to cheer you 
up,” said Erwin, with more interest than as 
yet he had shown. 

“Of course I do. That’s the only way. 
Listen, Erwin, I’ve got something to tell 
you, ’ ’ Taylor added, as he cautiously glanced 
about him to make certain no one was within 
hearing. 


CHAPTEE II 


TUNNELS 

The two friends were not near any of their 
comrades at the time and satisfied that his 
words could not be overheard, Taylor said 
abruptly, ‘^We must try to get out of this 
camp.’’ 

For a moment Erwin’s face brightened as 
he stared at his companion. The thought of 
escaping had often been in his own mind, but 
thus far an opportunity had not been found. 
Indeed, so well was the place guarded, that 
the possibility of a break for freedom had 
seemed hopeless. The recollection of his 
own experiences caused the young prisoner’s 
face to darken once more, and he said in a 
low voice: ‘Must’ is a good word, Tay- 

lor. It is easy to say what ought to be done, 
but it isn’t so easy to tell how to do it. Have 
you any plan?” 

“Not one.” 

“How are you going to get away then?” 

24 


TUNNELS 


25 


‘‘Find a way. We must set our heads to 
working. If we can^t find a way we must 
make one. I don’t mean to stay here much 
longer. ’ ’ 

“I’m sure I don’t want to, either; hut what 
can be done?” 

“That’s something we must find out.” 

“A good many have tried it,” suggested 
Erwin dubiously. 

“And some have made it.” 

“Some haven’t.” 

“That doesn’t change the fact that some 
did.” 

“You always find something good to see or 
say. Only yesterday when we found our salt 
pork spoiled and the little rice we had was 
not good you laughed and said, ‘If we’re hun- 
gry we sha’n’t have to suffer from eating too 
much.’ ” 

“What’s the matter with that?” 

“Nothing. Only I don’t seem to be able 
to make the plan work in my case. When 
I’m hungry — then I’m hungry, and that’s all 
there is to it. Ifimy tooth aches I don’t find 
much comfort in thinking that I haven’t ever 
had to have my foot cut oif.” 


26 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


Yes, and that’s where you make your mis- 
take. You’d feel better if you did.” 

^^It works all right with you.” 

^‘It will with you, too. I knew an old 
Scotchman who was a very devout man. He 
used to thank the Lord when rheumatism 
came that it wasn’t gout, and when he had 
the gout, he was just as glad it wasn’t rheu- 
matism.” 

‘‘What did he do when he had both!” 

“Thanked the Lord he wasn’t blind.” 

Erwin laughed as he said, “You’ve learned 
the lesson all right, but I’m afraid I haven’t. 
I can’t get away from what I see here,” he 
added, as he glanced about the prison pen. 
Hundreds of men as unfortunate as them- 
selves were to be seen, some walking discon- 
solately about the field, some seated, and oth- 
ers lying upon the ground. All about the 
place the guard of Confederate soldiers were 
to be seen and the “dead line” was plainly 
marked. If any man dared to cross it, his 
fate was sealed. 

“You’ll learn,” said Taylor. “You’re 
bound to learn. Now have -you any scheme 


TU^fJLS 27 

to suggest? You must have an idea or two 
about you/’ 

^‘IVe thought of it, of course, but what 
good does thinking do? You can’t even try 
to tunnel when you’re in the open all the 
time. ’ ’ 

^ ^ Tunneling is hard work. Let us be glad 
and rejoice that we haven’t that to do. We’ll 
save our strength for what comes after we 
get away. ’ ’ 

‘^Sometimes I’ve had an idea that we 
might run for it some morning when we go 
for water. The guard that goes with us to 
the spring is made up of good shots, however, 
and I’m afraid we wouldn’t go far.” 

‘‘You’re doing better. Breaking away 
from the guard is better than digging a tun- 
nel. What else ? ’ ’ 

“I haven’t thought of anything more,” re- 
plied Erwin gloomily. 

“When I was in Libby,” began Taylor, as 
if he had not heard his friend’s reply, “Colo- 
nel Eose of the Seventy-seventh Pennsyl- 
vania got up a plan for tunneling out of the 
old trap. Just twenty-seven men were taken 


28 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


into the plan and every one was to be a 
worker. You see, the colonel knew what he 
was about, for he’d been in the Mexican war, 
and when he was taken prisoner there he dug 
a tunnel out beyond the guard and got away 
from the ^greasers.’ All the men in his plan 
at Libby knew of this and they were all ready 
to do anything he told them. The colonel had 
found in the basement a little room which 
wasn’t used for anything, and after he’d 
been watching for a few days he found that 
no one went near it. 

‘^One day the colonel went in there him- 
self and discovered that one of the chimneys 
came down into that room. This chimney 
ran up through our cookroom and the first 
thing to be done was to make an opening in 
that. The slop barrels hid this opening, so 
there was little danger of its being discov- 
ered. 

‘‘One day the rebels were arranging for 
a flag raising at the prison and when they’d 
finished their work they left a short ladder 
behind them in our room. This ladder was 
taken and lowered in the chimney. Then at 
the bottom where the ladder rested work was 


TUNNELS 29 

begun at once in digging a hole through the 
chimney wall.’’ 

‘‘Didn’t any one ask for the ladder? Was 
there any search for it?” 

“Yes, but it didn’t amount to much for it 
was believed it had been broken up for kin- 
dling wood. An old broken trowel and half 
a tin canteen were the only tools our men 
had in their digging until one day some ma- 
sons came to do some repairing and while 
they were busy somehow one of their trowels 
mysteriously disappeared. We all tried to^ 
help find it but naturally we didn’t succeed, 
because it was down in the tunnel where we 
had two men at work all the time. One man 
would dig and the other would scoop up the 
dirt with an old blanket and carry it to a cor- 
ner of the room where the tunnel started. 

“At last the work was all done and the 
end of the tunnel was in a vacant lot sixty- 
five feet from the walls of old Libby. It was 
just big enough for one man at a time to 
crawl through it. The funny part of it all 
was that the sentinels saw every man that 
came out and didn’t hail one,” 


“Why not?” 


30 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


‘ ^ Took them for some of the ‘ J ohnnies ^ go- 
ing through the boxes that had been sent us 
from home. You see these boxes were all 
stacked right over the end of the tunnel.’’ 

‘‘How many of our men got away!” 

“A hundred and fifteen.” 

“You don’t mean it! Did the rebels 
catch any of them!” 

“Yes. They got twelve the first day, six- 
teen the second and twenty the third. All 
the others — let me see, that left sixty-seven, 
— were never heard of. I’ve no doubt they 
reached our lines all right.” 

“How did the men leave the prison — I 
mean how did they go out through the tun- 
nel!” 

“That’s where the break was made that al- 
most spoiled the whole thing. Only the 
twenty-seven were supposed to know any- 
thing about the tunnel, but some of them of 
course told their friends and the first thing 
we knew there was a fighting mob — every 
man trying to be the first to get out. It was 
.a fierce fight, too, for our men were like wild 
beasts. Two or three shrewd little chaps 
put up a game that let them get out ahead. 


TUNNELS 


31 


When the mob was wildest these young fel- 
lows went where the pots and pans were kept 
and began to rattle them at a great rate and 
in a minute the clatter made our men think 
the guard was coming. When the fellows ran 
from the tunnel these young fellows made a 
break for it and got out before the others 
got their eyes open. Then the wild rush be- 
gan again.” 

‘‘How was it that only a few got away?” 

“It was slow work crawling through that 
long tunnel one at a time. Then Lieutenant 
Kandolph, who is a big fellow, got caught in 
the middle of it and couldnT go ahead or 
back out. The man in front pulled on him 
and the man behind pushed and at last they 
got the lieutenant through, but he was almost 
dead and of course it made a long delay. 
When daylight came and the work had to 
stop we counted up and found that one hun- 
dred and fifteen had crawled out.” 

“How did the rebels find out?” 

“The morning roll call showed who were 
missing. At first the guard couldnT under- 
stand what had become of the prisoners and 
the men were poking fun at one another for 


32 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


the ^mistake. ’ Pretty soon the guard became 
a little more serious and then they made us 
all go into one room and come out by twos 
while they checked off every name. They 
tried the same thing twice, but got the same 
result — the roll call was one hundred and fif- 
teen short. Then they began to look, and of 
course in a little while they found the tunnel 
and everything was plain.’’ 

^‘What did they do to you?” 

^ ‘ Shortened up our rations for awhile, but 
they laughed and joked with us about it. 
They called the tunnel ‘The Great Yankee 
Wonder.’ For awhile there was a guard at 
each end of it and hundreds of people came 
to see the sight.” 

“Why didn’t you get away, Taylor?” 

“Somebody had to be left.” 

“Didn’t you have a chance? Weren’t you 
near enough to crowd into it?” 

“Yes, I believe I was once.” 

“Why didn’t you go on?” 

“Well, I don’t just remember unless it 
was that there was a young chap next to me 
who had a wife and two babies at home. He 
seemed to be a bit more anxious than I was 


TUNNELS 


33 


and I think he got my place away from me. ^ ’ 

^‘You mean you let him have your place!’’ 

‘^Do I?” laughed Taylor. 

‘‘Yes, you do. It’s a good story, all right, 
but how can it help us here? We can’t dig a 
tunnel.” 

“No more we can’t. But it has one or two 
good lessons for us.” 

“What?” 

“Well, one is that twenty-seven is too large 
a number to make a plan at one time. Two 
are all we want. You and I.” 

“What are we going to try?” 

“The rebels sent a lot of us on to Dan- 
ville pretty soon,” began Taylor again as if 
he had not heard his friend’s question. 
“They sent us in box cars. The old train 
was pretty well guarded and bumped along 
so slowly that one time when we were going 
through a stretch of woods two of our boys 
jumped off the car and made for the trees.” 

“Did they get away?” demanded Erwin 
eagerly. 

‘ ‘ Of course ! All the fellows struck up the 
Star Spangled Banner when we heard what 
had occurred, hut the guard shut us in the 


34 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


cars and locked the doors. It was quite 
warm enough then, thank you, without ex- 
erting ourselves any more. At Danville they 
sent us to a great tobacco warehouse and we 
hadn ^t been there but a little while before we 
began another tunnel.’^ 

‘'Did it work? Did anybody get away?’’ 
“Probably. Unfortunately, however, I 
was sent on with some of our boys — ” 

‘ ‘ Sent where ? ’ ’ 

‘ ‘ Macon. ’ ’ 

“Did you try another tunnel there?” 
“Not while I was on the spot. Two or 
three chaps got away by a slick trick. One 
night two climbed into a big tree and hid in 
the branches. They had been saving a little 
water and something to eat, and up in that 
tree the boys stayed two days. The guard 
looked everywhere, but not a trace of the 
missing prisoners could they find. After the 
search the boys slid down from their roosting 
place one dark night and departed. ’ ’ 

‘ ‘ Did the guard find them ? ’ ’ 

“Not a bit. What did you expect? Then 
two other fellows dug holes in the ground 
and stayed in them for a couple of days, and 


TUNNELS 


35 


then made for the lines of the boys in blue.’’ 

don’t see how digging holes in the 
ground could help. They were still in the 
prison or prison pen, weren’t they?” 

‘^Yes, but the whole camp was to be inoved 
the next day and our boys were hoping they’d 
be left behind. After the guard was gone 
then it would be easy to dig their way out, 
you see.’* 

‘ ‘ Did all get away ? ” 

‘‘Pretty nearly. Now, Erwin, if those fel- 
lows could think of something, we can try it, 
too. I know there is some way out. I be- 
lieve I’ve got it now!” Taylor suddenly ex- 
claimed as he stood quickly erect. 


CHAPTER III 


THE NEEDLE 

‘‘What is itP’ inquired Erwin showing 
his first sign of interest in the words of his 
friend. 

“See thatr^ demanded Taylor, as he 
showed Erwin a needle which he had drawn 
from the lapel of his tattered coat. 

“Yes, I see it. What is itP’ 

“A needle.’’ 

“What will you do with it?” 

“Find our way out of Camp Sorghum.” 

“I don’t see how.” Erwin’s first interest 
had departed as soon as he saw the tiny little 
implement in Taylor’s hand. Aware as he 
was of his friend’s imperturbable good na- 
ture, he looked upon the proposal as merely 
another of Taylor’s many nonsensical proj- 
ects. 

“Some people can’t see the point even 
when it’s right before them.” 

“That’s all right, Taylor. The joke’s lost 
36 


THE NEEDLE 37 

on me. I^m afraid I’m not in the mood to 
enjoy it.” 

Yon will when yon see what I mean to do 
with this needle.” 

‘‘What is that?” 

“Find onr way ont of this prison pen, jnst 
as I told yon.” 

“Bnt yon didn’t tell me.” 

“If I didn’t I will now. In what direction 
is my needle pointing?” inqnired Taylor as 
he held np the needle which he was grasping 
between his thnmb and forefinger. 

“North.” 

‘ ‘ Correct. Erwin, yon always were better 
than I in answering qnestions when we were 
in school. I’m glad yon haven’t forgotten 
the trick. ’ ’ 

“I don’t see what yon mean.” 

“Don’t sailors follow the ‘needle’?” 

“Yes, bnt their ‘needle’ isn’t like yonrs.” 

“Mine is better. If sailors follow theirs, 
I don’t see why we soldiers can’t follow 
onrs.” 

Erwin did not reply. The bantering words 
fonnd no response in his tronbled heart. 
Taylor might have his fnn if he chose, bnt 


38 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


as for himself, thought Erwin, there was 
nothing in them to appeal to him. 

‘‘I tell you,’’ continued Taylor, ^Hhat I 
have ‘found the way I long have sought and 
mourned because I found it not.’ That’s 
what your grandfather used to be singing all 
the time — ” 

“Don’t!” protested Erwin quickly. The 
reference of his friend had brought to his 
mind the recollection of his grandfather — a 
saintly, sweet-faced old man whose love of 
singing was well known. How many times in 
the little village church Sunday afternoons 
had Erwin as a little lad watched his grand- 
father singing that very song. The old 
man’s eyes would be closed, his head thrown 
slightly back, while in the absence of an or- 
gan in the room in which the assembly met, 
he pitched the tune. 

“But I will. I tell you I’m full of my 
project!” persisted Taylor, aware of the 
wave of homesickness which had swept over 
his companion. “It is the greatest discov- 
ery since ‘befo’ th’ wa’,’ as the darkies say 
down here.” 

“You haven’t told me what your project 


THE NEEDLE 39 

is,’^ said Erwin indifferently, not even glanc- 
ing at Taylor as he spoke. 

‘‘That, I canT tell yon — yet. Wait! It’s 
coming though. This little needle is better 
than a mariner’s compass is for sailors 
robked on the bosom of the deep. Friends, 
countrymen, fellow-citizens, Johnnies, contra- 
band, et ceteras,” added Taylor, rising as he 
spoke, and in mock solemnity sweeping his 
arm toward the camp, “if you will all turn 
the entire length of your ears toward me. 
I’ll give you something to make you wise. 
Columbus had trouble with his men because 
his needle was askew. This little implement 
of steel is worth more than a dozen needles 
of Columbus. His needle helped him to find 
a few savages clad chiefly in modesty and 
childlike simplicity. This needle will point 
the way to better things. Sparerib, cider, 
fried cakes, mince pies, all the comforts of 
home are at the end of the way it points. 
Back to the farm I Back to the orchards and 
lowing kine I Back — ” 

Taylor stopped abruptly, perceiving that 
Erwin was in no mood to listen to mock 
heroics. The sight of his dejected friend 


40 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


aroused anew the spirit of determination in 
Taylor ’s mind. Something must be done and 
done soon or Erwin would never leave the 
dreary prison pen. Homesickness, hunger, 
despair, all had written their lessons plainly 
on the face of the young prisoner. The sight 
was more than pathetic, it was tragic. 
Something must be done. 

‘^The needle is pointing the way now,’’ 
said Taylor in a different tone of voice as he 
pretended to study the tip of the needle which 
he still held. must follow. I shall be 
back ‘ ’ere before long,’ as good old Uncle 
Eoswell Glass used to say. Don’t go far 
away while I ’m gone. ’ ’ 

‘‘Not much danger of that,” responded Er- 
win dejectedly. “Hush! What’s that?” he 
demanded quickly, sitting erect as the report 
of a rifle was heard. Across the field men 
already could be seen hastening toward the 
border of the camp whence the sound had 
come. Instantly Taylor and Erwin followed. 
When they arrived at the place where the 
crowd halted they, too, joined the excited 
throng. And deeply excited every man ap- 
peared to be. There were expressions of 


THE NEEDLE 


41 


rage to be seen in the flashing eyes of the 
prisoners. The glances were divided be- 
tween the lifeless form of one of their own 
comrades stretched on the ground, and the 
guard who was patroling the border of the 
camp, apparently indifferent to the anger of 
the assembled prisoners. 

‘^Who is itr’ inquired Taylor, as he and 
Erwin pushed their way to the front. 

^‘Anthony Wood,’^ replied one. 

^‘What happened to himT^ 

‘^Shot. CanT you see for yourself T’ 

‘‘Who shot himT’ 

“The guard. 

“Whyr^ 

“Claimed he was across the dead line.’’ 

“Was he!” 

“Of course he wasn’t.” 

“Why was he shot, then?” 

“You tell. Oh, it’s more than we can 
stand much longer! Anthony isn’t the only 
one who’s been shot down in cold blood. 
Where’s Sherman? Where’s Hooker? Why 
doesn’t somebody wake up at Washington 
and do something? Here we are shut up like 
rats in a trap! And we’re left here to 


42 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


starve, or worse! Look at Anthony! Look 
at him! Poor chap, he^s out of this place 
anyway. I wish I was, too, even if I have 
to go the way poor Anthony did. ’ ’ The man, 
who was unknown to Taylor, ended in a dry 
sob. His haggard face was discolored by 
filth which apparently he had not removed 
for days. His tattered clothing and long, 
tangled hair increased the etfect of his 
wretchedness. 

At this moment the attention of the as- 
sembly was drawn to an officer who was giv- 
ing directions as to what should be done with 
the body of the fallen man. Apparently the 
mutterings of the prisoners moved the young 
officer to stop and turn toward the group. 

‘ H ’m sorry, ^ ^ he said quietly. ‘ ^ The man, ’ ’ 
he added, nodding his head at the band which 
had departed with the victim of the guard, 

^ ^ knew where the dead line is. He knew what 
would happen to him if he tried to cross it. 
If he had kept himself where he belonged he 
wouldn’t have had any trouble.” 

^‘He was inside the line,” called someone 
in the assembly. 


THE NEEDLE 


43 


‘‘The guard says he crossed it.’’ 

‘ ‘ The guard lies ! ’ ’ 

“We are compelled to accept his word,” 
said the young officer quietly. “The rules 
of a prison camp are not made for fun. You 
all know where the dead line is. Yoh all 
know what it is there for. You all know, 
too, what the orders of the guard are if he 
sees a man crossing it. Take my word and 
keep away from the dead line. Don’t ever 
get too close to it. Every guard has his 
strict orders and he isn’t the one to blame 
if anything happens. That’s what he’s here 
for — to do just what he’s ordered.” 

The mutterings of the prisoners did not 
cease when the young officer turned away. 
Glances of anger followed him as he returned 
to his quarters. The very helplessness of the 
men seemed to increase their childish expres- 
sions of rage. 

‘ ‘ Talk about escaping, ’ ’ said Erwin to Tay- 
lor as the two started back across the field. 
“That poor chap couldn’t even get across the 
dead line, much less get away from the camp. 
And yet you talk of getting away.” 


44 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


don’t Halk’ very much about it,” re- 
plied Taylor, glancing quickly about him as 
he spoke. 

‘‘You believe it, though.” 

“I do,” said Taylor quietly. “That man 
Anthony Wood, I think they said his name 
was, was a fool.” 

“Hush!” cautioned Erwin as a Confed- 
erate officer drew near. 

“He was a fool,” continued Taylor, his 
voice rising slightly. “He knew where the 
dead line was and he knew what it was for. 
If he’d kept away from it, he’d have kept 
himself in better health. If we were on 
guard in a camp in the North and we had a 
camp full of rebels, what do you think we’d 
do?” 

The passing officer plainly overheard and 
understood what the young prisoner was say- 
ing. He glanced back as he passed on, 
laughed good-naturedly at the young prison- 
ers, but did not speak. 

“You find an excuse for the guard in shoot- 
ing the man,” said Erwin indignantly. 

“He does not need any excuse. He was 
obeying orders.” 


THE NEEDLE 


45 


‘‘They say Anthony Wood wasnT across 
the dead line. ’ ’ 

“If that's true it's a different matter." 

“Our men say it's true." 

“Yes, they ‘say' it, but there wasn't a man 
near when Anthony Wood was shot. What's 
the use, Erwin? We aren't playing prison- 
er's base. We understand what the rules of 
this game are. All I say is, that a man is 
a fool to get too near the dead line of the 
camp, that's all." 

“And yet you say you're — " began Erwin 
cautiously, and then sharply checked himself. 

“I not only say it, but I'm going to do it." 

“How?" 

“With my little needle." 

“When?" 

“I'm going to begin now. You go back 
to our elegant abode and have a nap. You 
need sleep and you'll need it more before 
long. I'll be back soon." 

Abruptly turning away, Taylor left his 
friend staring at him. When next Taylor 
looked back he saw that Erwin was slowly 
walking in the direction of their quarters, if 
the open space of ground, sheltered by a torn 


46 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


blanket and reserved by them, could be dig- 
nified by such a name. 

Three hours later Taylor, too, returned and 
seated himself on the ground near his friend, 
who was sleeping heavily. Another hour 
passed and still Taylor had not changed his 
seat. In his hands was a coat upon which he 
had been working steadily since his return. 
The needle which he had promised Erwin 
would show them the way to liberty was do- 
ing duty now in drawing the thread which 
Taylor apparently had secured from some 
source. 

At this moment Erwin moved, opened his 
eyes and for a brief time stared at his friend. 
Then sitting quickly erect he said: 

‘‘What are you doing, Taylor T’ 

‘ ‘ Following my needle. ^ ’ 

“What do you mean!^’ 

“Just what I say. CanT you seeV^ 
“You’re sewing.” 

“Am I?” 

“What is that in your hands — a coat?” 
“Yes.” 


“Whose is it?” 


THE NEEDLE 47 

‘^Lieutenant Evans — the officer we met on 
our way back here a little while ago.’’ 

“What are you doing with his coat?” 

“Mending it.” 

“What are you doing that for?” demanded 
Erwin indignantly. 

“I’ve told you already.” 

“What?” 

‘ ‘ Following my needle. If we follow it all 
right it’ll take us out of this forlorn place. 
I never wanted anything so much as I do 
that. ’ ’ 

“I wish you’d explain yourself,” said Er- 
win testily. 

“I will, with pleasure,” responded Taylor, 
rejoiced that his friend at last had been even 
slightly aroused. “This needle which you 
see in my hands I found. This coat occasion- 
ally covers the elegant figure of Lieutenant 
Evans of the so-called C. S. A. To him I 
went and displayed my needle. Likewise my 
talent as a tailor.” 

“Did you tell him you were a tailor?” 

“Yes, I told him I was a Taylor. Instantly 
the proud Southerner responded. He gave 


48 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


me this coat to mend, and eke also and addi- 
tional his promise of more.’^ 

Erwin leaped to his feet and his interest 
was now sufficient to satisfy even his friend. 


CHAPTEE IV 


UNCLE SAM 

‘^You intend to dress in that coat and try 
to pass the guard,’’ exclaimed Erwin in a low 
voice as he looked down upon his friend. 

^‘You are beginning to find the trail,” re- 
plied Taylor. 

“But what of me?” Erwin demanded after 
a moment of silence. “There’s only one coat 
and we can’t both of us walk out in that.” 

“That’s true.” 

The expression of Erwin’s face instantly 
changed. The young prisoner’s despond- 
ency returned. His blue eyes were moist and 
all the energy and interest he had displayed 
a moment before apparently were gone. Of 
medium size, ordinarily strong and quick in 
every bodily action, he now presented a pic- 
ture of complete hopelessness. Erwin’s 
moods were many and the passage from one 
to another was sometimes so sudden as to 
be puzzling to those who were not well ac- 
49 


50 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


quainted with the impulsive young prisoner. 

Taylor, taller almost by a head than his 
friend, dark of hair and eyes, wiry and mus- 
cular of body and much slower in his move- 
ments, except when prompt action was re- 
quired, in many ways was the counterpart 
of his companion. In their country home 
each had been famed for his ability as a 
wrestler. Popular as the sport was among 
the country hoys, for some reason there had 
never been a test of strength and skill be- 
tween Taylor and Erwin. Perhaps each had 
a stronger feeling of respect for the other’s 
prowess than either cared to acknowledge. 
The skill, as well as the strength of each 
was so different from that employed by the 
other that both had laughingly declared that 
a match would be no true test. The sincere 
regard of each for the other may have in- 
tensified this feeling, but whatever the cause 
may have been, the warm friendship between 
the two had never been broken, and despite 
the eager desires of the admirers of both a 
wrestling match between the two had never 
been successfully arranged. 

Erwin, full of life and quick to see or play 


UNCLE SAM 


51 


a joke, had somehow grown in his feeling of 
respect for the more quiet and ofttimes droll 
ways of Taylor. Slower in speech, less ener- 
getic at least in appearance, the latter never- 
theless was deeply respected for the reserve 
power which all his comrades knew he pos- 
sessed. Never had the dissimilarities be- 
tween the two friends been more manifest 
than in the afternoon of this November day, 
when both were prisoners in Camp Sorghum 
near the capital of South Carolina. 

The silence which had followed Taylor ^s 
trite remark in responding to his friend’s 
suggestion was unbroken for a time. Taylor, 
seated upon the ground, continued to wield 
his needle and thread so deftly that Erwin, 
watching him, was interested in his clever- 
ness despite his own feeling of depression. 
And yet it was not surprising after all, Er- 
win thought, as he recalled many of the sur- 
prising things Taylor had done as a lad. He 
could take a watch to pieces, and what was 
more wonderful, he could put it together 
again. What marvelous pictures of pranc- 
ing steeds Taylor had drawn on his slate 
when supposedly he had been busied in ^ ‘ do- 


52 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


ing his sums.’’ Not a boy in school could 
bat as he did. He knew where were the best 
‘‘holes” in all the near-by streams. Well did 
Erwin recall the first day he had ever gone 
fishing with his friend. What exclamations 
of surprise had greeted them when they had 
returned with their catch. The willow 
stringers, which Taylor had cut and fash- 
ioned, were filled to their tops with the 
horned dace, pumpkin-seed, and rock bass 
they had taken. And yet, though Erwin had 
shared in the joy of the day as well as in the 
glory that had been won, he still was aware 
that Taylor had been the real, if not the ap- 
parent, power behind it all. Even when he 
had dropped his hook and line beside Tay- 
lor’s in the “hole” which his friend pointed 
out, and to which the boys cautiously ap- 
proached, somehow the very fish seemed to 
prefer Taylor’s bait to his. It was true that 
his own catch had not been small except in 
comparison with his friend’s, which was so 
much larger. 

Something of the old feeling of admiration 
for the prowess and skill of his friend now 
returned to Erwin as he stood looking down 


UNCLE SAM 


53 


upon the ‘^tailor’’ busily engaged in repair- 
ing the young lieutenant coat. 

^ ^ Do you intend to try to-night ? ’ ^ inquired 
Erwin at last. 

‘‘You never can tell.’’ 

“You’ll get away. I’m sure you will.” 

“Let us hope so,” responded Taylor with- 
out looking up from his task. 

“Can’t you think of some way for me to 
try too!” 

“None better than this.” 

“I can’t sew. I didn’t know you could, 
but I’m not a hit surprised to see you do it. 
If you were ordered to lead the Army of the 
Potomac I think you would do it better than 
General McClellan.” 

“That’s not much of a compliment — at 
least if what the people all say is true.” 

“What can I do! Black up as a darkey 
and go along as your body servant!” 

“No.” 

“What then!” 

“Do what I’m doing now.” 

“If getting out of Sorghum depends on 
my sewing I’m afraid I’ll be here for five 
years if the war lasts that long. From what 


54 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


we hear, it^s likely to keep on till the day 
of judgment,’’ Erwin added dejectedly. 

‘‘I tell you we are going to get out of 
this. ’ ’ 

*^You are, you mean. I don’t see any 
chance for me to go. I am glad you’ll try it. 
If you do break away and if you should get 
back to the old home — just tell my — ” Erwin 
stopped abruptly and quickly turned away 
his face. The pere suggestion of going home 
was hard in the face of the conditions which 
surrounded him at the present moment. 

^‘Here comes Uncle Sam. Look out!” 
cautioned Taylor, raising his head for a mo- 
ment to speak to his friend. Near them was 
the lank form of their fellow townsman ap- 
proaching the place. 

‘‘What are you doing, Taylor!” demanded 
Samuel Carson as he stopped before the 
boys. 

“Embroidering a handkerchief,” replied 
Taylor soberly. 

“Whose coat is that!” 

“It belongs to a distinguished officer of the 
C. S. A.” 

“What are you doing with it!” 


UNCLE SAM 


55 


‘^Fixing it over for Jeif Davis.’’ 

^ ^ What are yon doing anyway % ’ ’ continued 
Samuel, bending low over the garment in 
Taylor’s hands. 

‘‘If I tell you, Uncle Sam, will you promise 
never to tell a living soul ? ’ ’ inquired Taylor, 
dropping the coat and rising before the new- 
comer. 

The serious manner of the young tailor 
was so impressive that Samuel’s interest was 
instantly quickened. He readily gave his 
promise. 

“ ‘Cross your heart I’ ‘Hope to die?’ ” 
demanded Taylor in a low, deep voice. 

“Yes, yes.” 

“Well, then. I’ll tell you. I am fixing over 
this coat to make it fit a human being/ ^ Tay- 
lor’s voice dropped into a most impressive 
whisper. “Yes, Uncle Sam, this coat will 
cover a beating heart, the lungs and liver of 
a male man of the masculine gender. Now 
you’ve given me your word of honor never to 
tell and I shall trust you.” 

Swinging the coat over his arm, Taylor at 
once departed, whistling as he went the tune : 
“When Johnnie comes marching home 


56 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


again.’’ His abrupt departure was as sur- 
prising to Erwin as it was to his visitor, and 
for a moment neither spoke as they both 
watched their departing friend. 

‘‘What was Taylor doing with that coat 
anyway, Erwin I” inquired Samuel as he 
seated himself upon the ground. 

“He told you,” replied Erwin shortly. 
The presence of Uncle Sam at the moment 
was as disconcerting as the unexpected de- 
parture of Taylor with the coat had been. 
What were Taylor’s plans'? thought Erwin. 
Had he abandoned the project of trying to 
pass the lines? Perhaps he had concluded 
that the venture was too full of peril to be 
attempted. The thought did not tend to rec- 
oncile Erwin to the presence of Samuel, for 
whom he did not cherish too warm a regard 
at best. Samuel’s evident purpose, too, to* 
remain for a time did not aid in soothing the 
young prisoner’s feelings. He heartily 
wished Uncle Sam were somewhere else than 
where he then was. 

“That was one of Taylor’s jokes,” said 
Samuel, soberly, at last. 

“Was it?” 


UNCLE SAM 57 

*‘Yes, it was. He was fixing that coat for 
Lieutenant Evans. 

‘^Was her^ inquired Erwin, startled as 
well as surprised by SamuePs knowledge. 

He was aware, too, that his visitor was 
shrewdly observing him. 

^‘Yes, he was,^^ declared Samuel. ‘‘He’s 
a fool for his pains.” 

“Who?” 

“Taylor.” 

“What makes you say that?” 

“Because I know. Sometimes I’ve sus- 
pected Taylor of scheming to get out of the 
camp. He’d better not try it, that’s all.” 

“What do you mean?” 

“I know Taylor Cooper. I’ve known him 
ever since — he used to make flytraps for me 
on the way to the old swimming hole. Don’t 
you remember how he used to tie the long 
grass that grew each side of the path? I 
tripped and fell one day when I was coming 
home. ’ ’ 

“Did it hurt you?” inquired Erwin, 
smiling at the recollection of the sight of 
the ungainly Uncle Sam sprawling in the 
meadow. 


58 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


hurt me, inside,’’ said Samuel with a 
scowl. ^^That wasn’t all he did, either. He 
used to make fun of me. He used to get 
me to stay after school and chase balls for 
him when you and he played two-old-cat. 
He promised to pay me for it, but he never 
did.” 

‘^What made you stay, then?” 

wanted the two cents a game he said 
he’d give me.” 

‘‘Probably he forgot all about it.” 

“I didn’t forget it, let me tell you! You 
remember my father, Erwin 

“Yes.” Who could ever forget Toby Car- 
son, the father of Uncle Sam? A twisted, de- 
formed body, one leg withered and much 
shorter than the other, the corpulent body, 
the face bloated and leery from too frequent 
visits to the bar-room of the local hotel — all 
these were still vivid in the mind of Erwin. 
The two canes by whose aid Toby crawled 
along the village street, much as a wounded 
crab might have done, were still clearly seen 
in his mind. Toby was the village harness 
maker, and his deformity would have aroused' 


VNCLE SAM 


59 


the pity of the warm-hearted villagers had it 
not been known that after he returned home 
from his long visits in the bar-room it was 
reported that he was accustomed to use his 
two canes in beating his timid, little, over- 
worked wife, who took in washing and vir- 
tually supported her drunken, worthless hus- 
band, as well as her only child. Yes, Erwin 
could, indeed, remember the brutal father of 
the young man now seated before him. 

‘‘One winter day,” said Samuel, bitterly, 
“the little hill in front of the post office was a 
glare of ice. It had rained and then froze a 
half dozen times. My father came out of the 
office that morning and started down the 
street. He had to use two canes, you know. 
Well, he began to slip on the ice and the more 
he tried to stop or help himself the worse off 
he was. He called for help ! He yelled for it. 
He shouted ! His canes were beating the air 
like a windmill. By and by he fell — you 
know he was a heavy man, and he sat down 
hard. One of the canes flew out of his hands. 
He just slid all the way down that icy hill 
in front of the post office. He went all the 


60 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


way to the bottom and not a soul came to help 
him. What do you think Taylor Cooper 
didV^ 

‘‘What did he doT’ inquired Erwin, striv- 
ing to repress the smile which arose at the 
recollection of the scene which he well re- 
membered. He was there himself. 

‘ ‘ Taylor and another fellow — I think it was 
you,” added Samuel malignantly, “were 
right there at the foot of the hill. There 
was my father coming right toward them slid- 
ing on his back. He was shouting and call- 
ing for help at the top of his lungs. Did 
Taylor or the other fellow help him? Not a 
bit ! They just leaned over the fence there in 
front of Jake Witter ’s place and laughed. 
It wasnT any mild little laugh, either. They 
yelled, they screamed as if they enjoyed the 
sight.” 

“Yes, they did,” assented Erwin with a 
laugh that plainly increased the rage of his 
visitor. ‘ ‘ It was a funny sight. But we felt 
sorry for the poor man and just as soon as 
we got our breath we started to lift him from 
the ice. Just then your mother came run- ^ 
ning to help him and what do you suppose 


UNCLE 8AM 


61 


your father did? He struck her with his 
cane because she hadn’t come sooner! Tay- 
lor and I were so disgusted we left. I 
wouldn’t help a brute like that to — ” 

Never you mind. I haven’t forgotten 
it,” broke in Samuel savagely. ‘‘My turn 
will come some day. You won’t laugh then, 
let me tell you!” Turning abruptly away 
Samuel at once departed. 

His threat had not seriously disturbed Er- 
win, who had slight fear of Uncle Sam. The 
reference to the fall of Toby — “Uncle Toby” 
he was called in the village — had amused 
him. He would tell Taylor about the visit, 
he said to himself. Just then Erwin per- 
ceived his friend approaching and the strange 
expression of his face instantly drove away 
all these thoughts. 


CHAPTER V 


A SCHEME 

'^What is it, Taylor!’^ inquired Erwin as 
his friend drew near and cast upon the 
ground two coats which he had brought. 

‘‘Can’t you seeT’ 

“I can’t say that I can,” replied Erwin 
dubiously, glancing first at the garments and 
then at his friend. 

“I’m going into the tailoring business. ’ ’ 

“Whose coats are they?” 

“I don’t know. Lieutenant Evans told 
me to take them and fix them up.” 

“He must think you are an expert.” 

“I don’t care what he thinks if he only 
gives me the coats.” 

“There are two of them. Is one of them 
for me?” 

“No.” 

“I don’t see — ” 

“You will,” interrupted Taylor. “I’m 
62 


A SCHEME 


63 


getting a name in the business, as I told you. 
We ^11 fix these coats and then we’ll have 
more.” 

‘‘Don’t you intend to use these?” inquired 
Erwin in a low voice. 

“No.” 

“I thought you said you did.” 

“I’m going to use coats — ^but not these. 
It’s too early in the game to try anything yet. 
Wait a day or two, or perhaps a little longer, 
and then we’ll be ready. You see, I’ve got 
two coats here and my plan is to send them 
both back in such a state of perfection that 
others will want me to do the same thing for 
theirs. We’ll have coats to fix all the time. 
Then when the right time comes we’ll put 
them on and walk right out of the camp. We 
must find a coat that will be long enough for 
me, and one, too, that will not make you look 
more like a scarecrow than you do now. But 
we must find the right time as well as the 
right coats.” 

‘ ‘ What ’ll you do for caps ? We can ’t walk 
out bareheaded.” 

“I’ve thought of that. I’m watching all 
the time. Perhaps I’ll find what we want. 


64 FOE THE STARS AND STRIPES 


If we don’t, we’ll have to do the best we 
can without them.” 

‘‘What will happen to us if we are 
caught?” 

“We mustn’t be.” 

“But if we are?” 

“We’ll have to take what comes. Don’t 
you think it’s worth trying?” 

“Yes, I do,” responded Erwin eagerly. 
“I’m ready to try almost anything. Still, 
Anthony Wood — ” 

“What of him?” 

“He didn’t get very far away, poor 
chap.” 

“No. But he didn’t use his head. You 
and I would have the same thing happen to 
us if in broad daylight we walked straight 
across the dead line.” 

“You don’t intend to try our plan except 
in the evening?” 

‘ ‘ I don ’t intend to try it then. ’ ’ 

“When?” 

“At the right time, whether it’s day or 
night.” 

“Uncle Sam has just gone away.” 

“What did he have to say for himself?” 


A SCHEME 


65 


told me how he intended to get even 
with yon and me.’’ 

‘‘For what?” 

Thus bidden, Erwin related the conversa- 
tion he had had with Samuel, not omitting the 
references which had been made to the fall 
of Uncle Toby. “I didn’t think Uncle Sam 
would hold a grudge so long,” added Erwin. 
“And in Camp Sorghum, of all places! One 
naturally would think he ’d be ready to let by- 
gones he bygones when we are all in the 
trouble we’re all in here.” 

“No,” said Taylor thoughtfully. “I 
know Uncle Sam too well. He hasn ’t ‘ all his 
buttons’ an3rway. How could he, having 
such a father as Uncle Toby? I’m afraid 
he ’ll make trouble for us. ’ ’ 

“How can he do that?” 

“In a good many ways. He’s vindictive 
and not very bright at best. He ought not to 
have been allowed to enlist anyway.” 

“Here he comes now,” exclaimed Erwin 
as the lanky Samuel was seen returning to 
the “quarters” of the young prisoners. 

“What’s on your mind. Uncle Sam?” in- 
quired Taylor as Samuel approached. 


66 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


“IVe been watching you, Taylor Cooper,’^ 
said Samuel abruptly. 

^‘That’s the best thing you have been do- 
ing in a long time,’^ retorted Taylor, glanc- 
ing warningly at Erwin as he spoke. 

‘^Is it? That remains to be seen.^^ 

‘‘What have I been doing that invites the 
special interest of Uncle Sam?” inquired 
Taylor soothingly. 

“YouVe been fixing coats for the rebels.” 

“Yes. At least IVe fixed one and have 
two more to fix.” 

“I know what for.” 

“Do you? Perhaps that’s more than I 
know. Kindly explain yourself, my learned 
friend. ’ ’ 

“You’ve got some trick in your mind. I 
know you too well not to understand what 
you’re doing. You’ve got some scheme to 
get away.” 

“You’re a wise lad. Uncle Sam,” said Tay- 
lor, trying to laugh in a manner that would 
quiet his alarming visitor. He glanced at 
Erwin, who was gazing at Samuel in such a 
fierce manner that Taylor was more anxious 
lest his friend should reveal their secret than 


A SCHEME 67 

he was because of the startling suspicion 
which Samuel had voiced. 

may be wise or not,’^ retorted Samuel. 
^‘Anyway I’m not such a fool as you and 
Erwin think I am. Now, then, when you go- 
ing to try it?” 

‘‘Try what?” 

“To get out of the camp?” 

“Uncle Sam, have you forgotten Anthony 
Wood?” demanded Taylor solemnly. 

“No, I haven’t forgotten Anthony Wood!” 
snapped Samuel. “And I haven’t forgotten 
Taylor Cooper, either! And don’t you for- 
get Samuel Carson!” 

“We can’t forget you,” laughed Taylor. 
“You won’t let us.” 

“That’s it. I shan’t let you. Now, what 
are you up to?” 

“I thought you were going to tell me. You 
said you knew, and for my part I can’t think 
of anything I’d rather hear than a good 
scheme for getting out of this forlorn place. 
I’ve had all I want of Camp Sorghum, 
haven’t you?” 

“A good deal more than I want.” 
“What’s the plan for getting away?” 


68 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


don’t know any plan, but you do.” 

^‘Tell me what it is.” 

‘‘I can’t.” 

‘ ‘ Then how can you expect me to tell you ! ’ ’ 

‘^Because if you don’t tell me I’ll go 
straight to Evans and tell him that you two 
fellows are working up a plan to get out of 
camp. ’ ’ 

^‘You don’t dare do that!” spoke up Er- 
win excitedly. 

‘ ^ Oh, yes, he does, ’ ’ said Taylor quickly be- 
stowing a glance of warning upon his friend 
as he spoke. ^‘Everybody that knows Uncle 
Sam is perfectly aware that he dares do al- 
most anything. He isn’t a coward, what- 
ever else he may be.” 

“You’re right, I’m not,” responded Sam- 
uel. “I’m not afraid to march right up to 
the lieutenant and tell him two of the prison- 
ers here are making plans to break away. ’ ’ 

“But how do you know they are!” said 
Taylor quietly. 

“I know them, and that’s enough. I’m 
perfectly sure that Taylor Cooper isn’t the 
kind of a chap to mend the Johnnies’ coats 
for them just for the fun of it.” 


A SCHEME 


69 


‘‘You^re a wise lad, Uncle Sam. Now, 
then, suppose you do tell Lieutenant Evans 
that we ^re doing what you say we are. What 
good will it do youU^ 

^^It^ll fix me all right with him anyway.’^ 

‘‘And then if we tell our hoys what you 
have done what do you think will happen to 
you? They wonT be very gentle if they hear 
that one of our men has gone to the officers 
here with such a story as that. Uncle Sam, 
I wouldnT give a pinch of snutf for your 
chances in camp if you should be so foolish 
as to do such a thing as that.’’ 

“I don’t care. I’d do it anyway,” de- 
clared Samuel menacingly. 

“Suppose we do have a plan in mind? 
What then?” 

“If you’ll tell me what it is and let me go 
with you I won’t say a word. I’m as anxious 
to get away as you are.” 

“Do you really mean it?” 

“Every word.” 

“Sure you can keep a secret. Uncle Sam?” 

“You just try me,” said Samuel eagerly. 

“All right. Come back to-morrow morn- 
ing and I’ll see what can be done for you.” 


70 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


‘ ‘ Tell me now. ’ ^ 

‘‘I can’t. Haven’t got the plan all fixed 
in my own mind yet.” 

‘^Wliat time to-morrow?” 

‘^Any time after you’ve cooked yonr break- 
fast.” 

‘‘Sure you’ll tell me then?” 

“As sure as you find me sitting right here 
mending this coat,” replied Taylor holding 
the garment up to view as he spoke. 

“I’ll do it! I’ll be here!” exclaimed Sam- 
uel as he turned away. 

For a moment Erwin stared blankly at his 
friend when their visitor had departed. Why 
had Taylor acknowledged that he had some 
plan of escape in mind? Above all, how had 
the slow-witted Samuel suspected? “I’m 
afraid the game is up,” he said bitterly. 

“You’re too easily frightened, Erwin.” 

“But if Uncle Sam does what he threat- 
ens — ” 

“He won’t! He can’t!” 

“Why not?” 

“Because we must try it before he has a 
chance. ’ ’ 


“When?” 


A SCHEME 


71 


‘‘To-day. To-night. I wanted to wait a 
little longer nntil I had made certain no sus- 
picions had been aroused by my tailoring. 
We canT wait, though. The poor fool will 
keep quiet till to-morrow, but after that we 
canT depend on him in the least. 

‘ ‘ If such a fellow as Uncle Sam has found 
us out already, what chance do we stand with 
the guard U’ inquired Erwin gloomily. 

“I don’t think you need fear. Uncle Sam 
used to beat us all when we were collecting 
birds’ eggs. Don’t you remember? We all 
knew he was the biggest fool in the village — 
that is, the biggest, except his father. Uncle 
Toby. And yet he’d find a nest that none of 
the rest of us would ever see. Maybe it’s the 
same way here. Erwin, you’d better take a 
needle and thread and pretend to be sewing 
on this coat while I’m gone.” 

“Where are you going?” inquired Erwin 
hastily as his friend arose. 

“I’ll be back in a few minutes,” replied 
Taylor, ignoring the question. 

Erwin obediently did as he had been bid- 
den. Seating himself upon the ground he 
drew the needle and thread through the cloth. 


72 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


apparently so engrossed in his task that he 
did not even look up when some of his fel- 
low prisoners occasionally passed the place 
where he was seated. 

An hour later Taylor returned and cau- 
tiously displayed a cap he had secured. 

‘‘Where did you get it!” asked Erwin. 
“Got more than one!” 

“No, only one. I borrowed that.” 

‘ ‘ Borrowed it ! Where ! ^ ’ 

“In Lieutenant Evans’s tent. I went back 
to get more thread, and when I saw the cap 
— ^why, I just borrowed it. Now, then, listen, 
Erwin. I may not have a chance to explain 
again, or at least to say all I want to say to 
you. I think to-night is the very time to try 
our scheme. It is cloudy, and yet I don’t 
believe it’s going to rain. If it does I’m 
afraid our chance is gone. ’ ’ 

“Why!” 

“In the dark the guard will make sure 
who’s passing — that is, he will if it’s real 
dark. I want just light enough to let him see 
that we’re two men dressed in the Johnnies’ 
gray. Perhaps we would do better not to be 
together all the time this afternoon. I’ll go 


A SCHEME 


73 


to the other side of the pen for awhile. When 
it^s dinner time I’ll come back and help you 
cook our rice. If you have a chance put 
some of it, too, in your pocket. We may 
want it. When the sun has set, or pretty 
soon after that, we’ll start. My plan is for 
each of us to roll up one of these coats and 
carry it under his arm. We’ll go as near to 
the guard on the north side of the pen as we 
can, and then we’ll slip on the coats. I’ll 
take the long one and I’ll take the cap, too. 
Then, we’ll just saunter toward the guard 
and watch our chances. I think our coats 
will pass us. If they don’t, why, they don’t, 
that’s all. In that case the guard’ll probably 
stop us, and very likely we’ll be shut up in 
the guardhouse to a diet of water and mouldy 
bread for awhile. We haven’t much to lose 
and we have everything to gain. But we’ll 
make it, Erwin, we’ll make it!” 


CHAPTER VI 


NEAR THE FIRES 

In the long afternoon, which slowly passed, 
Erwin endeavored to regain control of him- 
self. The bidding of Taylor for him to lie 
down and obtain the rest which would help 
him in the trying experiences that might soon 
come was ignored. Indeed, Erwin marveled 
at his friend when the latter stretched him- 
self on the sole blanket the two prisoners 
possessed and instantly fell asleep. 

It was almost time for the prisoners to pre- 
pare their rice for dinner when Taylor at 
last awoke. Even then he lay motionless for 
a time watching his friend, who was standing 
near him. 

‘‘Come on, Taylor,’^ called Erwin, unable 
to endure the suspense longer. “We must 
look after our rice or the mess will not leave 
a scrap for us.’’ 

The young prisoner arose at the summons 
and in a brief time announced his readiness 
74 


NEAR THE FIRES 


75 


to accompany his friend. When the mess 
assembled and the food had been prepared, 
each of the two boys stealthily hid a part of 
his portion in the pocket of his tattered coat. 

‘‘I’m coming to see you early to-morrow 
morning,” whispered Samuel, who also be- 
longed to the same mess. Taylor and Erwin 
had turned away from the cooking place 
about to start for their own quarters, but 
both stopped when Uncle Sam approached. 

“Do so. Don’t forget,” said Taylor 
lightly. 

“I’m not likely to forget. Maybe I’ll go 
back with you now. Have you thought out 
your plan yet?” 

“No. I must have solitude and reflection. 
You are aware of my meaning, are you not?” 
inquired Taylor soberly. 

“I guess you mean you don’t want me 
around. ’ ’ 

‘ ‘ I have always said you were a wise chap. 
Uncle Sam.” 

“I know a thing or two, and some things 
besides,” said Samuel. “I don’t intend to 
let you fellows fool me. I’m a partner or 
I’m an — ” 


76 FOE THE STARS AND STRIPES 


“You are, you certainly are,^^ laughed Tay- 
lor, as Samuel hesitated. 

“You’ll find out all right.” 

Samuel was walking beside his compan- 
ions, doubtless aware that his presence was 
not desired and all the more eager to remain 
because of that fact. When his two friends 
continued on their way without manifesting 
any intention of stopping at their own “quar- 
ters,” Samuel’s purpose faltered. 

“Where you going?” he demanded 
sharply. 

“We haven’t started for Yankeeland yet,” 
explained Erwin. 

“I guess I know that. But where are 
you going?” 

“Going with you.” 

“I’m not going anywhere.” 

“Same place we’re bound for.” 

“You trying to get rid of me?” 

“Who suggested such an idea as that to 
you. Uncle Sam?” 

“I thought of it myself.” 

“No! Did you?” 

“I’m not going to tramp around this place 
all night,” declared Samuel abruptly as he 


NEAR THE FIRES 


77 


halted. be dark soon. IVe got all I 

want to do without wandering around the 
pen. I’ll see you in the morning.” 

‘^Look here, Uncle Sam,” called Taylor 
sharply in a low voice, as Samuel turned 
away. ‘‘Suppose we haven’t any scheme? 
Suppose I can’t think of any plan? What 
are you going to do then?” 

“Just what I told you. I know you, Tay- 
lor Cooper! I know you don’t fix coats just 
for fun. You’ve got some scheme or other 
in your head. I want to know what it is. 
And you promised to tell me what it is, 
too.” 

“Nay, Uncle Sam. I promised to tell you 
if I could find one, to-morrow morning. You 
must help. You must find one, too. You 
know what happened to Anthony Wood. We 
must think of something that will be safe and 
sure. I want to get away from here as much 
as you do. But I don’t want to leave camp 
the way poor Anthony did. ’ ’ 

Samuel made no response and continued 
on his way. “There! He’s gone at last,” 
exclaimed Taylor. “I began to be afraid 
he’d spoil everything.” 


78 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


‘‘So was L Isn’t it dark enough now to 
try itr’ 

“Yes.’’ 

“Let’s do it, then,” said Erwin, his voice 
trembling slightly. 

“Very well. Erwin, do you realize what 
it means?” 

“Yes.” 

“We may not get through. You under- 
stand that — and what may happen to us if 
we don’t?” 

“I do,” whispered Erwin. 

“And you’re ready to take the chances?” 

“I am. I want to try it. I can’t stand 
it here another day.” 

“You can if you have to. Come on, we’ll 
go back to get our coats. I think we’d bet- 
ter keep together. I’ve been thinking of Un- 
cle Sam’s finding the nests when we were lit- 
tle fellows at home. I believe his plan is 
best.” 

‘ ‘ What plan ? How is it best ? I don ’t un- 
derstand. ’ ’ 

“Why, the simplest way will be the safest. 
We must walk straight to the guard and not 
act as if we were dodging. If there’s any 


mAR THE FIRES 


79 


talking to be done yon^d better let me do it. 
Our first point of danger will be when we 
cross the dead line. If we stop or act nerv- 
ous there we are lost. Follow me right on. 
There ! ^ ’ Taylor suddenly exclaimed. ^ ^ There 
go the fires!’’ 

For a moment both boys stopped and gazed 
at the bonfires that had just been kindled at 
intervals in a circle about the prison pen. 
Figures of men could be seen moving about 
the fires or passing from one blaze to an- 
other. Scores of Confederates were plainly 
to be seen directing the work and looking to 
the means that were expected to prevent the 
escape of any of the prisoners from the great 
lot on which the pen was located. 

‘‘The boldest course is best,” said Taylor 
quickly. “Come on. This is the time for us 
to be up and doing.” Taylor spoke in low 
tones that thrilled his companion. Neither 
spoke as they hastened to the place where 
the coats and the cap had been left. Hastily 
securing them, the young prisoners looked 
cautiously about and then walked briskly 
toward the outer part of the camp. 

Again they halted and when they were con- 


80 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


vinced that their actions could not be seen 
by others, at Taylor’s suggestion they both 
donned the coats of the officers, placing them 
over their own ragged garments. Taylor 
also placed his borrowed cap on his head and 
hesitating a moment he inquired, ^ ^ How is it, 
Erwin? Do I look the part? Do I resemble 
Lieutenant Evans?” 

‘^You’ll find out in a minute,” whispered 
Erwin. Don’t stop here any longer! Go 
ahead! I’ll follow you.” 

In silence the two boys turned toward the 
line of guards. Before them the kindled fires 
were blazing. Fires, too, were to be seen 
inside the camp at occasional places where a 
few of the unfortunate prisoners were able 
by some means to obtain some pieces, of 
wood. 

Taylor’s confident manner as he led the 
way did not deceive his friend. He was mak- 
ing a supreme effort to be calm and yet every 
nerve in his body seemed to be tingling in his 
excitement. He endeavored to keep his eyes 
fixed on the line of fires glowing before him, 
yet continually he was glancing on either 
side, fearful of the approach of a guard or 


NEAR TEE FIRES 


81 


dreading to hear the shout of warning, or 
worse still, the report of a rifle discharged 
by unseen hands. 

Suddenly Taylor stopped abruptly and 
clutched the arm of his friend. Directly be- 
fore them Erwin could see a man approach- 
ing, and in the dim light he was convinced 
that it was Lieutenant Evans whose coat 
Taylor was wearing. Erwin’s first impulse 
was to run from the place, but his friend’s 
grasp prevented him, and in a moment the 
young prisoners were face to face with the 
lieutenant. 

‘‘We’ve brought your coats,” called Tay- 
lor, as Lieutenant Evans stopped. 

“That’s kind of you,” laughed the young 
officer as he recognized Taylor. “Who is 
that with you!” he added. 

“My apprentice. He’s learning how to 
sew, hut I’m afraid he’ll never amount to 
much as a tailor. I let him work on Lieu- 
tenant Kelber’s coat. Yours I fixed my- 
self.” 

“That’s good of you,” said the lieutenant, 
laughing again. “No, no. Don’t take it 
off,” he added kindly as Taylor began to di- 


82 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


vest himself of the garment. ‘^Keep it on. 
It ^s cold to-night, and yon need it more than 
I do. Bring it to me in the morning. If it 
was in my power, sir, I’d be glad to let yon 
keep it, thongh yon-all might not enjoy wear- 
ing a Confederate officer’s nniform in the 
daytime. ’ ’ 

‘‘It makes me hot, even now,” replied Tay- 
lor dryly. 

“That’s good, sir.” 

“Where did yon say Lientenant Kelber 
is?” Taylor inqnired. 

“I don’t think I said, sir. He’s ontside 
attending to the fires. He’ll be back di- 
rectly. ’ ’ 

“Well, we’ll give him his coat anyway. 
He may not feel abont it as yon do.” 

“No, sir. I’m afraid he won’t. If he 
knew a Yank had had it on his back he’d 
want the garment fnmigated.” 

“I shonldn’t blame him if the Yank had 
been shnt np in this prison pen very long. 
Any word of onr being transferred?” 

“Not a word, sir.” 

The good-natnred lientenant departed, ap- 
parently not a snspicion of the pnrpose 


NEAR THE FIRES 83 

of the two prisoners having entered his 
mind. 

^^That was a close call, Taylor,’’ whispered 
Erwin, as the two boys continued on their 
way toward the border of the camp. 

‘‘Yes and no. I told you the boldest way 
was the safest.” 

Erwin made no response. They were 
drawing near the guard now and had crossed 
the dead line. Apparently either their bold- 
ness or the dim light of the cloudy night shel- 
tered them, for not a hail was given them. 
Erwin was bolder now in the face of the deep- 
ening peril. The supreme test was at hand. 
The picket guard was to be seen on his duty, 
marching back and forth on his beat before 
them. 

‘ ‘ Guard, which way did Lieutenant Kelber 
go ? ” inquired Taylor, advancing a few steps 
until he could be seen but without being 
recognized, as he was trusting. The young 
prisoner was relying upon his “uniform” to 
protect him now. 

The soldier on duty halted and peered at 
Taylor. Hesitating a moment he said, ‘ ‘ He ’s 
out yonder, sub. Who sent youT’ 


84 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


‘^Lieutenant Evans told us he was here.’^ 
Taylor was drawling his words in his attempt 
to appear indifferent as well as to imitate the 
dialect of the Southern soldiers. “We might 
wait heah till he returns/’ he added 

“You-all will find him somewhar in th’ fiah 
line,” suggested the guard, apparently satis- 
fied with his inspection. 

“I’m so doggone tired,” said Taylor with 
a yawn, “I believe I’ll go back an’ wait fo’ 
him. You reckon he’ll come back this heah 
way?” 

“I dunno. Yo’ bettah stir yo ’selves an’ 
find him.” 

‘ ‘ I reckon we had, ’ ’ admitted Taylor. ‘ ‘ If 
he comes back this way, would yo’ mind tol- 
lin’ him Lieutenant Evans would be grati- 
fied if he would come to see him befo’ break- 
fast in th’ mawnin’?” 

“Find him yo’self!” retorted the guard, 
who had now resumed his beat. 

Slowly, as if the search was a task for 
which he had slight relish, Taylor spoke to 
Erwin and they passed the guard. Erwin’s 
face was wet with perspiration in spite of the 
chilliness of the night. His teeth had an un- 


NEAR THE FIRES 


85 


accountable tendency to chatter and it was 
only by exerting himself that he restrained 
his impulse to break into a mad flight. Slowly 
the boys advanced, turning slightly to their 
left as they proceeded, until the form of the 
guard could no longer be discerned behind 
them. Before them was the line of blazing 
fires which must be crossed. Both boys 
realized the peril of this venture — the most 
perilous of all their attempts of the night. 

As the young soldiers approached, they 
were able to see that every man in the line 
was supposed to care for three of the fires 
and divided his time and attention among 
them. It was impossible for the boys to pass 
the line without being seen. Again Taylor 
decided that the bolder was likely to prove 
the safer way. Whispering a word of en- 
couragement to Erwin, he led the way di- 
rectly toward the nearest of the attendants, 
who was not more than fifty feet in front 
of them. 

The man^s rifle was on the ground near 
him while he was throwing some logs upon 
the blazing heap. 

V ‘ ‘ Yo ^ all want some help, suh ? ’ ^ demanded 


86 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


Taylor, as he and his comrade drew near. 

The unexpected hail plainly startled the 
man, for he instantly dropped the log from 
his arms and hastily seizing his rifle, peered 
intently at the two men who had approached. 



The unexpected hail plainly startled the man. — Page 86. 








Tr ^^vtr7'-i 










.w^-WH 


.A 




'S 


♦ *v* 


n — 


- ti 


V # 


» *, 




■. Ai\' '-vV-il 


•y»'.v‘v^:,V^. 

f'j 


i-*^ : 


nV. ^ 


^v - 

< 7 *- • ^- 






> ^u 


’^TvfU ^ if ■■ 


> . 


I 












/iiS’‘- i 'i - . ' ' ^■■f' --■ ■ .■.*4'i..'.----. ‘5 

ilfcf'' t^ MmSt .i^Ktl.-. w ■ t ~ ■■._■■ ■> 




r. P 


rvA ;* 


t * 


M«H 






^..• 


>«. 




I- 


m 


\ Kf 


■ !^ 


t;/ 


4/r 


* 


(A> 




i '-«-V'*’- . " 1 ’“ i' 

r 'v.- v/'-r 

^ S> '■ A 






t • « 






Cl 




..v;-;^: -i^ ^'li0Sd 

^“ ’’ " ' 4 -^ 

*: 




‘it'"'' i 


■-'fc'*- » ‘A**,!!? 

<fai'*-„- • ‘.i .-■* -V ■ . - -, V 




_ 1 ’m* ‘‘'^ "'’.' 




i 





CHAPTEE VII 


FAILURE 

uns are a lookin^ for Lieutenant Kel- 
ber/’ drawled Taylor. 

Plainly relieved by the words, the guard 
turned quickly and called to some one not far 
away, though he could not be seen in the dim 
light of the fire. 

In response to the guard ^s hail a man 
quickly appeared and approached the place 
where the two young soldiers were standing. 
The consternation of the boys was great 
when they both recognized the approaching 
man as Lieutenant Kelber himself. 

‘^What^s wanted r’ demanded the officer 
sharply. 

‘‘These two men are a lookin’ fo’ you,” re- 
plied the guard. Taylor instantly removed 
his cap and the officer turned quickly to him 
for an explanation of the guard’s statement. 

“Yes, sir. We are looking for you,” said 
Taylor, striving to speak indifferently. “We 
87 


88 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


have your coat ready. Lieutenant Evans 
told us you were here.’^ 

‘^My coat? Lieutenant Evans? What do 
you mean?’^ 

^‘Why, we are the prisoners who were fix- 
ing over your coats — yours and Lieutenant 
Evans’s.’’ 

‘‘What are you doing with them here out- 
side the guard line? You’ve got the coats on, 
too ! ’ ’ exclaimed the officer sternly. 

“Yes, sir. We have. That was the easi- 
est way to carry them. Besides, it’s cold to- 
night, and we both thought we’d like to know 
how a warm coat made a man feel. It’s 
been a long time since we had such a thing. ’ ’ 

“You come back with me,” said the offi- 
cer sternly. “I’ll look into this. I reckon 
the place for you uns is behind the stockade. 
You say you passed the guard?” 

“Why, yes, sir,” responded Taylor in ap- 
parent surprise. “We met Lieutenant 
Evans back here. He told me to keep his 
coat till morning. He said, too, that you 
were here somewhere, and we might give 
your coat to you.” 


FAILURE 89 

^‘Did lie come with you across the dead 

liner^ 

‘‘I can’t just say as to that. It was so 
dark we couldn’t tell just where we were.” 

‘‘Did he pass the guard?” 

“No, sir.” 

“Come. I must look into this. You 
Yanks are all a bad lot. I wouldn’t trust you 
as far as I can throw a ’possum by the tail. 
Come on. We’ll have this matter straight- 
ened out directly.” 

Obediently Taylor and Erwin followed the 
lieutenant as he led the way back into the 
camp. The night was too dark to enable 
either of the prisoners to see the face of his 
companion, but Taylor did not require any 
light to enable him to understand how de- 
pressed Erwin was by the outcome of their 
attempt to escape. 

Not a word was spoken until the trio ar- 
rived at the quarters of Lieutenant Evans. 
When that officer came forth at the demand 
of the conductor of the returning prisoners, 
he gazed first at the disconsolate boys and 
then at Lieutenant Kelber. 


90 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


‘^You know these menT’ inquired Lieuten- 
ant Kelber. 

‘‘Yes, sir, I recognize them. One of them 
has on a coat of mine and the other is wear- 
ing one of yours. ^ ’ 

“Did you give the coats to themT’ 
“Idid.^’ 

‘ ‘ Did you send these men out to the fires 1 ^ ^ 

“No, sir.” 

‘ ‘ Didn'^t you tell us to find Lieutenant Kel- 
ber and give him his coat 1 ’ inquired Taylor 
eagerly. 

For a moment Lieutenant Evans hesitated. 
Then, turning once more to his fellow officer, 
he said, “I reckon it’s all right, lieutenant. 
I recollect telling these prisoners to take your 
coat to you. I didn’t expect them to follow 
you all the way to Washington, though.” 

“You made a mistake!” sternly said Lieu- 
tenant Kelber, who was an older man than 
his companion. “If I hadn’t found them 
when I did they would have been gone by 
now.” 

“I reckon they wouldn’t have gone very 
far. The dogs would have had them before 
they’d gone a mile. They aren’t such fools 


FAILURE 


91 


as to try that. You^re making too much of 
the matter, lieutenant. I must say they we^ 
running a big risk in following yo^ up as they 
did. They’ll know better next time.’’ 

The dogs to which Lieutenant Evans re- 
ferred were packs of bloodhounds that every 
night and morning patroled the borders of 
the camp. In charge of them was the keeper 
of the hounds, a man almost as savage and 
brutal in his appearance as the fierce pack 
he commanded. Taylor and Erwin often had 
discussed the ability of the savage dogs to 
detect the footprint of a Yankee. Every day 
a multitude of white men and black as well as 
many horses and mules came to the prison 
pen. Their footprints in the soft mud near 
the borders of the prison pen were numerous 
and confusing. How it was that the great 
bloodhounds on their rounds would ignore the 
tracks of every one of these and then stop 
and with loud yelps suddenly swerve from 
their course when they detected the presence 
of a prisoner’s footprint in the confused 
mass, had frequently been a source of won- 
der to both Taylor and Erwin. Neither was 
familiar with the ways of the huge brutes, 


92 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


and. both stood in fear of them — a fear 
S^eatly magnified by the current reports of 
the certainty with which the dogs ran down 
escaping ‘ ‘ niggers ^ ’ or fleeing prisoners. In- 
deed, one of the most perplexing of the prob- 
lems in the event of escaping from the prison 
pen was the flight from the packs that doubt- 
less would be sent in swift pursuit as soon as 
it was discovered that the prisoners were 
missing. 

‘‘It’s a good thing the fence is nearly 
done,” suggested Lieutenant Kelber. “It’s 
all up except on the west side, and the creek 
there, as well as the swamp, is almost as 
good as a fence. Fo’ my part, sir, I think 
these two men ought to be shut up in the 
stockade.” The “stockade,” as both boys 
well knew, was an enclosure in the center of 
the prison camp itself. The place was sur- 
rounded by a high fence having sharp pick- 
ets. To escape from the enclosure was 
impossible. All dangerous or offensive pris- 
oners, as well as those who were paying the 
penalty for infringement of the rules of the 
camp, were confined there. The poor and in- 
sufficient food, the cramped and crowded 


FAILURE 


93 


quarters in addition to the suspicion under 
which the man rested who had been once 
sentenced to the vile place, were already- 
known by both boys. 

‘^It can be easily arranged, sir, if yo’ de- 
sire it, ’ ’ suggested Lieutenant Evans. 

^^I’ll leave the matter in yo^ hands. I 
reckon you are a bit easy though and the 
discipline of the camp must be kept up.^’ 

When Lieutenant Kelber departed. Lieu- 
tenant Evans turned to the two boys and said 
quickly, ‘‘Why did yo’ all try itV’ 

“Try what?” inquired Taylor. 

“Yo’ know what I mean.” 

Neither of the boys replied to the question. 

“I reckon you are not so very different 
from me, an’ I know what I’d have tried if 
I’d been in your places. I’m not sayin’ I 
blame yo’, except fo’ your foolishness. I 
reckon yo’ will have to go to the stockade.” 

“For trying to do what you say you your- 
self would have tried if you had been in our 
places?” inquired Taylor. 

“Yes, sir. That doesn’t make any differ- 
ence. Yo’ know you were tryin’ to get away. 
There’s a report that an exchange is goin’ 


94 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


to be made in a day or two. I should like 
to have seen you-all in the lists and I reckon 
I might have helped a bit, too. But it can^t 
be done now, sir.^’ 

Even Taylor’s hopefulness was not proof 
against the suggestion of the warm-hearted 
young officer, who was different from all the 
other men in command of the prison camp. 
Indeed, frequently he had told Taylor in the 
conversations they had had, how bitterly he 
regretted the terrible war. He had a brother, 
too, who had remained North after he had 
completed his college course at one of the 
Northern colleges and at the breaking out of 
the war he had enlisted as a soldier of the 
Union. Keenly as Lieutenant Evans be- 
wailed the disgrace that had befallen his 
family, because one of its members had been 
disloyal, as he believed, to his state, his sym- 
pathies were still sufficiently broad to enable 
him to appreciate and even honor the con- 
victions of those who did not agree with him. 
He himself had followed the example of Gen- 
eral Lee, the beloved commander, who had 
entered the Confederate service still loving 
the Union, but believing that the call of his 


FAILURE 


95 


own state was superior to every other appeal. 
Frequently, too, the young officer had de- 
clared that the trouble could end at once if 
the Northern armies would leave the South- 
ern States alone. To the suggestion of Tay- 
lor that the armies of the North were not 
where they were by choice, and that one word 
would send home every blue-coated soldier, 
the lieutenant did not respond. 

That the young officer would not be 
swerved from his duty as he saw it, Taylor 
and Erwin both understood. Accordingly, 
neither was surprised when they were told 
that they must leave the coats that had been 
repaired and must be taken at once to the 
stockade. 

The week during which the two young pris- 
oners were confined within the narrow limits 
of the stockade was one of misery. Without 
shelter from the rains that steadily fell, hav-.. 
ing neither clothing that could warm nor any 
occupation to help them pass the dreary 
hours, the food which was provided became 
almost nauseating. Their sole relief was in 
the gift to each of them of two onions which 
Lieutenant Evans had made when he had 


96 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


taken them to the prison within the prison, 
as the stockade virtually was. So many of 
their fellow prisoners were suffering from 
scurvy that the preventive diet was eagerly 
welcomed by both boys. 

Taylor apparently kept up his spirits in 
spite of his dismal surroundings and the 
memory of the failure that had crowned their 
efforts to escape. He steadily endeavored to 
cheer his friend, appealing to him not to 
abandon hope. Their one purpose must not 
be forgotten he declared cheerily every morn- 
ing, and that was to keep themselves in such 
condition that the prevailing sickness among 
the prisoners should not attack them. In a 
way, too, Taylor ^s efforts were not without a 
measure of success. When the week was 
gone and through the kindly efforts of Lieu- 
tenant Evans they were restored to the lib- 
erty of the larger prison pen, neither was in 
as bad a condition as both had feared. 

Soon after their return to their former 
quarters they were visited by Samuel. 
got what y^ deserved, didn’t ye?” he inquired 
tauntingly, as he hailed the boys. 


FAILURE 


97 


<< There’s one comfort for you, Uncle 
Sam, ’ ’ retorted Erwin. ‘ ^ You didn ’t have to 
go to the stockade. It was a good thing for 
you that you didn ’t try to get away with us. ’ ’ 

‘‘There’s a lot more of our men here now 
in spite of the exchange,” said Samuel, ap- 
parently ignoring the remark of his fellow 
townsman. 

“Yes, I see,” said Taylor, as he looked 
about the camp. “What was that you said 
about exchanging? Has there been an ex- 
change ? ’ ’ 

“You’re right there has. Two hundred 
and seventy-five got out on it. When the list 
was read, some of our men whose names were 
not in it played sharp. ’ ’ 

“What did they do?” 

“There were about fifty dead men on the 
list. Some of our men answered to the call 
in place of those who had died in camp. 
They were lucky. A good many of them 
were taken, out. I wish I’d been.” 

“Why didn’t you try it?” 

“My turn will come. I’m glad I didn’t go 
with you. You might have told me and given 


98 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


me the chance, though. You’re watched now 
and you won’t dare try it again. If you do, 
you’ll be shot.” 

‘‘Who says so?” 

‘ ‘ Lieutenant Evans. He told me himself. ’ ’ 

“What did you tell him about us?” in- 
quired Taylor sharply. 

“Not much. He asked me some ques- 
tions.” 

“Don’t forget what I told you,” said Tay- 
lor sternly. 

“About what?” 

“About talking about us.” 

“ ’T won’t do any good now for you to try 
to get away. The rebels have got the fence 
all finished, and have guards posted on plat- 
forms along the whole length of it. There is 
a line of guards, too, along the inside, and 
the outside of the fence. No chance now.” 

With this parting word of comfort, which 
Samuel apparently enjoyed, their visitor de- 
parted. 

“Taylor,” said Erwin, as soon as Uncle 
Sam was gone, “we must find some way out. 
I’d rather take my chances at being shot 
than at staying here much longer.” 


FAILURE 


99 


‘‘We’ll keep quiet a few days, but we’ll 
keep our eyes open. There is a way if we 
can find it.” 

“We must find it ! ” 

“We will, then, if we must,” replied Tay- 
lor, rejoiced at the manifest interest of his 
friend. 

Ten days, however, elapsed before either 
found a scheme that seemed in any way fea- 
sible. It was Erwin’s suggestion, too, and as 
he unfolded his plan, his friend exclaimed — 
“It’s worth trying! We’ll do it.” 


CHAPTEE YIII 


OUTSIDE 

Along a part of one side of the prison pen 
a small stream sluggishly made its way. The 
water was filthy and ill-smelling. The banks 
of the little creek were carefully guarded and 
every guard was armed with a rifle. At first 
sight the place appeared to he one of the most 
impassable of the barriers surrounding the 
dreary camp. 

To Erwin, however, the very morning of 
the day when his proposal to his friend was 
made a surprising discovery had come. He 
had been strolling near the foul stream 
watching the changing of the guards. One 
of the retiring guards, glad to be relieved of 
his post, had picked up two stones and 
thrown them into the stream directly under 
the fence that had been built twenty-five or 
more feet lengthwise of the muddy creek. 

The act was simple, but Erwin was startled 
by the thought that the fence did not rest 
100 


OUTSIDE 


101 


upon the bottom of the stream, but was only 
a few inches below the surface. Instantly, 
he concluded that between the bottom of the 
fence and the bottom of the creek was an in- 
tervening body of water which the pickets or 
slabs did not touch. The thought was so sug- 
gestive that he decided to make further in- 
vestigations. After a brief time had elapsed 
he took a strip of wood which some prisoner 
had secured for firewood, and with it he re- 
turned to the muddy stream. Striving to 
appear indifferent, he dropped his torn hat 
in the water when he was not observed and 
then while he was pretending to reach for his 
lost head-covering he at the same time thrust 
his stick into the bottom of the stream. 

As he had believed, he found the bottom 
soft and muddy. Several inches of dark mud 
that remained on the measuring rod partly 
indicated how deep the soft bottom was. And 
he had not found solid ground in his attempt. 
What most interested him, however, was the 
discovery that the water itself had a depth 
of a foot and a half near the hank. If the 
depth was as great as that near the shore a 
fair inference might he drawn that the stream 


102 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


was still deeper where the fence was. The 
bottom of the fence must be at least two feet 
above the muddy bottom of the stream itself 
— a space sufficiently large to permit a man to 
crawl under it. 

The discovery was suggestive to the young 
prisoner. Several times in the morning 
hours he returned to the place, striving by 
his air of inditference to avoid arousing any 
suspicions of the thought which now was 
uppermost in his mind. 

In his investigations he sought, too, to 
learn the exact location of the guards. He 
was relieved when the hour of changing came 
to find that the new guard took his stand at 
the same place where his predecessor had 
been. On the platforms which had been 
built out upon the massive fence, the sharp- 
shooters had their station. One platform 
was on one side about thirty feet from the 
bank of the stream and at the same distance 
in the opposite direction was another on 
which a picked man was stationed. The lo- 
cality was well guarded and at first sight es- 
cape by it was apparently impossible. 

To Erwin ^s excited mind, however, the 


OUTSIDE 


103 


project seemed to be more promising than 
any be bad found in bis search. Even tbe 
peril arising from tbe presence of tbe near-by 
guards and sharpshooters was not sufficient 
to deter him. Deeply aroused, be speedily 
returned to bis quarters, where Taylor was 
working upon a coat which Lieutenant Evans 
bad sent him to repair. Either tbe lieuten- 
ant bad ceased to be suspicious or tbe luxury 
of a mended coat bad been too strong to re- 
sist; Taylor was unable to determine which 
motive bad been stronger in tbe young of- 
ficer’s mind, nor did be care if only some oc- 
cupation was provided. 

‘‘What is it, Erwin!” inquired Taylor, as 
be became aware of tbe eager expression on 
his friend’s face. 

‘‘I think I have found something,” replied 
Erwin in a low voice. 

‘‘Go ahead with your tale,” said Taylor, 
bending low over bis sewing. 

“You know that place where tbe fence 
around tbe camp follows tbe creek thirty feet 
or more?” 

“Yes.” 

“Well, I’ve found that the fence doesn’t 


104 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


go clear down to the bottom of the stream/’ 

Taylor looked up quickly at the words, but 
in a moment he hastily resumed his task. 
‘^How much space is freeT’ he inquired. 

^‘Two feet or more.” 

‘‘What makes you think so!” 

Erwin described his experiments and indi- 
cated the conclusions he had formed. 

“That’s good,” said Taylor thoughtfully. 
“There may be something in it. Go on.” 

“We might go down there some dark night 
and crawl under the fence.” 

“Under the water!” 

“Yes.” 

“Go on.” 

“I think we might crawl along on the bot- 
tom, just keeping our noses out of the water, 
till we had passed the guards — ” 

“You know there are four men there — two 
guards and two sharpshooters! We’d have 
to dodge all four.” 

“Yes, and the hounds, too.” 

“How do you propose to get past the 
dogs!” 

“Keep in the water till we have gone be- 
yond them.” 


OUTSIDE 


105 


‘‘Gone where 

‘ ‘ I don know. Somewhere, anywhere ont 
of this said Erwin, shuddering as he spoke. 

“We don’t know anything about the coun- 
try around the camp.” 

“The creek must go somewhere. If we 
follow it for awhile we shan’t lose our way.” 

“That’s a good idea. When do you want 
to try?” 

“The first dark night.” 

“To-night?” 

“If it’s dark.” 

“I don’t believe it’ll be dark enough for 
our plan,” said Taylor, glancing at the sky. 

‘ ‘ To-morrow night, then — or the first dark 
night. ’ ’ 

“You understand how filthy the creek is?” 

“Yes. Yes.” 

“We’ll have to keep our heads under the 
water part of the time.” 

“I know that.” 

“It’s worth trying. We’ll do it,” said 
Taylor warmly. 

Two days passed and the plan of the young 
prisoners was still deferred. The nights 
were clear and cold and the darkness was not 


106 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


sufficiently deep to warrant any attempt. On 
the afternoon of the third day, however, 
when Taylor rejoined his friend at their 
quarters, he said, ‘‘Erwin, have you kept 
away from the creek T’ 

“Yes. I haven’t been near it but once 
since I spoke to you. ’ ’ 

“That’s good. Have you seen Uncle 
Sam?” 

“He’s been here twice.” 

“What did he have to say?” 

“Not very much. He doesn’t suspect any- 
thing. ’ ’ 

“I wish I felt sure of that. You can’t 
trust him. I’m of the opinion he’s watching 
us all the time.” 

“Why?” 

“I haven’t any real reason, except that I’m 
afraid of him. He’s a fellow you never can 
depend upon. He’d do anything to hurt us if 
he thought he’d be the gainer by it. Er- 
win,” Taylor added abruptly, “I think we’d 
better try it to-night. ’ ’ 

“It isn’t going to rain. It won’t be any 
darker than it was last night.” 

“That will be dark enough. I wish we’d 


OUTSIDE 


107 


gone ahead then. I have thought it all over 
and IVe come to the conclusion that a rainy 
night won^t be as good for us as a still, dark 
one.’^ 

‘‘They ^11 see us. The guard can fire at 
us,’^ suggested Erwin. 

“That’s true, but it’s just as true that we 
must be able to see a little of our way our- 
selves. These southern nights are dark any- 
way, and there won’t be any moon to-night.” 

“I’m ready to try it if you are,” re- 
sponded Erwin quietly. 

“Better be ready then. We’ll wait till the 
camp is asleep, though we mustn’t wait too 
long. If we get out we want to put a big 
distance between us and Camp Sorghum by 
sunrise. We’d better talk over a few of the 
details. ’ ’ 

“What do you propose?” 

“I think we’d better go together — at least 
to the creek. There, I’ll slip into the water 
first and crawl under the fence. If I get 
along all right, you follow me in about five 
minutes. I’ll keep on down the creek and 
that’s what you must do, too.” 

“Where’ll we meet?” 


108 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


“Have to wait and see about that. When 
I find a good place I’ll stop and keep watch 
for yon to come along. If you hear a — if 
yon hear anything that may have happened 
to me — ^yon make a break for it and look 
out for yourself. We may be separated any- 
way. ’ ’ 

Erwin was quiet for a moment. He was 
aware that his friend was voicing what was 
not only possible but probable. The project 
was filled with peril. The chances of passing 
the guard were desperate, and yet Erwin was 
now in a frame of mind in which even the 
direst possibilities could not check him. 

In a brief time the boys separated and 
were not together again until the hour ar- 
rived for “dinner.” Both ate all the food 
they received, having previously decided that 
the filthy stream would spoil any provisions 
they might try to carry with them. Where 
or when their next meal would be found was 
not even a matter of conjecture. 

At nine o ’clock both young prisoners were 
at their quarters. As they stretched them- 
selves upon the ground Taylor whispered — 
“We must not wait, Erwin. I’ve been think- 


OUTSIDE 


109 


ing more about it and I believe wedl stand 
a better chance to go now before everything 
about the camp is quiet. 

think you’re right. I’m ready when 
you are. It’s dark enough any time.” 

‘‘You meet me at the creek, then,” whis- 
pered Taylor, as he arose and departed in 
the darkness. 

Excited as Erwin was, he still moved cau- 
tiously and carefully when a few minutes 
afterward he, too, started for the meeting 
place. 

He was rejoiced when later he found Tay- 
lor lying on the ground near the stream and 
he, too, took his place beside his friend. Not 
a person had spoken to them, and apparently 
no one was near. The dim outline of the 
sharpshooter on the raised platform could be 
seen, but if he had discovered their presence 
he at least betrayed no sign. 

When two minutes had passed Taylor 
pressed his friend’s hand and slowly slid into 
the water. 

Erwin, almost breathless, watched his de- 
parting friend, but in a brief time not even 
Taylor’s head could be seen. The guard 


110 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


was invisible, and when Erwin glanced again 
at the sharpshooter he, too, apparently was 
not suspicious. The young prisoner was 
listening intently. At any moment the call 
of the guard or the report of his gun might 
be heard. What the report would mean Er- 
win understood only too well. How slowly 
the time passed. Was it five minutes or an 
hour since his friend had entered the stream? 
Erwin could not decide. He worked his way 
a little nearer the water. What an evil odor 
it had! Had Taylor been caught and held 
by the mud? A half-dozen possible dire mis- 
fortunes might have been met by his friend. 
The suspense and uncertainty were harder 
to bear than action. Erwin slipped slowly 
and cautiously into the water. 

Creeping upon his hands, his body sub- 
merged, he crawled steadily forward. The 
foul water almost choked him. The soft mud 
of the bottom was so yielding that it was 
only with the greatest difficulty he continued 
to keep his face above the water. Occasion- 
ally he stopped to listen. There was a roar- 
ing in his ears and the beatings of his heart 
sounded almost like a drum. Steadily, cau- 


OUTSIDE 


111 


tiously he drew himself forward until at last 
he could see the high fence directly in front 
of him. The supreme moment had arrived. 

Drawing a full breath and grasping the 
bottom of the fence, he drew himself under- 
neath it. His body was on the muddy bot- 
tom, but he did not stop. Striving desper- 
ately to be quiet in his movements at last he 
gained the water on the further side. As 
he lifted his face above the stream it seemed 
to Erwin for a moment that he must cough. 
The filthy water was almost strangling him. 
By a great effort he controlled himself. He 
was still near the fence and when his eyes 
were partly cleared he eagerly looked about 
for the guard. At first he was unable to dis- 
cover the man. Soon, however, he saw him 
seated on the ground, his back leaning 
against the trunk of a huge tree. Had the 
guard seen him! Was he watching even 
now? The uncertainty had not departed 
when once more Erwin began slowly to crawl 
forward. 


CHAPTER IX 


m THE SWAMP 

When Erwin had advanced two yards he 
stopped and peered once more at the dim 
form of the guard. Apparently the man had 
not moved. He was not more than twenty 
feet from the place in the stream where the 
young prisoner was crouching. The silence 
of the night was suddenly broken when in 
response to the call of the adjoining guard, 
the man in front of Erwin slowly arose and 
sleepily called: ^‘Post number foah! Half 
past nine o’clock. And a-l-Ps w-e-1-1!” 

In a turmoil of excitement Erwin was 
breathing rapidly. Exerting himself to the 
utmost he still endeavored to lie motionless. 
Much of his body was covered by the dark 
water, and his face, except the left side, was 
also submerged. Almost fascinated, he 
watched the guard, who yawned, stretched 
his arms, and then a moment later resumed 
his seat at the base of the tree against 
112 


IN THE SWAMP 


113 


which he before had been leaning. A feeling 
of exultation came to the young prisoner 
which for the moment almost enabled him to 
forget the filthy water that was well-nigh 
strangling him. 

Waiting for what seemed to Erwin a suf- 
ficient time to ensure the sleep of the guard, 
if the man really was sleeping, he resumed 
his slow advance. The slightest noise would 
arouse the sentinel now. Not a ripple must 
be heard. The advance was by inches. Once 
Erwin felt his hands slip down into a hole 
in the bed of the stream. The vile water 
again filled his mouth and nose, and almost 
forced him to cough. By a great effort, he 
restrained the impulse. His face was turned 
toward the guard. The sharpshooter on the 
platform was hidden from his sight by the 
few trees that intervened. His sole danger, 
at least for the moment, lay with the guard. 

Not a movement had the man made since 
Erwin had resumed his crawling. Fortu- 
nately the stream was as shallow as he and 
Taylor had thought it was. Only occasion- 
ally did the bed dip and so slow was the 
progress of the desperate boy that he was 


114 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


already prepared when his fingers found the 
deeper places. 

One yard, two yards, five yards had been 
successfully passed. As yet the guard had 
not betrayed any knowledge of the escape. 
The fear of the discovery in the camp that 
the two prisoners were gone now seized upon 
Erwin. The guard was at least thirty feet 
away, though his form still could be plainly 
seen by the desperate young soldier. It 
seemed to Erwin that the time had come 
when with safety he might increase the speed 
at which he was moving. Just before him, 
projecting a few inches above the water, was 
a long root. Beaching forward, Erwin 
grasped the root and strove to pull himself 
by its aid. 

Suddenly the root snapped in his hands. 
It was not a root at all — only a dead branch 
of a tree projecting over the stream. Terri- 
fied by the sharp report of the snapping 
branch, it was only with difficulty that Erwin 
controlled his wild impulse to rise and flee 
from the place. His only hope seemed to lie 
in swift flight. 

Instantly, however, realizing the peril of 


IN THE SWAMP 


115 


any such action, he sank once more into the 
stream and lay still. In terror he glanced 
back at the guard. He could see that the 
man was sitting erect now, plainly startled 
by the sharp sound of the breaking branch. 
In a moment the guard sat erect and Erwin 
could see that he was holding his rifle in his 
hands. His face, too, was turned toward the 
place from which the sound had come. For 
a moment it seemed to Erwin that he him- 
self was seen. 

His alarm increased when the guard si- 
lently arose and advanced a few steps nearer 
the place where the soldier was lying in the 
stream. For an instant Erwin thought of 
Taylor, wondering where his friend was at 
that moment. His own escape apparently 
was hopeless now. The sole thought in his 
mind was, that by remaining quiet he might, 
perhaps, help Taylor. In his eagerness to 
secure one escaping prisoner the guard might 
not make any effort to ascertain whether or 
not there were others near him. Taylor 
might now have gone so far beyond the bor- 
ders that he at least would be free. 

Suddenly Erwin became aware that the 


116 FOB THE STARS AND STRIPES 


guard had stopped. He could see the man 
leaning forward, peering intently into the 
darkness in the direction whence the sound 
of the broken branch had come. Had he 
seen the face of the crouching prisoner? 
Breathless in his suspense, Erwin waited and 
watched the man on the shore not far away. 
How long a time elapsed Erwin never knew, 
but at last the guard, apparently satisfied 
that he had been mistaken, or that the sound, 
if he really had heard one, was innocent, 
slowly turned back toward the tree against 
which he had before been leaning. 

What seemed to Erwin a long time passed 
before he dared move. This time the guard 
had not seated himself. He was watchful, 
and his face was toward the stream. Ap- 
parently his fears had not all departed, al- 
though he had not been able to discover any 
cause for alarm. 

At last Erwin decided that the suspense 
could not be endured longer. His caution 
increased as he once more began to crawl 
forward. His progress was by inches now. 
His hands were not permitted to rise more 
than an inch or two above the inuddy hot- 


IN THE SWAMP 


117 


tom. With every action he turned his face 
to the place where the guard was watching. 
The darkness was sufficient to conceal him — 
of that Erwin now felt certain. Some low 
bushes were growing along the marshy 
shores and these aided in hiding him. His 
one great danger was in making some noise 
in his movements. If the guard should hear 
another suspicious sound there was no ques- 
tion in Erwin ^s mind as to what instantly 
would follow. 

All conception of time was gone now. 
The one overmastering purpose was to go on. 
Distance between him and the guard was to 
Erwin’s mind the sole measure of safety. 
On and still on he crawled. Whether min- 
utes or hours had elapsed he could not de- 
termine. Whether he had gone yards or feet 
he did not know. One thing, however, was 
certain now, and that was, that the guard 
could not be seen. 

The strain was beginning to be felt by this 
time by Erwin. The excitement as well as 
the efforts he had put forth were almost ex- 
hausting him. The foul odor of the water, 
its nauseating taste, in addition to the cold 


118 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


lie was suffering, were added perils. He felt 
sometimes as if his body did not belong to 
him. It was almost numb. His fingers 
were cramped and his eyes were so blurred 
that even his way was difficult to find. Still 
Erwin slowly pulled himself forward. He 
was aware that the stars were in the sky 
and that he was in a more open region than 
when he was passing the bushes where the 
snapping branch had so nearly proved his 
undoing. Lifting his head for a moment he 
saw not far before him what seemed to be 
the outlines of trees and more brush. Per- 
haps there he would find Taylor awaiting 
him. 

The thought of his comrade served to re- 
vive Erwin’s eagerness. With an increased 
determination he continued on his way. If 
the open space could be successfully passed 
then his hope of escaping would be stronger. 
If it were only possible for him to rise and 
walk, he thought, what a relief the change 
would be. The low marshy ground about 
him, through which the muddy stream had 
its course, was so level that anyone walking 
on it would be easily discovered by watching 


IN THE SWAMP 


119 


or seardiing soldiers. His best way was to 
continue as he was doing, he concluded, 
though every movement was one of pain and 
his wearied body seemed as heavy as though 
it had been weighted with lead. 

Slowly, frequently stopping for rest, Er- 
win crawled forward. He was no longer 
fearful of sounds of pursuit. Even discov- 
ery was comparatively a matter of inditfer- 
ence now. His efforts were almost mechan- 
ical. There was slight feeling in his arms 
and almost none in his hands. Still, the 
well-nigh exhausted young soldier pulled 
himself forward. It was, therefore, with a 
feeling of surprise that at last he found him- 
self on the border of the dark spot he had 
seen before him. The stream was entering 
a region where trees and rank bushes were 
growing along its borders. It apparently 
was a huge swamp to which he had come. 

He was more eager now as the thought of 
Taylor recurred. Had his friend escaped? 
If he had, then somewhere in the region be- 
fore him he could be found. Erwin longed 
to shout, to call for his comrade, but he well 
knew that any such effort on his part would 


120 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


be as foolish as it was impossible. His best 
course would be to go on, he concluded, and 
be on the lookout for his friend. 

Once within the shelter of the brush Er- 
win staggered to his feet. He was scarcely 
able to stand. The soft mud into which his 
feet sank with every advancing step seemed 
to hold him almost as in a vise. The effort 
to walk in the stream was almost beyond his 
strength. Struggling forward he advanced 
a few yards and then in an attempt to re- 
cover himself he fell forward, a low cry es- 
caping his lips as he struck the water. 

Suddenly he felt someone grasp his arm 
and he was assisted to stand. He was not 
surprised when he heard the low voice of 
Taylor ; indeed, he would not have cared very 
much, he thought, if it had been Uncle Sam 
or even Lieutenant Evans that had spoken 
to him. He was too exhausted to realize 
fully what the rescue meant. 

‘HVe been waiting for you,’’ whispered 
Taylor encouragingly. “I’ve had a good 
rest here on the knee of this old cypress root. 
I knew you couldn’t pass me, but I’m glad 
you’ve come.” 


IN TEE 8WAMP 


121 


As Erwin was unable to reply, Taylor as- 
sisted him to the place which he himself had 
recently occupied. For a time neither spoke, 
while Taylor waited for his friend to recover 
a little from his struggles. 

‘ ‘ Erwin, he whispered at last, ‘‘can you 
go on a little further now!’^ 

“CanT we try the bank? The mud in the 
bottom of the creek is deep.’^ 

“I’ve been a little way down the stream,” 
said Taylor. “I came back to wait for you. 
There’s a clump of trees beyond the swamp. 
If you could wade till we came to them — ” 

“I’ll try it,” said Erwin. 

“Good! We don’t want to leave any 
tracks if we can help it. Did any one see 
you?” 

“I don’t think so. I broke a branch near 
the guard and that roused him a little. He 
took his gun and started toward me.” 

“He didn’t see you, though?” demanded 
Taylor eagerly. 

“I don’t think he did. He didn’t follow 
me anyway.” 

“Good. Now if we can only dodge the 
master of the hounds and his dogs! We’ve 


122 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


done well, but we’ll have to use all the 
strength we’ve got to get away from the 
bloodhounds. They make the rounds of 
the pen every night, you know, and twice 
every day.” 

‘ ‘ Come on ! ” said Erwin quickly. The ref- 
erence to the dogs had served to rouse him, 
just as Taylor had hoped it would do. 

Together the two boys started. They had 
not gone far, however, before it became evi- 
dent that for a time at least the stream was 
impassable. The mud was softer and deeper, 
and progress in it was soon so difficult that 
both decided to try the left bank. Time now 
was almost as important as distance. 

The boys found the banks firm in places 
and both made more rapid progress. The 
moon had risen by this time and in its light 
they were enabled to see the way before 
them. 

‘^What’s thatr’ suddenly whispered Er- 
win when they had halted a moment for rest. 
‘‘What’s that? WTiat’s that?” he repeated 
hoarsely. 

Taylor was silent for a moment before he 
responded. Far away could be heard the 


IN TEE SWAMP 


123 


baying of dogs. Whether the weird cry in- 
dicated that the escape of the two boys had 
been discovered and that men and dogs were 
in pursuit or whether it merely indicated the 
nightly rounds of the ‘‘master of the 
hounds,’’ as the man in charge of the fierce 
pack was known, it was impossible to de- 
cide. The sound, however, was distinct, al- 
though it indicated that the bloodhounds 
were not near. 

“We must take to the creek again, Er- 
win,” whispered Taylor. 

Breathlessly Erwin followed his friend 
into the stream. Difficult as the way was, it 
still was their sole hope if the dogs were 
searching for them. As the boys struggled 
forward they soon found the bed of the creek 
was becoming somewhat firmer. Broken 
branches from overhanging trees, gnarled 
roots in the mud, however, added to the dif- 
ficulties and sufferings of the desperate 
young soldiers. Every step was one of pain. 
There was no protection from the pointed 
sticks upon which their feet frequently were 
placed. 

For a time the boys bent all their energies 


124 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


upon flight. They had not advanced very 
far, however, before the cry of the dogs was 
heard again. This time the terrifying sound 
plainly was nearer. 

‘‘I don’t see how they got the scent,” mut- 
tered Taylor. ^‘But they’re after us, that’s 
plain. We must do something ! ’ ’ 

‘‘What?” inquired Erwin hopelessly. 

“Hark!” whispered Taylor. “What’s 
that in the woods?” 

A moment later there was no need of ex- 
planation, for both boys were able to per- 
ceive the cause of the startling sound among 
the neighboring trees. 


CHAPTER X 


THE MASTEK OF THE HOUNDS 

In the dim light two huge dogs were hay- 
ing and frantically running about the bank. 
That the boys had been discovered both the 
young prisoners were convinced. 

Crouch! Keep behind the tree! DonT 
speak, whispered Taylor excitedly. 

Clinging tightly to the long root, both boys 
drew closer to the huge trunk of the cypress 
tree. In spite of their fears both, however, 
were peering at the frantic hounds which 
were baying in tones that added to the ter- 
ror of the desperate young soldiers. Ap- 
parently the end of their efforts to escape 
had come. The dogs must have gained their 
scent along the bank upon which the boys 
had made their way for a short distance. 

As yet, neither of the two dogs had ven- 
tured into the water. Both Taylor and Er- 
win could see the huge brutes in their excite- 
ment. Creeping close to the border the dogs 
125 


126 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


lifted their heads and howled in a manner 
that was terrifying to the trembling boys. 
Stories of prisoners in their attempts to es- 
cape being torn by the savage packs recurred 
to the crouching young soldiers. Perhaps 
their turn had now come. Not a word was 
spoken as the boys peered at the frantic 
hounds. Both were aware what was likely 
to befall within a few minutes. 

In a brief time the master of the hounds 
was seen approaching the place where his 
dogs were baying. The man was mounted 
upon a mule which with difficulty was mak- 
ing its way over the soft and marshy ground. 
As the man leaped from the back of the ani- 
mal he was riding the excitement of the two 
dogs was redoubled. They leaped upon the 
man and then turned frantically to the shore 
and their deep-mouthed baying was mingled 
with growls and yelps that seemed to Erwin 
and Taylor the most fearful sounds they had 
ever heard. Even the roar of cannon in bat- 
tle or the reports of rifles were as nothing 
compared with the terrifying threats of the 
savage brutes. In their weakened condition 


MASTER OF THE HOUNDS 127 


both boys had slight hope now of escaping 
the fangs of the dogs before them. 

‘^What is it, Judy? Have yo’ found ’em, 
Judas?” exclaimed the master of the hounds 
as he approached his dogs. 

For a moment the noise was even louder 
than it had been before. Whining, snarling, 
yelping, baying, the two dogs darted to the 
shore and it seemed as if both were about to 
leap into the stream. A low word from their 
master quieted them in a measure as the 
man stood peering into the darkness. He 
himself could be seen by the trembling boys, 
and there was still a faint hope in their 
minds that the great tree to whose roots 
they were clinging might conceal them from 
his sight. 

^^We-uns have got yo’ now!” called the 
man. ‘‘Come in outen that!” 

Whether or not the man really could see 
them neither of the boys knew. Both, how- 
ever, remained where they were, drawing 
closer to the huge root and still peering 
around its border at the sight before them. 

“Come in outen that!” called the man 


128 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


once more. ‘‘It’s your last chance before I 
send the dogs in after yo ’-all ! ’ ’ 

Still neither of the boys moved from his 
position ai^d both were silently watching the 
scene before them. The dogs had become 
more quiet while their master was speaking. 
Both were crouching at his feet and looking 
up into his face as if they were only awaiting 
his word to rush into the muddy stream and 
tear the men, whom they could see if their 
master could not, limb from limb. 

Suddenly the man drew a revolver from 
his hip pocket and fired twice at the tree be- 
hind which the boys were crouching. The 
thud of the bullets as they struck was 
plainly heard by the desperate boys and both 
were startled by the sudden act of the man 
on the bank. 

“Now will yo’-all come outen that?” called 
the man savagely. “That’s warnin’ number 
one. Come out an’ I’ll protect yo’-all. If 
you wait there I’ll send in the dogs. Speak 
up so ’t I kin heah yo ’-all ! Are yo ’ a com- 
in’? I’ll give yo’ till I count five an’ after 
that I’ll let loose the dawgs.” 

Taylor reached up and pressed the arm 


MASTER OF TEE HOUNDS 129 


of his companion to let him know that no 
response to the demand was to be made. 

The silence of the night was unbroken save 
by the whimperings of the dogs. The figure 
of the waiting master of the hounds was 
clearly outlined in the moonlight. It was 
manifest that he had slight fear of being the 
target for the bullets of an unseen enemy. 
For a brief time the man was silent and mo- 
tionless. Then turning to his dogs he ex- 
claimed savagely, ‘^Go get ^em! Drive ^em 
out! Tear th’ Yanks to pieces, Judas! Bite 
’em, Judy!” 

With a growl so loud and fierce that it was 
startling to the watching boys, the two dogs 
darted again to the shore. One of them 
leaped into the stream but the other hesi- 
tated after several false starts. Plainly it 
did not desire any close contact with the dark 
and forbidding stream. 

‘‘What d’ye mean, Judas!” roared the 
master. “Afraid, be ye! I’ll give yo’ 
somethin’ worth being scart by,” he added, 
as he laid the whip, which he was holding in 
his right hand, many times upon the cower- 
ing brute. A growl, a scream of pain, a chal- 


130 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 

lenge followed and the dog turned and leaped 
into the water, following its companion, 
which now was nearing the place where the 
two boys were hiding. 

Already at Taylor’s whispered word Er- 
win had drawn himself farther up the twisted 
root and was well above the water. He was 
still sheltered by the trunk of the tree, how- 
ever, and unless the man on the bank had 
seen him, he was in no great danger from 
the pistol. Taylor had climbed into the 
place which his friend had vacated, but as he 
looked down he was by no means convinced 
that he was far enough above the water to 
make him safe from the fangs of the dogs. 

The noise of the approaching brutes was 
plainly heard. The dogs were splashing in 
the muddy stream, but they were not barking 
or growling now. Their every etfort ap- 
parently was to gain the place where the 
boys were seated. One of the dogs was in 
advance of the other and in a brief time it 
gained the foot of the tree. 

Without hesitating a moment, the savage 
brute clambered up the interlaced roots. The 
darkness could not hide its gleaming eyes. 


MASTER OF THE HOUNDS 131 

Taylor almost believed that he could feel the 
hot breath of the savage Judy. He was hold- 
ing in readiness the stout club which he had 
secured when he had first entered the swamp, 
and this was his sole defense. As the dog 
leaped Taylor thrust the end of his club into 
the open jaws. The dog instantly seized the 
weapon in its teeth, but at that moment its 
feet slipped upon the slippery roots and it 
fell, still clinging tenaciously to the club. 
The shock almost drew Taylor from his seat 
and to prevent himself from falling he was 
compelled to let go his grasp on the club. 
He was now without any protection from the 
assaults of the savage brute and in a mo- 
ment the other dog would join in the attack. 
The splash of the dog, which had seized the 
club, as it slipped and fell into the water, was 
followed by the sounds that Judas made as 
he now rushed to the assistance of his mate. 

The plight of the boys was terrible now. 
Erwin seated above his friend was powerless 
to assist him, although he leaned forward, 
striving to draw Taylor farther up on the 
twisted root. All thoughts of the man on 
the bank for the moment were ignored as 


132 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


the boys awaited the next rush of the savage 
brutes below them. 

Growling and snarling, the two dogs to- 
gether attempted to gain a foothold on the 
tangled roots beneath the large root on which 
the boys were seated. The fierce rush of the 
dogs together sent both yelping once more 
into the muddy stream. Fortunately for the 
young soldiers there was but one place by 
which the dogs could climb. On every side 
of the tree except the one where the boys 
were seated, no exposed roots could be seen. 
Doubtless the tree had been partly torn from 
its hold in some storm and the upturned 
root was left exposed a few feet above the 
stream. 

Once more the dogs rushed together in 
their efforts to seize the crouching boys and 
again the impact sent both brutes snarling 
into the water again. One of them yelped 
with pain, evidently in its fall having struck 
some sharp point of a projecting root or 
branch. There was no delay, however, in 
their onslaughts, and this time Judy managed 
to secure a foothold and in a moment seized 
the bottom of Taylor ^s trousers in her teeth. 


MASTER OF TEE HOUNDS 133 


The torn clothing parted and the dog fell 
back, carrying with her in her fall the piece 
of cloth which had not been strong enough 
to endure the strain. 

Before the dog could regain her place, Ju- 
das had leaped upon the mass of roots and 
with wide open jaws was almost upon Tay- 
lor, who had drawn back as far as his seat 
on the root permitted. 

‘‘Hang on to me, Erwin whispered Tay- 
lor. 

Erwin did not reply, but reaching forward, 
he thrust one arm under his friend’s left 
shoulder. With his right arm Erwin clung 
to the huge root above him. 

Already Taylor had slipped his torn jacket 
from its place and was holding it in front of 
him. As the dog seized the garment in his 
teeth Taylor hastily threw the sleeves about 
the dog’s neck and drew them tight. At that 
very moment Judy leaped to aid her mate, 
but the force with which she struck him in 
her efforts to obtain a foothold threw her 
from the mass of roots and left Judas sus- 
pended in the air with the sleeves of Taylor’s 
coat wrapped tightly around his neck. 


134 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


The fall of the heavy brute almost dragged 
Taylor from his place, but in some way he 
contrived to maintain his grasp on the 
sleeves, which he brought quickly together 
and held with both hands. The sound of 
wheezing which came from the throat of the 
suspended dog plainly showed that the brute 
was choking. 

‘‘Hold me, Erwin. Hold tight!’’ whis- 
pered Taylor savagely, as he braced his feet 
and threw one arm around the root in such 
a manner that he still held to the coat- sleeves 
with both hands. The heavy dog was 
scrambling desperately. The weight was so 
great that Taylor was almost compelled to 
let go his hold. The feet of the dog touched 
the tangled mass of roots and almost per- 
mitted him to gain a foothold. The noise of 
the struggle could be plainly heard. Eealiz- 
ing that something was wrong, or that a des- 
perate conflict of some kind was being fought 
in the darkness of the stream, the man on 
shore shouted his words of encouragement to 
his dogs — “Get ’em, Judy! Tear ’em up! 
Bite ’em! Go on!” 

Mindful of the call, Judy leaped again, but 



The heavy dog was scrambling desperately. — Page 134. 






‘ ** ^ r* 

il*s«^>'^ > ■, ' 5. r - ■ -■ ■'^- „ 

' 'm* rv§^jt ^ .u »5l • 

r^' -sL wgj w- # > .^iir J 

‘ •- =^^^3Isa. •'^v. 



A%_: 


I- 

#2- 




•V 


i9j 

r ^ V? 

"• :Aj , ^ ‘ H 




I» 


‘A 


» 

* 


^ V 






MASTER OF TEE HOUNDS 135 


her feet touched the mass of roots just as 
her mate had almost regained a foothold. 
Once more the force of the impact sent both 
dogs from the place, but by a desperate ef- 
fort Taylor contrived to retain his hold and 
the huge brute still was hanging in the air. 

Taylor’s arms were trembling in his ef- 
forts. Perspiration was rolling in streams 
down his face. Erwin, too, was still cling- 
ing to his friend’s shoulders. At times it 
almost seemed to Taylor that his arms were 
being pulled from their sockets by the heavy 
weight he was holding. The frantic strug- 
gles of the choking hound continued. Again 
and again Judy leaped to the aid of her mate, 
but every time her efforts resulted in her 
failure to secure a place on the roots and 
prevented the other dog from gaining even a 
foothold. 

How long Taylor would have been able to 
continue the unequal struggle he never knew. 
Eepeatedly he felt that he must let go. His 
strength was not equal to the task. He was 
almost in despair when he suddenly became 
aware that the dog’s efforts were becoming 
less violent. The sound of its wheezing and 


136 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


choking was less plainly heard. Encouraged 
by the indication that the end could not be 
far away, the desperate young soldier braced 
himself anew and still held on. The other 
dog, in nowise discouraged, leaped again and 
again upon the narrow roots, only to be 
thrown back herself with every attempt and 
to send the body of her mate away from 
his only help. 

At last the struggles of the choking dog 
ceased. The heavy weight of the body pulled 
steadily but there were no longer any elforts 
to scramble upon the roots of the tree. 
Swinging the motionless body into such a po- 
sition that it would be impossible for the 
other dog to leap upon the place, Taylor still 
held the coat- sleeves tightly drawn about the 
neck of the brute, relying to a certain extent 
upon the weight of the body itself to assist 
him. 

Suddenly there was a whimper from Judy. 
Before either Taylor or Erwin was fully 
aware of what had occurred, the sounds of 
splashing heard in the stream indicated that 
the dog had turned away and was making 
her way to the bank. 


CHAPTEE XI 


A HALT 

The relief that came with the retreat of 
the hound was so great that for a moment 
the two hoys, almost exhausted by their 
struggles, gazed at each other as if they 
could not believe the contest really was 
ended. The splashing of the dog could be 
plainly heard as it made its way to the bank. 
A moment later its cries arose when its bru- 
tal master lashed the dog savagely, again 
and again ordering it back into the stream. 

The bloodhound, however, despite blows 
and kicks, was not to be induced to enter the 
water again. It crouched and whimpered 
and whined on the shore. Once the boys 
thought it was about to plunge into the 
stream, but cowering, it turned and crawled 
back toward its master — its howls of pain 
showing plainly the treatment it was receiv- 
ing. 


137 


138 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


Apparently convinced at last that all at- 
tempts to drive Judy again into the marsh 
were fruitless, the master of the hounds 
stopped and peering into the shadows whis- 
tled and called to the dog that had not re- 
turned. ‘‘Heah yo’, Judas! Come hack 
heah, yo ’ rascal ! Come heah ! Come heah ! ’ ’ 

The call served to arouse Judy as no blows 
had done. The dog, growling and whimper- 
ing, stood beside her master and for an in- 
stant seemed to be on the point of going to 
the aid of her lost mate. She did not step 
into the water, however, not even when her 
master repeated his call, as he did several 
times, to Judas, who had failed to return. 

Suddenly the man mounted his mule and 
departed from the place. The boys were able 
to see him as he rode across the open fields, 
beating his steed savagely as he urged it to 
its utmost speed. The departure was so un- 
expected that it was well-nigh startling to the 
watching boys, who were scarcely able to 
trust the evidences of their own eyes. And 
yet the man was in plain sight until he dis- 
appeared amidst the shadows of some tall 
pine trees far back from the stream. 


A HALT 139 

‘‘Come whispered Taylor to his com- 
panion. “We must get away. ’ ’ 

“The dog is still on the bank/’ suggested 
Erwin. 

“Yes. That means the man is coming 
back. We must leave before he comes. We 
haven’t a minute to lose. Come! Come 
on!” 

Taylor at once slid from his position on the 
root of the tree into the water. Slowly and 
painfully Erwin followed his friend’s exam- 
ple, but he was too weary to question him 
when Taylor led the way to the hank opposite 
that on which the hound was waiting. 

The appearance of the boys was greeted 
by frantic yelps from the dog. For a time 
it seemed as if she were about to leap into 
the muddy stream in pursuit of them, hut 
she kept carefully to the shore even when the 
boys gained the bank on the opposite side. 

Taylor did not hesitate a moment. As 
soon as his companion joined him the tall 
young soldier turned to lead the way directly 
back toward the camp from which they had 
escaped. Even the strange action of Taylor 
was not questioned by Erwin, who followed 


140 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


obediently, and as well as his exhausted con- 
dition permitted. The trees and banks were 
all confused before him as he stumbled for- 
ward. Every act seemed to be mechanical. 
His hands and feet were almost without feel- 
ing. A cloud seemed to rest upon the 
ground over which he was passing. 

How far Taylor had led the way he did not 
know, when suddenly the direction of the 
flight was changed by the leader. Once more 
Taylor slipped into the stream and began to 
move back in the direction of the place from 
which they had come. Every step was tor- 
ture. The sharp points of the fallen 
branches in the bed of the stream tore or 
lacerated Erwin’s feet. He frequently stum- 
bled and fell forward into the filthy water, 
but each time to be assisted to rise by Taylor, 
whose strength apparently was far from be- 
ing gone. The entire experience was so like 
that of an evil dream that , Erwin at times 
wondered if he really was awake. 

In a brief time the boys passed the huge 
uptorn cypress which had provided a shelter 
for them in the attack by the two hounds. 
Here Taylor paused a moment and listened 


A HALT 


141 


intently while he peered at the shore before 
him. Not even the dog could now be seen. 
Silence rested over the entire region. 

The delay at the tree was brief and speed- 
ily the flight was resumed. 

Following the course of the stream the 
boys made their way forward. Again and 
again Taylor was compelled to stop and lift 
his friend who had fallen. Almost savagely 
the young leader urged his comrade on. 
How far they had gone neither was aware, 
when at last it was painfully evident that 
Erwin’s strength was exhausted. He was 
deaf now to pleadings or threats. Human 
nature could do no more. 

Almost in despair, Taylor peered at the 
bushes along the banks. Motionless, silent, 
grim — they seemed to be conscious of the 
plight of the desperate boys. Was no help 
to be found anywhere! Were all the efforts 
to escape to be vain! 

Suddenly Taylor uttered a low exclama- 
tion and leaving the side of his friend turned 
quickly toward some brush that was hanging 
over the water. Even then his actions failed 
to arouse Erwin, who was hardly able to 


142 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 

stand erect in the place where he had been 
left. He did not call, he scarcely glanced at 
Taylor as his friend darted toward the 
bushes. 

A moment afterward when Taylor re- 
turned he was poling a small, flat-bottomed 
boat he had discovered concealed underneath 
the brush. For a moment the sight of his 
friend ^s discovery aroused a brief interest 
on Erwin’s part. Obediently he did as he 
was told when Taylor lifting him by the 
arms assisted Erwin into the punt. 

‘^Now lie down,” whispered Taylor excit- 
edly. ‘^Lie flat on your back! That’s 
right 1 ” he added, as Erwin almost fell upon 
the bottom of the boat. ^‘Keep quiet and 
I’ll soon have us both well out of this.” 

The warning was scarcely needed, for Er- 
win was soon asleep. Not even the peril in 
which they still were or the brighter pros- 
pect of escape which the finding of the little 
punt had aroused was sufficient to keep open 
the eyes of the exhausted young soldier. 

Instantly Taylor began to pole the un- 
gainly craft. Progress was still slow be- 
cause frequently the boat was aground in 


A HALT 


143 


the soft mud or held fast by the interlacing 
roots that abounded in the bed of the stream. 
Still, it was progress and the thought was 
inspiring. Best of all, too, was the knowl- 
edge that the boat left slight traces of its 
movements. Every foot now meant an add- 
ed distance between the escaping prisoners 
and the prison pen from which they had 
fled. 

The hours passed slowly and at times even 
the iron muscles of Taylor demanded rest. 
At such times he listened for sounds of pur- 
suit. The distant baying of hounds was 
what he feared most of all. The moon indi- 
cated that the night was well gone. The 
coming of the morning would demand a 
change in their plans. Food, too, and water 
to drink must be secured. Already Tayjpr’s 
lips were parched and his arms were trem- 
bling under the strain of the poling. 

Still the determined boy pushed the crude 
boat forward. His progress in places was 
comparatively rapid. In others he was held 
back by roots and his utmost strength was 
required to free the boat from the tangled 


mass. 


144 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


At last the first faint streaks of the dawn 
appeared. Taylor glanced down at Erwin, 
who still was sleeping on the bottom of the 
boat. The time had come when a change in 
their plans was imperative. Food and drink 
presented problems that no longer could be 
evaded. 

For a moment Taylor hesitated. Should 
he send his boat ashore and arouse his 
sleeping companion I Their peril might be in- 
creased by any attempt to advance in the day- 
time and the coming day was not to be 
endured without food and drink of some kind. 
The light in the eastern sky was becoming 
brighter. Soon sunrise would be at hand 
and with its appearance new and perhaps 
more serious problems must be faced. 

Taylor slowly guided the little boat to the 
shore where the rank bushes were growing 
far out over the water. There he pushed 
the punt beneath the overhanging branches, 
glanced again at his sleeping friend, placed 
the pole carefully on the bottom and then 
stepped ashore. If Erwin by any chance was 
awakened during his absence the sight of the 
pole as well as the position of the boat, he 


A HALT 


145 


thought, would at once inform him of the 
fact that his friend had departed but had 
not deserted. Unquestionably Erwin would 
await his return. Nor did Taylor plan to 
be gone long. His purpose now was to dis- 
cover what might be near the little stream. 
Stepping cautiously ashore, the young soldier 
peered about him in the dawning light. 

When Taylor had withdrawn from the 
bank he found himself on the borders of a 
great cornfield. Much of the crop had been 
cut, but the high stalks still standing gave 
almost the appearance of sentinels waving 
their arms in warning. Loose piles of stalks 
that had been cut were also to be seen here 
and there in the field. In the distance what 
looked like low huts suggested the presence 
of the quarters of negroes. He turned to 
look for the ‘‘big house’’ of the proprietors 
of the plantation — for such he judged the 
land to be. A mass of high trees in the 
distance might surround such a place, he 
thought. Glancing again at the low build- 
ings he had already seen across the field and 
concluding that they were far enough from 
the residence, which perhaps was concealed 


146 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


by the trees, to enable him to gain them with- 
out being discovered, he began to make his 
way across the cornfield. 

He was proceeding cautiously across the 
field, for the fear of discovery was still strong 
upon him. Frequently he paused to peer all 
about him to make certain his movements 
were not observed. He darted from one pile 
of cornstalks to another, stopping at each to 
look over the ground before he advanced 
further. 

Taylor had proceeded half the distance 
across the field, which he estimated covered 
at least fifteen acres, when he abruptly 
stopped. Approaching from the huts was a 
man. The young soldier stared excitedly at 
the moving figure and at once decided that 
he was not mistaken. There was another man 
besides himself in the cornfield and without 
question he was coming toward him. Had 
he himself been seen? The question was up- 
permost in the young soldier’s thoughts as 
he fled to the shelter of a nearby pile of corn- 
stalks. Crouching behind it he peered forth 
at the stranger. The light was not yet clear 
enough to enable Taylor to perceive who or 


A HALT 


147 


what the man was. If he himself had not 
been seen, then his safest course, Taylor de- 
cided, was to remain in hiding until he had 
ascertained who the other man was and what 
he was doing in the field at that early hour. 

The approaching man certainly was acting 
strangely, Taylor observed. At intervals 
the man stopped and fiung his arms about 
him or extended them in an attitude of 
prayer or as if he were beseeching some one. 
No other person was to be seen in the field, 
however, and Taylor’s perplexity increased 
as the man approached the hiding place. 

As the man drew nearer, Taylor became 
aware that the stranger was a young negro — 
apparently not much older than he. The ne- 
gro ’s actions were strange, too, and different 
from those in which he had at first engaged. 
He was peering about him almost as if he 
was expecting to find someone. 

The first thought in Taylor’s mind as he 
excitedly watched the approaching negro was 
that he himself must have been seen. Still, 
the black man did not turn directly toward 
Taylor’s place of concealment. He was not 
more than twenty feet away now. Suddenly 


148 FOB THE STARS AND STRIPES 


Taylor, acting upon an impulse that had 
seized upon him, stepped from behind the 
stalks and in a low voice hailed the young 
negro. 

‘‘Are you looking for meT’ called Taylor. 

The black man stopped abruptly and in 
terror gazed at the unexpected sight. His 
teeth were chattering in his fright and for an 
instant Taylor expected to see the negro 
turn and flee. 

“Are you looking for me?’’ Taylor again 
called quietly. 

“Who d-d-dat?” stammered the terrified 
black man. 

“A friend.” 

“Is y-y-o de man what mas’ Tom done 
sent?” 

‘ ‘ Did he tell you to meet me here ? ’ ’ 

“Y-yas, sub.” 

“Well, here I am.’ 

“Y-y-yas, sub. Ah see yo’ is, sub.” 

“Come up nearer. I can’t talk to you so 
far away,” suggested Taylor. 

The negro reluctantly did as he was bid- 
den, but a nearer view of the young soldier 
apparently increased instead of relieving his 


A HALT 


149 


alarm. He gazed at Taylor in manifest ter- 
ror. The light of the dawn was stronger 
now and the yonng soldier could see that the 
negroes eyes were rolling and his body was 
trembling. The sight caused Taylor to 
laugh, but his feeling of amusement instantly 
departed when the negro with a scream 
turned and fled so swiftly across the corn- 
field that in a brief time he disappeared from 
sight. 


CHAPTER XII 


THE CABIN 

Befoke Taylor was able to discover tbe 
cause of the sudden departure of the negro, 
the black man had disappeared from sight 
and the young soldier was left alone in the 
cornfield. The feeling of amusement which 
the terror of his visitor at first had aroused 
now gave place to one of perplexity. What 
was to be done? The sun was even now 
creeping above the eastern horizon. In a 
brief time day would be at hand. The in- 
creasing light would render his position still 
more perilous and Taylor looked all about 
him, hoping to discover some solution to his 
perplexing problem. 

Behind the clump of trees in the distance 
he could now see the outlines of thejarge 
rambling white house which doubtless was 
the mansion of the proprietor of the planta- 
tion. Not far from the house were strag- 
gling barns, and beyond them were the white- 
150 


THE CABIN 


151 


washed cabins — the abodes of the negroes. 
As yet not a man was to be seen about the 
place. 

The conditions soon would be different, 
Taylor thought. How far he was from the 
prison camp he had no means of knowing. 
If he were to judge by his feelings and the 
appearance of his blistered hands, he and Er- 
win might have come many miles in their 
flight. He was not sanguine, however, that 
they were beyond the possibility of pur- 
suit. In the fear which the thought 
aroused, Taylor decided at once to make his 
way to the cabins, which were not more than 
a hundred yards away. He must find help, 
he must trust some one and the negroes cer- 
tainly would be less likely to refuse him aid 
than would the people dwelling in the ‘‘man- 
sion.’’ 

Instantly deciding to adopt the suggestion, 
Taylor at once began to walk toward the low 
cabins. He was still fearful that his move- 
ments might be seen by his foes and accord- 
ingly ran from one pile of cornstalks to an- 
other, stopping a moment at each to make 
certain he had not been discovered. In spite 


152 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


of his frequent stops, however, his progress 
was not slow, and in a brief time he arrived 
at the place he was seeking. 

Boldly advancing to the open door of a 
cabin near him, he rapped loudly. He could 
hear some one moving in the rear of the 
building and in a brief time an old gray- 
headed negro man appeared in the doorway. 
As yet Taylor had not selected any plan of 
action, having decided to trust to circum- 
stances to aid him. The expression of con- 
sternation or alarm on the face of the black 
man at once caused the desperate young 
soldier to step inside the hut even before he 
was invited to enter. 

‘‘Good morning. Uncle, said Taylor, try- 
ing to speak calmly. 

“Mo’nin’, suh,’’ replied the negro dubi- 
ously. 

“Can you give me some breakfast T’ 

“Ah dunno, suh. Ah reckon Ah — ’’ 

“That’s good of you,” broke in Taylor 
quickly. “You see I didn’t want to disturb 
the people in the big house. It’s too early 
to do that. I knew you would be stirring, 
so I stopped here. I’m almost starved and 


THE CABIN 153 

if you can get me something to eat right 
away 1^11 he grateful.’’ 

The old colored man turned questioningly 
to the doorway in the rear of the room, and, 
glancing in the direction, Taylor saw a large 
black woman standing there apparently re- 
garding him with not very friendly feel- 
ings. 

‘‘Good morning,” exclaimed Taylor. “I 
was just explaining to your — your husband,” 
he added after a slight hesitation, for the man 
apparently was much older than the big 
woman before him. “I was just explaining 
to him that I was hungry and wanted some 
breakfast. I don’t want to disturb the fam- 
ily in the big house yet. ’ ’ 

“Humph!” sniffed the black woman, her 
hands resting upon her hips and her eyes 
betraying no friendly interest. “Yo’ don’ 
look lak yo’ disturb anybody ’ceptin’ de 
crows. Whar yo ’-all come fum 1 ’ ’ 

It was the question Taylor had expected 
and feared. “You don’t want a man to keep 
on driving Yankee prisoners, do you?” he in- 
quired. “I can’t do it any more.” 

The woman sniffed and did not change her 


154 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


attitude or position. ^^How cum yo^-all 

heahr’ 

“I told you. I couldn’t stand it any 
longer. ’ ’ 

‘‘Yo’ run away?” 

“Why, yes, after a fashion.” 

“Wha’ foh yo’ wan’ t’ see de white folks 
den?” 

“I haven’t seen them yet. I have come to 
you. Will you help me ? ” 

The negress sniffed disdainfully as she 
turned to her husband and said, ‘ ‘ Dere, now, 
yo’ wuffless, yo’ see wha’ yo’ done! Dey’s 
jes’ ’nough co’n meal lef ’ foh t’ mak one lit’l 
hoecake. Yo’ tak’ de bread outen de moufs 
of de chilluns an’ de sufferin’ saints t’ gib 
it to trash!” 

“Chile! chile!” remonstrated the old ne- 
gro— 

“Do’n ‘chile’ me, yo’ no- ’count nigger! 
Co’se Ah’m goin’ t’ gib de man er bite. Ah’d 
gib de debbil wha’ he done ask foh. Dis 
yere man he look lak he some relashun t’ de 
old Sat’n hisself. Dere, now, yo’ wuffless 
’Eastus, yo’ bettah tak’ dis yere man outen 
de ya’d an’ tak’ a hoe ter ’im.” 


THE CABIN 


155 


The woman turned sharply away and Tay- 
lor at once concluded that her tongue was 
sharper than her feelings toward hiin and 
that she was about to prepare him something 
to eat. Eejoiced at the prospect, he re- 
quested the negro man to provide him with 
some water to drink and then to show him 
where he might wash. 

As if to make partial amends for the scant 
welcome his wife had given their morning 
visitor, the old man brought Taylor a gourd 
filled with water. The young soldier did not 
return it until it was empty. Never before 
had water been so sweet to his taste. 

Accompanying the black man to the rear 
of the little log cabin, Taylor found a bucket 
of water near the corner of the house and 
at once began his ablutions. His body was 
coated with mud. As he labored to remove it 
he understood why his appearance had re- 
pelled the wife of ’Rastus. Coatless, hatless, 
shoeless, his clothing torn and worn, his hair 
long and unkempt — his appearance of itself 
would have been sufficient to startle a 
stranger, but when a thick coating of mud 
covered even his hands and his face he real- 


156 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


ized how difficult it would be for any one who 
saw him to believe that he was anything like 
what he had represented himself to be. 

It was a long time before he re-entered the 
cabin. As he passed through the doorway 
the odor of the hoecake which the negress had 
been preparing seemed to him more tantaliz- 
ing than any he had ever known. He was 
ravenously hungry. Perhaps the expression 
of suffering was more apparent in his face, 
now that its coating of mud had been re- 
moved. At all events, the black woman was 
less ungracious as she set her hoecake before 
her guest and watched him, a smile of satis- 
faction appearing on her face as he fell rav- 
enously upon the food she had prepared. 

Suddenly Taylor looked up and said : ‘ H 

forgot. I donT want to eat everything you 
have and you told your husband this was all 
the food you had in your house. ’ ’ 

‘‘GVan wid yo’ hoecake, man. Nehber 
yo’ min’ wha’ Ah done tole ’Eastus. Ah 
spec’ Ah hah ter gib him ’structions er he 
nehber stop eatin’ dis yere hoecake. Heah, 
come — ” 

The expression of alarm on Taylor’s face 


THE CABIN 


157 


did not escape the woman when her visitor 
almost started from his seat as a young ne- 
gro man entered the room. Instantly Tay- 
lor perceived that the newcomer was the man 
he had seen in the cornfield who had fled in 
terror from his presence. The young negro 
glanced questioningly at the woman and 
though Taylor was not able to see what she 
indicated, yet instantly the bearing and at- 
titude of the man changed. He did not man- 
ifest any alarm as he passed through the 
room. Indeed, Taylor had no difficulty in 
concluding as he peered at him that the young 
negro was the son of the woman who was 
feeding him. 

‘^Ah reckon yo’-all might lak bacon?” sug- 
gested the negress to Taylor. 

did once,” replied Taylor promptly. 
^ ^ It has been so long since I have tasted any 
that I am not sure now. I’d like to have a 
chance to try myself.” 

The woman laughed and going to a corner 
of the room lifted a board in the floor and 
drew from its hiding place a side of bacon. 
In a brief time she had cut several slices 
which she broiled on the fire which was burn- 


158 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


ing on the stone fireplace and then she placed 
the steaming viands before her visitor. 

‘‘You are good to me/’ murmured Taylor, 
as he once more began to eat ravenously. 

Again the woman laughed, as she stood 
watching her almost famished guest in his 
eagerness to dispose of the tempting viands 
which had been set before him. 

Almost with remorse Taylor now thought 
of Erwin whom he had left sleeping the sleep 
of exhaustion in the punt. He must some- 
how secure food for his friend, whose plight 
was far worse than his own. How he was 
to accomplish this without betraying himself 
to the friendly negroes was a problem diffi- 
cult of solution. 

At this moment both the young negro and 
his father re-entered the room. 

“How yo’-all lake Camp So ’gum T’ in- 
quired the younger man. 

“I don’t like it. I told your mother I 
couldn’t stand it any longer,” said Taylor 
hastily, striving to ascertain from the expres- 
sion on the black man ’s face whether or no he 
suspected his visitor of being an escaping 
prisoner. 


THE CABIN 159 

“Ah don’ reck’n many ob de Yankees 
lak it/’ 

‘‘Is yo’-all alone?” 

‘‘What makes you think I am not?” 

“Co’se dey mos’ gen’ly dosen’t ’scape dat 
er way.” 

“Do you think I am a — that I escaped?” 

“Ah sho’ly does,” grinned the negro. 

“Yo’-all is no sojer wif Mars’ Tom,” sug- 
gested the woman. 

“What makes you think I am not?” 

“Yo’ talks des lak a Yankee.” 

‘ ‘ How do you know ? Have you ever heard 
Yankees talk before?” 

The young negro grinned, displaying his 
white teeth, but did not reply. 

“Suppose I am a prisoner,” suggested 
Taylor. “You will help me get away, if I 
am, won’t you?” 

“Yo’ is come ter de right place,” said the 
woman promptly. There was no question as 
to her interest and cordiality. In the feeling 
of relief that came with her words Taylor re- 
solved to tell them more. In a vivid manner 
he described the life of the prisoners in- the 


160 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


camp. He also described the home from 
which he had come and told of the sorrow 
and anxiety there. He also related stories 
of suffering in other prisons than Camp Sor- 
ghum and gradually led up to the story of his 
own escape with Erwin. When he told of the 
attack made by the bloodhounds the eyes of 
his listeners almost gleamed in their excite- 
ment. 

‘‘Da’s de way wif de dawgs,” said the 
woman. “Dey is brave when dey is toged- 
der. When dey is des ’ one it seems lak dey 
is sholy de biggest cowards.” 

‘ ‘ Then that was why after we killed one the 
other ran away, was it!” inquired Taylor. 

“Yaas, suh. Da’s des’ de way wif ’em 
all. Dey is terr’ble when dey is in ’er pack, 
but when dey is des’ one, pears lak dey is 
pow’ful wuffless, mos’ lak’ Ifastus yere.” 

The old colored man nodded his head em- 
phatically several times almost as if he re- 
ceived the words of his wife as a compliment. 

“How far is Camp Sorghum from here!” 
asked Taylor. 

“Hit’s a right sma’t way, suh,” answered 
the woman. 


THE CABIN 


161 


‘^How many miles!’’ 

des ’bout ’s fur as from yere to Mis’ 
Sallie’s, Ah reck’n.” 

^ ^ Have you ever been there ? ’ ’ 

‘'Mis’ Sallie’s! Bress yo’ po’ ha’t, suh, 
’pears lak Ah done — ” 

“No, to Columbia. To the prison pen,” 
interrupted Taylor. 

“Ah is,” spoke up the young negfo 
promptly. “Ah done went once wif Mas’ 
Tom. Ah seed de sojer men an’ de drums 
an’ de guns — ” 

“Do you know how far it is from here!” 

“Ah des’ can’t say ’dreckly, suh. Ah 
reck’n hit’s a right sma’t way.” 

Hopeless of learning the distance he and 
his comrade had come in their escape, Taylor 
abandoned the effort. He felt reasonably 
certain that the negroes would not betray 
him. At once he decided that he must strive 
to secure some food for Erwin and return 
to the place where he had left his friend 
asleep. 

“I am sorry I can’t pay you for what you 
have doilQ for me. I haven’t a cent on my 
person. If you will let me have a little food 


162 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


to take to my friend I’ll try sometime to — ” 
Taylor ceased abruptly as the woman has- 
tily arose and ran to the door. In a moment 
she returned, her eyes shining in her excite- 
ment, as she exclaimed in a fierce whisper, 
‘‘Yere come Mas’ Tom an’ two sojer men is 
wif ’im!” 


CHAPTEE XIII 

NEBO^S CUNNING 


Staktled by the words of the negress, Tay- 
lor leaped to his feet and looked through the 
open doorway. Not far away, plainly ap- 
proaching the cabin, were three men, two of 
whom were clad in the Confederate uniform, 
as the woman had said. 

The sight of his foes instantly caused Tay- 
lor to turn and start toward the rear of the 
house. Flight from the place would in- 
stantly be discovered, as he was well aware, 
but to remain and meet the three men was 
not to be thought of. In his excitement the 
young soldier was eager merely to avoid be- 
ing discovered where he then was. The fu- 
ture must be met as circumstances might de- 
mand. 

Before he crossed the room, however, the 
black woman quickly seizing him by the 
shoulder, excitedly whispered, “Don’ do dat. 
In yere is de place f oh yo ’ ! ” 

163 


164 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


Lifting the trapdoor in the floor ehe thrust 
Taylor into the place from which she had 
taken the bacon that she had prepared for his 
breakfast. In a brief time the young soldier 
crowded himself into the narrow space, and 
the door above him was closed just as the men 
entered the hut. 

For an instant Taylor crouched trem- 
blingly in his hiding place, fearful that he 
had been seen ; but when the three men came 
into the room he was soon aware that his 
presence was unknown to the visitors. He 
could hear what was said and was listening 
intently. 

‘ ‘ Good mornin’, Aunt Dinah, ’ ^ said the man 
whom the negroes had called ‘ ‘ Mas ’ Tom. ’ ^ 
Moanin’, Mas^ Tom,” responded the 
black woman quietly. 

‘‘Haven’t seen any prowlin’ Yanks this 
mornin’, have you. Aunt Dinah?” 

“Wha’ fob any dem Yanks come yere?” 
she demanded sharply. 

“I don’t know,” laughed Tom. “Some 
have got away from the camp and the whole 
country is on the lookout for them.” 



In a brief time the young soldier crowded himself into 
THE NARROW SPACE. — Page 164. 









1 



NEBO^S CUNNING 


165 


‘^Wha’ foh yo’-all let ’em get away, suhT’ 
didn’t let them. They helped them- 
selves. They’ll be found, though; they al- 
ways are. My friends and I are looking 
about the plantation just to make sure there 
aren’t any hidin’ hereabout. I want to pro- 
tect my people. Some of the Yanks have 
cloven feet and sharp ears. If they come 
yere they might take you right up the chim- 
ney with ’em.” 

‘‘Ah reck’n de Yanks ’d have er right 
sma’t load ter carry if dey tried ter take 
me,” sniffed Dinah. 

“I reckon any one ’d have his hands full,” 
laughed the young man. ‘ ‘ Now, Aunt Dinah, 
have you seen any Yanks about our place 
yere?” 

“Dis mo’nin’?” 

“Yes, or any time.” 

“Does dey hab cloven feet?” 

“Usually; but you-all can’t be sure, be- 
cause their shoes might hide ’em.” 

“Ah reck’n Ah ain’t seen no Yanks dis yere 
day. ’Pears lak Ah done see some ’nodder 
day. Mas’ Tom.” 


166 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


‘‘When was that!^^ 

“Ah caint disremembah. Tears lak hit 
was las’ week.” 

“Where did you see them? What were 
they doing?” 

“Dey was runnin’, suh. Eunnin’ from de 
dawgs. ’ ’ 

“Did they stop yere?” 

“ ’Deed dey didn’t,” sniffed Aunt Dinah. 
“Wha’ fob dey stop yere w’en Ah had de 
rollin’pin in m’ ban’s?” 

“You say you haven’t seen any strange 
men this mornin’?” demanded Tom some- 
what impatiently. 

“No, suh. Is yo’ heah enny, ’Eastus?” 
Dinah demanded of her husband, who had 
been silent throughout the interview. 

“No, suh. No, suh,” mumbled the negro. 
“ ’Pears lak Ah don’ see nothin’ no mo’. 
Not eben er hoecake,” he added disconso- 
lately. 

“Where’s Nebo?” inquired the young man 
suddenly, as he apparently for the first time 
became aware that Aunt Dinah’s son was not 
in the cabin. 

“Dat Nebo he’s mos’ wuffless es white 


NEBO^S CUNNING 


167 


trash/’ said the black woman in apparent 
scorn. ^‘Caint depen’ on him no mo’, Mas’ 
Tom.” 

^‘Why notr’ 

‘^He’s de mos’ obsiqnies nigger on de 
place. Jes’ now he’s so full oh de notion 
what he got dat Mas’ Tom is ’pendin’ on him 
ter pint de way fer de white fo’ks what Mas’ 
Tom’s done spectin’, dat he caint do er ’nod- 
der thing. His po’ pap’s all doubled hup wif 
de misery. ’Eastus nebber was so no count 
as he’s been since dis yere las’ ’tack wha’s 
took him. Las’ night Ah had ter get de rab- 
bit’s foot an’ de conjure-weed — ” 

‘‘Yes. Yes, Aunt Dinah. That’s all 
right. But where is Nebo now?” 

“Ah don’ tole yo’. Mas’ Tom, hit’s shore 
strange ’bout dat Nebo Macedonia Petrol ’um. 
He’s de mos’ no- ’count nigger in all de pahts 
yere ’bout. Wha’ wif his new coon dawg — ” 
‘ ‘ But where is he now ? ’ ’ 

“Ah dunno. Mas’ Tom. Ah clar ter good- 
ness ef yo’-all fin’ him Ah wish yo’d gib him 
er whippin’ or set de dawgs on ’im er do 
so’ffin wha ’ll mak dat sma’t Ellick des sta’t 
his lazy bones ter de woodpile. He des leab 


168 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


his po^ ma^ ter cut de wood an^ wait on ^Ras- 
tus an’ try ter mak er hoecake w’en der des 
aint er speck er co’n meal ter be had, Mas’ 
Tom. Howcome ’spectable woman lak me 
ter hab sech a good-f o ’-nothing wuffless f o ’ a 
son beats me. ’Pears lak he mos’ resemble- 
ful ob ’Rastus — ” 

‘^Have you seen any strangers this morn- 
in’?” interrupted the young man sharply. 

‘‘No, suh. Ah ain’ seen no w’ite folks.” 

“Sure?” 

“Das de truf. Mas’ Tom.” Aunt Dinah 
spoke soberly now, realizing that her young 
master’s growing impatience was no longer 
to be ignored. 

“Have you seen any, ’Rastus?” Tom de- 
manded of the old colored man. 

“Ah ain’ been outen de do’ dis mawnin’.” 

“No one has come yere?” 

“Ah ain’ seen er soul. Mas’ Tom. Wha’ 
kin’ er man was hit. Mas’ Tom, wha’ yo’-all 
was spectin’ foh ter fin’?” 

“Anybody. We’ll take a look around the 
cabins, ’ ’ said Tom to his companions. In ap- 
parent indifference Aunt Dinah continued in 


NEBO^S CUNNING 


169 


her tasks in the room, barely glancing at the 
three men, who she was aware were peering 
about them almost as if they expected to find 
some place of concealment in the room itself. 
’Rastus was groaning with a fresh attack of 
his ^‘misery’’ and Nebo was nowhere to be 
seen. 

Apparently satisfied that no Yankee was 
hidden in the cabin, the three men speedily 
departed, the young white man first bidding 
Aunt Dinah to send her son to the ‘‘big 
house as soon as he returned. 

The indifference of ’Rastus and the tasks 
of his wife were speedily forgotten at the de- 
parture of the men as they both with shining 
eyes watched the trio as they went among the 
cabins. Once Aunt Dinah lifted the trap- 
door in the floor a few inches and leaning low, 
whispered, “Yo’ is all right. Ah ’ll let yo’ 
know ef de sojers come back ergain.” The 
door was instantly restored to its place be- 
fore Taylor could reply. 

A half hour afterward Tom and his com- 
panions returned. For a moment they stood 
outside the cabin, talking earnestly together. 


170 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


but in such low tones that even Aunt Dinah 
with all her efforts was not able to hear what 
was said. 

Apparently one of the soldiers had his way, 
for all three men turned and started across 
the cornfield, walking toward the creek in the 
very direction of the place where Taylor had 
left his exhausted companion. The sight of 
the departing men at once aroused a keen 
excitement in the mind of Aunt Dinah. 
Bushing to the trapdoor she lifted it and 
called sharply to Taylor; “Dey^s gone ter 
de creek. 

Cramped in his narrow quarters, Taylor 
was obliged to grasp the extended hand of 
the negress before he could regain a place 
on the floor. The woman’s words had been 
sufficiently disturbing to cause him to dart to 
the door. Peering cautiously from his shel- 
ter, Taylor could see the men as they appar- 
ently were moving toward the one place 
which above all others he was eager for them 
to avoid. 

‘ ‘ They are going straight to the boat ! ” he 
said savagely. 

‘^Wha’ boat?” 


NEBO^S CUNNING 171 

‘^The punt. My friend is in it. It’s un- 
der the bushes on the bank.” 

^‘Whar’s dat Nebo?” said Aunt Dinah, at 
once aroused by Taylor’s words. ^^He’s so 
full er his notion er makin’ er preacher outen 
hisself he des wuffless! Shoutin’ an’ rollin’ 
his eyes ! Seem lak he’s too full er his words 
ter git ennything outen his mouf. Dey’s no 
trubble in puttin’ things inter hit. He’s de 
mos’ pow’fulest eater in de land! Here yo’ 
Nebo!” she called as she stepped hastily to 
the back door. ‘^Come yere outen dat! Yo’ 
heah mef Come yere!” 

Almost as if he had risen from the ground, 
Nebo suddenly appeared at the door. ‘‘Yo’- 
all see Mas’ Tom an’ his sojer men?” de- 
manded the black woman. ‘‘Well, hit’s time 
fob yo’-all ter git erwake. Yo’ heah me? 
Yo’ follow wif Mas’ Tom an’ yo’ git ’im ter 
go somewhar else. Whar is de boat?” she 
suddenly demanded as she turned to Taylor. 

“It’s just at the right of those three big 
cypress trees. It’s hidden under the bushes 
that grow out over the water. I don’t be- 
lieve the men can find it unless Erwin does 
something to attract their attention. He 


172 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 

didn’t know when I left him there. He was 
asleep.” 

Taylor was talking rapidly in his excite- 
ment, but the woman did not wait for him to 
say more. Turning to her son she said — 
‘‘Here, now, yo’ Nebo! He boat’s d’rec’ly 
under de hushes near de cypress trees. Yo’ 
go an’ yo’ steer Mas’ Tom ’way from dat er 
place. Yo’ skeer him wif snakes or yo’ be- 
gin to preach an’ holler. Min’! Yo’ git 
Mas’ Tom ’way from dat place or hit’ll be 
de mos’ luxuriatinous ’sperience wha’ eber 
come to a no- ’count nigger ! ” 

Nebo’s air of indifference at once departed 
and abruptly leaving the house he started 
swiftly across the cornfield in pursuit of the 
departing men. His mother and father as 
well as Taylor were watching the young ne- 
gro now. Taylor ’s quiet bearing did not con- 
ceal his alarm. He was fearful that some 
word must have been given the men of the 
presence of Erwin. They were walking 
swiftly in the direction of the cypress trees. 
To the excited young soldier tlie only ex- 
planation of their actions was tr be >,found 
in the knowledge they must have sojnehC|W re- 


NEBO^S CUNNING 173 

ceived that a Yankee prisoner was in hiding 
near the bank of the shallow stream. 

In a brief time the young negro overtook 
the men, who stopped as he approached. 
After a few hasty words, however, they re- 
sumed their way and Nebo accompanied 
them. 

‘^Dere, now. Don’ yo’ he ’feared!” said 
Dinah consolingly to Taylor. 

‘‘Whynotr’ 

‘‘Bekase dey ain’ no sech pussun on dis 
yere plantation what caint make Mas’ Tom 
b’lieve dere ain’ no white man in de punt. 
Dat Nebo — he’s de mos’ persuadenest 
preacher in de Ian’ ! He is de mos’ eloquent- 
est dispenseres oh de bes ’ words yo ’-all ebber 
beer. Lan’I W’en he’s got der powah yo’ 
cain ’ear him mos’ hup ter de big house. 
Yaas, sub, dat Nebo — he’s de one what cain 
mak Mas’ Tom b’lieve dat de fattes’ chicken 
in de coop has des ’mitted suincide. Da’s 
so! Don’ yo’-all he skairt no mo’ ! Nebo ’ll 
’ten’ ter Mas’ Tom an’ his friends.” 

Taylor ’^as far from being convinced that 
the vocal towers of Nebo would prevail upon 
‘‘Mf s’ Tom,” or avail to protect Erwin. In 


174 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


a keen state of anxiety he still watched the 
men until they were hidden from sight by the 
bushes on the distant bank of the stream. 
Apparently, too, they had gone to the very 
place where he himself had clambered from 
the mud to the dryer shore. His footprints 
could still be seen in the mud, Taylor was 
convinced. The sight of them would lead to 
further investigation and perhaps to the dis- 
covery of his friend whom he had left asleep 
in the punt beneath the bushes. 

And yet it was worse than useless for him 
to go to Erwin ^s aid. To expose himself 
would be but to add to his friend’s peril. 
Striving to restrain himself, Taylor waited, 
peering from the doorway at the place where 
the men had disappeared. Every moment he 
expected to see the men reappear with Erwin 
helpless in their midst. Dinah’s confidence 
in the craftiness of Nebo failed to allay Tay- 
lor’s fears. Even his own peril was forgot- 
ten as he watched and waited. 

How long a time had elapsed when Taylor 
suddenly was recalled to his own position he 
never knew. It might have been an hour or 
three might have passed so far as his own 


NEBO^S CUNNING 


175 


realization was concerned. Through the 
back doorway of the cabin Nebo suddenly en- 
tered, and as the young negro spoke, every 
one in the room turned sharply to him. 

^^Did they find himT’ demanded Taylor 
eagerly. 

‘‘Yo’ see hit’s dis way — ” began Nebo. 

^‘Did they find him?” interrupted Taylor 
harshly. 

‘‘Das what Ah’m ’splainin’ to yo’-all,” be- 
gan Nebo. “Hit’s lak dis yere — ” 

Nebo’s explanation was again interrupted, 
as his mother, manifestly in terror, now sud- 
denly darted to the rear of the cabin. 


CHAPTEE XIV 


AN IMPKOVISED PEST-HOUSE 

When Taylor, startled by tbe unexpected 
action of Aunt Dinah, glanced hastily at the 
door he, too, was as alarmed as she. Stand- 
ing in the doorway was the young white man 
whom she had called ^‘Mas’ Tom.” How he 
had come there without being discovered or 
what he had in mind to do were both matters 
of conjecture. At all events he was entering 
the cabin now and Taylor instantly realized 
that any attempt to flee from the place was 
worse than useless. 

^‘You seem to have visitors. Aunt Dinah,” 
said the young man as he entered the room. 

‘‘Yaas, Mas’ Tom. Yaas, suh. Dat’s so. 
Dis yere white trash done come ter de do ’ er 
my house sho’s yo’ bohn. Whaffor he come, 
Ah dunno.” 

Can’t you send him away?” 

‘‘Da’s jes’ wha’ foh Ah gwine foh ter sen’ 
ter de big house.” 


176 


AN IMPROVISED PEST-HOUSE 177 


‘‘Yon want to be rid of him, do youT’ 

“Ah sholy does, Mas’ Tom.” 

“And he won’t go?” 

“No, snh. He jes’ — ” 

“Can’t ’Eastus and Nebo drive him 
away?” 

“Dat ’Eastns, he’s took wif de misery. 
He’s done been mo’nin’ right sma’t all de 
time. Nebo,” added the black woman, snif- 
fing in apparent indignation, “he’s des no 
’count since he’s done been er preachin’.” 

“I’ll help you rid yourself of him,” 
laughed the young white man as he glanced 
at Taylor. 

“Don’ yo’-all bother yo’self wif sich trash. 
Mas’ Tom. Ah ’ll ’ten’ ter him when Ah gets 
ready. ’ ’ 

“Where did you come from?” demanded 
the man, suddenly turning to Taylor. 

“Most any whar,” drawled Taylor striving 
to appear indifferent. 

“Been in the army?” 

“Not very far away from it, suh.” 

“Whose army?” 

The question was almost impossible for 
Taylor to answer. So many weeks had 


178 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


passed since his capture that he knew but lit- 
^ tie of the whereabouts of the contending 
forces. The few reports that had filtered 
through the lines into the prisons he knew 
were grossly exaggerated. They had chiefly 
been rumors of overwhelming defeats for his 
fellow soldiers, but of the activities or of the 
real positions or moves of the armies them- 
selves not a reliable word had been received. 
The young soldier was in almost complete ig- 
norance of the present conditions of the great 
struggle. 

‘‘I canT say as how I was exactly in the 
army,’’ drawled Taylor. ‘‘What I mean, 
suh, was that I wasn’t very far away.” 

“A camp follower? A hanger-on?” 

“Mos’ly, suh,” admitted Taylor humbly. 

“Ever been in the Yankee camp?” 

“Yo’ mean Camp So’ghum?” 

“Yes. Ever been there?” 

“I’ve seen it, suh.” 

“Never been inside?” 

“Not very recently, suh.” 

“iWhat are you doing here?” 

“Jes’ goin’ to leave.” 

“Where you going?” 


'AN IMPROVISED PE ST -ROUSE 179 


‘‘I reckon I’ll be goin’ to Columbia. It 
isn’t mo’ than seven miles to the town, is 
it?” Taylor arose as if he was about to de- 
part. His heart was beating rapidly in his 
excitement, but he was doing his utmost to 
appear calm in his assumed character of a 
poor white. His general appearance, his torn 
clothing, his woe-begone face might possibly 
aid him in his attempt to pass as one of the 
worthless class, and he was doing his utmost 
to increase the effect by his drawling tones 
and his general attitude of indifference. 
What the young white man really thought of 
him had not been indicated. 

‘Ht’s too far away for you to try to make 
it now.” 

reckon I mought try,” suggested Tay- 
lor, still moving toward the front door. 

‘‘You must come with me now.” 

“I reckon I don’ need any help.” Taylor 
was keenly observing the man before him. 
He was aware that he could not rely upon 
any assistance from the negroes in a struggle 
with ‘ ‘ Mas ’ Tom. ’ ’ Help him in other ways 
they might but not in an effort to overcome 
their young master. Then, too, the man 


180 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


might be armed, while Taylor was defense- 
less. Besides, he was weak from the lack of 
sleep and the struggles of the preceding 
night. 

‘‘You must come with me,’^ repeated the 
young man. 

‘ ‘ Where ? ^ ’ 

“To the ‘big house 

“What for! I donT want anything at the 
house.” 

“You ask as many questions as if you were 
a Yankee. Come on.” 

There was no escape and shrugging his 
shoulders Taylor turned to do as he was bid- 
den. When he glanced at Aunt Dinah she ap- 
peared to be indifferent to his troubles and 
already apparently was busy in her house- 
hold duties. As for the two black men, in her 
own language they were both “wuffless” and 
were not to be relied upon for help. 

Silently Taylor followed his new leader as 
the latter turned into the lane that led to the 
big house. Not a word was spoken by either 
and in a brief time they mounted the steps 
of the old mansion. A wide veranda ex- 
tended about three sides of the great square 


AN IMPROVISED PE ST -BOV 8E 181 


house and high columns upheld the roof of 
the imposing porches. At a distance the 
building was quite impressive, but a nearer 
inspection revealed the dilapidated condition 
of the rambling frame structure. 

As Taylor and his companion mounted the 
steps of the veranda they were met by a 
young girl whom Taylor at once concluded 
was a sister of his captor — for such he be- 
lieved ‘‘Mas’ Tom” to be. 

The girl’s eyes betrayed her curiosity con- 
cerning her brother’s companion and she 
lightly inquired, “Who’s your friend, Tom I” 

“Where’s the lieutenant, sis?” asked Tom, 
ignoring her question. 

“I reckon he’s in the dining-room. He 
was there a moment ago. It’s mostly ‘room’ 
and little ‘dining,’ though,” she added, her 
eyes flashing as she spoke. 

Tom at once conducted Taylor to the room 
where his friend was found seated before 
the table at a repast of corn bread and bacon. 

“Who’s that?” demanded the lieutenant, 
as he glanced quickly at Taylor. 

“You tell me that and then I’ll tell you,” 
responded Tom. “I’m not certain who he 


182 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


is. I found him at Aunt Dinah ^s. I thought 
I’d take another turn among the ^quarters’ 
after I left you and Ben. Where is Ben 
now?” 

Taylor was confident that Ben was the 
other young soldier whom he had seen with 
Tom and the lieutenant at Aunt Dinah’s 
cabin. 

‘‘He’s down by the creek,” replied the 
lieutenant. “He thought he had found a 
trail and he wouldn’t leave it. I had had 
enough to last me till breakfast time, so I 
came back. Who’s your man, Tom?” 

“You find out. I don’t know. Dinah says 
he’s just po’ white trash and he says he’s 
been a camp follower. Perhaps you can find 
out more than I could. I decided to bring 
him up and let you see him for yourself. ’ ’ 

The young Confederate lieutenant at once 
turned sharply to Taylor and began to ques- 
tion him. To all his queries Taylor gave 
hesitating replies, striving to speak but little 
and when he did to use the drawling and 
clipped words such as he himself had heard 
from the ignorant hangers-on about the pris- 
ons. That he was successful in his efforts 


AN IMPROVISED PEST-HOUSE 183 

lie was not at all confident, for the lieuten- 
ant’s curiosity apparently was increasing. 

‘‘You say you have been to the camp of 
Yankee prisoners at Columbia the young 
officer asked sharply. 

“Yaas, suh.” 

“When?” 

“I reckon I was there a day or two since, 
suh.” 

“What were you doing there?” 

“Mos’ anything. The las’ thing I done, 
suh, was ter help bury a Yank. I reck’n no- 
body ’d do it ’ceptin’ me, suh.” 

“Do what?” 

“Bury th’ Yank, suh.” 

“Why not?” 

“We-uns is mos’ly afeard o’ the small- 
pox. ’ ’ 

‘ ‘ What ! ’ ’ exclaimed Tom. ‘ ‘ Had the man 
died of the smallpox?” 

“That was th’ repo’t.” 

‘ ‘ Take him away ! Don’t leave him here a 
minute longer ! ’ ’ ordered Tom. 

Taylor could see that the lieutenant, how- 
ever, was not so badly frightened as his 
friend had been by the alarming statement. 


184 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


Eising from his chair he said to Taylor, 
‘^Come with me.’’ Leading the way to the 
rear of the house, the lieutenant stopped in 
the open air beneath a huge tree and renewed 
his questionings. In Taylor’s garb and man- 
ner there was little to suspect, but the young 
officer still was not convinced. After a time 
he said, ‘‘You must stay here. I’ve a notion 
that you are not just what you are pretend- 
ing to he. We have had word of some of the 
Yankees taking French leave from the camp 
and we’re searching for them. You may be 
one of them for all I know. Tom ! ” he called 
suddenly, turning and shouting toward the 
house. “Tom I Comeyere!” 

In a moment Tom appeared, though he took 
pains not to approach very near the sus- 
pected prisoner and the lieutenant. “Tom, 
have you anybody on the plantation that ever 
had the smallpox?” 

“Yes. ’Eastus had it three or four years 
ago.” 

“Then put this man in some place where 
he can he kept to himself and have ’Eastus 
look after him. Can you depend on ’Eastus? 


AN IMPROVISED PEST-HOUSE 185 


It was in Ms cabin where yon found this fel- 
low, wasn’t itr’ 

^‘It was. But ’Eastus is true and Dinah is 
more trusty still.” 

‘‘I’d like to keep this fellow till Lieutenant 
Evans can see him. He’ll be yere right soon. 
I have my suspicions that this man is playing 
’possum. If he is, Evans will know, and if 
he isn’t, it won’t do any harm to hold him 
yere a bit.” 

“What about the smallpox, Joe?” 

“There won’t be anything to fear. We’ll 
keep him to himself, and ’Eastus has had it, 
you say?” 

“Yes, ’Eastus has had it,” answered 
Tom dubiously. “We don ’t want to take any 
chances, Joe. Don’t you reckon we’d better 
send him on?” 

“Not yet,” said the lieutenant promptly. 
“He may be less of a fool than he looks, 
Tom.” 

“Tha’s what my marm says,” suggested 
Taylor, in his most drawling manner. 

Both young men laughed at his words, but 
Tom at once led the way to a deserted cabin 


186 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


beyond the negroes’ quarters. The house 
was of logs and contained only one door. 
Boards had been nailed across the sole win- 
dow to keep out the rain. Taylor took in all 
the details of the place by one quick glance 
and then resumed his former attitude of in- 
ditference. 

In a brief time ’Eastus was summoned, the 
door of the cabin was securely nailed fast 
and the negro was left in charge of the pris- 
oner. 

^‘Now, ’Eastus, if you let that fellow get 
away,” called Tom warningly, as he and his 
friend departed, you ’ll be held responsible. 
He’s coming down with the smallpox. If he 
gets loose you know what will happen.” 

‘‘Yaas, suh. Yaas, suh! Ah sholy does. 
Mas’ Tom. Dinah say he’s only white trash. 
iWhaifo’ yo’ keep ’im. Mas’ Tom?” 

‘^We shan’t keep him very long. Likely 
he won’t be yere more than three or four 
hours, ’Eastus. You must look out for him. 
If he tries to get out you call me. ’ ’ 

‘‘Ya-a-s, suh,” said ’Eastus meekly, as the 
two young men departed. 

Taylor waited impatiently until he was sat- 


AN improvised PEST-HOUSE 187 


isfied that the two young men were gone be- 
fore he inspected his place of confinement. 
His eyes were somewhat accustomed to the 
darkness now and he could see that the little 
building was strong. Escape by the closed 
window was impossible — it was securely 
nailed. The door, too, was barred and to 
break through it was not to he thought of un- 
less ’Eastus would open it. The sole means 
of escape was by the chimney, but as Taylor 
peered up it he was by no means convinced 
that in his weakened condition he would be 
able to make the ascent. 

Approaching the door, he called softly at 
first and then in louder tones to ^Eastus, 

ArenT you going to open the door for meT’ 

‘^Caint do hit nohow, responded the ne- 
gro. ‘‘Dey can see from de big house. 

Here was a complication Taylor had not 
thought of and for a moment he was silent. 

’Eastus,^^ he called at last. 

‘^Yaas, suh.’’ 

‘^Did Nebo find my friend down by the 
creek r’ 

^^No, suh. Nebo foun’ de punt an’ de pole 
sho’ ’nough, but dey wasn’t no man dere. 
Dey sho’ly wasn’t.” 


CHAPTER XV 


THE WOKD OH THE BANK 

The statement of ’Rastus was sufficient of 
itself to increase the excitement under which 
Taylor already was laboring. He was con- 
vinced somehow that the negro had spoken 
truly and that Erwin had not been found in 
the punt. Whether Erwin had awakened and 
finding himself deserted and alone had him- 
self gone ashore, or whether he had discov- 
ered the approach of the three men and had 
found some other place of hiding, Taylor had 
no means of knowing. In either case, Erwin, 
ignorant of the events which had occurred 
since Taylor had left the boat and, unaware, 
as he must he, of the dangers to be met in 
the vicinity, was in the midst of many perils. 
Then, too, Erwin’s exhaustion was such that 
his friend was aware that it would be im- 
possible for him to defend himself in case of 
attack or to proceed far from the place where 
the punt had been concealed. 

188 


THE WORD ON THE BANK 189 


It was now noontime. Taylor’s anxiety 
was so great that he was becoming almost 
desperate. In case Lieutenant Evans should 
come, as Tom’s friend had predicted, the 
young officer would at once recognize him, 
Taylor well knew. No subterfuge, not even 
the report of smallpox, would deter him from 
doing his duty. The kindness he had shown 
the young prisoners — so marked in its con- 
trast with their other experiences, would not 
avail now. Lieutenant Evans would compel 
him and Erwin also, if the latter should be 
found, to return at once to the prison camp. 

But how was release from the hut in which 
he was confined to be obtained? This was 
his first problem,, as Taylor well knew. Help 
from the watching ’Eastus was not to be ex- 
pected. To'Sreak down the door or remove 
the boards from the window was also im- 
possible. 

In his desperation Taylor looked again at 
the fireplace. It was loosely built of stones 
and as the young prisoner stooped and 
peered up the flue, he could see that it was 
not difficult to climb to the roof because the 
stones overlapped and had been loosely laid. 


190 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


Manifestly the men who had ordered him 
there had not been planning to place him in 
close confinement or they would not have se- 
lected such a hut for his prison. Doubtless, 
Taylor thought, his words concerning small- 
pox had alarmed them to a degree and they 
had sent him where he was merely to hold 
him till the arrival of Lieutenant Evans, who 
would know best what ought to be done in the 
circumstances. 

To meet the lieutenant, however, was just 
what Taylor was most eager to avoid. In 
his determination he at once began to climb 
the chimney. He was careful to avoid all 
noise as he grasped the projecting flat stones 
and slowly mounted. His greatest difficulty 
came when he arrived at the low top of the 
chimney, which was of brick and so smooth 
that there were no projecting points to be 
grasped. 

However, by bracing his feet he managed 
at last to secure a grasp on the top and then 
cautiously drew himself upward. For a mo- 
ment he peered at the mansion in the dis- 
tance. Apparently no one was within sight. 
Hesitating no longer, he quickly climbed to 


THE WORD ON THE BANK 191 


the top, then slid to the roof and withdrawing 
toward the rear dropped to the ground which 
was not more than eight feet below him. 

Not even stopping to glance at the big 
house, Taylor at once started toward the 
quarters of the negroes. He was in the open 
now and exposed to the sight of anyone near. 
Boldness, however, had favored him before, 
and trusting again in its power, he walked 
rapidly in the direction of Aunt Dinah 
cabin. Occasionally he glanced behind him, 
prepared to run if any pursuers were seen. 
Once he met a black woman who gazed curi- 
ously at him, but did not speak. A silence 
rested over the region that was almost as ter- 
rifying as the shouts or shots which Taylor 
half expected to hear. 

He was not molested, however, and soon 
gained the rear of Aunt Dinah ^s humble 
abode. As he opened the door he found no 
one within. The silence extended even to the 
cabin. For a moment Taylor looked about 
him, hesitating what next to do. It was not 
likely that Tom and his companions would 
soon return to the creek where Erwin and the 
punt had been left. Not a word had either 


192 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


of the white men spoken concerning Erwin. 
Taylor was hopeful that his friend had not 
been found. The words of ’Eastus were dis- 
quieting, however, and in his anxiety Taylor 
was determined to learn whether or not the 
negro had spoken truly. 

Advancing to the front door of the hut, he 
peered at the long cornfield before him. If 
he were only safely across that he would 
know more concerning the fate of his friend. 
Apparently no one was in the field. The 
very silence was almost an invitation. Far 
away was the mansion hidden by trees. The 
prospect was tempting and Taylor decided 
to try to return to the bushes under which 
his recent comrade had been left. 

Before he departed from the house Taylor 
lifted the trapdoor which concealed the store- 
house of Aunt Dinah. It was evident that 
supplies were scant but equally evident that 
the big colored woman had in some way made 
provision for the future. Her private cel- 
lar contained food, as Taylor had become 
aware when she had concealed him in the 
place. 

A part of a side of bacon and some corn 


THE WORD ON THE BANK 193 


bread were taken by the young soldier before 
he restored the door to its place. Aunt Di- 
nah would not begrudge the ^‘offering,’’ he 
assured himself, and the needs of his friend 
as well as his own were too great to be 
neglected. 

Placing the food inside his shirt-front, Tay- 
lor at once departed from the hut. Walking 
briskly across the open part of the field, he 
stopped at the first heap of cornstalks to ob- 
serve whether or not he had been seen. A 
flock of buzzards on the high branches of a 
dead cypress tree near the creek was the 
only sight of living objects he was able to 
obtain. 

Assured that thus far he had not been ob- 
served, Taylor sought the nearest refuge in 
the field and again stopped and peered all 
about him. Still the buzzards were the sole 
animate objects to be seen. 

Eepeatedly darting from one hiding place 
to another, Taylor kept on his way until at 
last he arrived at the place he was seeking. 
Once within the shelter of the brush he knelt 
upon the ground and peered between the 
bushes. He could see all about the planta- 


194 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


tion. Even the mansion in the distance was 
more easily seen here than from the hut of 
Aunt Dinah. 

Suddenly five men came down the steps of 
the big house and started toward the deserted 
hut in which Taylor had been ‘‘guarded’’ by 
’Eastus. So startled was Taylor by the sight 
that for the moment even the thought of his 
friend was ignored. Almost fascinated, he 
watched the five men. They were too far 
away for him to distinguish anyone, but to 
his excited imagination one of them appeared 
to be like the form of Lieutenant Evans. An- 
other one, too, somehow reminded him of 
Uncle Sam, but as Taylor realized how im- 
possible the presence in the vicinity, espe- 
cially in such company, of Samuel was, he 
did not give the matter any serious thought 
at that time. 

Plainly the men were going to the deserted 
hut. Taylor was unable to see ’Eastus any- 
where near the little building. Doubtless the 
old negro would have an abundance of excite- 
ment soon, Taylor thought grimly. How- 
ever, trouble was not wanting in the young 
soldier’s vicinity, and at the recollection he 


THE WORD ON THE BANK 195 


turned hastily into the bushes where the punt 
was hidden. 

The little boat apparently was just as he 
had left it. Even the long pole had not been 
touched. But Erwin was not there. ^Eastus 
had spoken truly when he had given Neho’s 
report. 

‘‘Erwin! Erwin!’’ Taylor called in a low 
voice, hoping that his friend was concealed 
somewhere not far away. He waited a mo- 
ment and then repeated his hail, not daring 
to call loudly. Still the silence was unbroken. 
Erwin apparently was gone. 

Hurriedly Taylor examined the muddy bot- 
tom as well as the ground on the bank for 
traces of footprints. There were no signs 
to be found that his friend had departed by 
the bank. The mystery of it all was baffling 
and doubly tantalizing now in the plight 
of Taylor. Darting back to the shore, 
he once more concealed himself behind a tree 
and looked toward the hut from which he had 
climbed. Even the five men could not now be 
seen. The sun was shining, but the desola- 
tion of the scene was not relieved. Some- 
thing like a heavy pall seemed to rest over 


196 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


the entire region. Not a place on the planta- 
tion had been molested, but in spite of its 
security the influence of the prison camp and 
the things for which it stood seemed to cast 
a spell on field and house and men. Fear, 
calamity, desolation — these were in the very 
air and trembling people absorbed them in 
their breath. 

Taylor remained a half-hour in his place of 
observation and then returned to the punt. 
His escape, he was aware, might increase the 
vigilance of the party with Tom. Quite 
likely it would. ’Eastus, however, might be 
suspected of having aided the prisoner he 
was supposed to guard and in that event the 
negroes troubles might he multiplied. It 
was too bad, Taylor acknowledged somewhat 
woefully, but it still was better so than to 
have remained in the cabin until he was rec- 
ognized and all hope was abandoned forever. 

Taylor seized the pole and pushed the punt 
into the stream. He was not planning to go 
far. He would watch for Erwin’s return and 
be ready to welcome him. Somehow Taylor 
had persuaded himself that his friend had 
gone to some cabin in the vicinity and would 


TEE WORD ON THE BANK 197 


soon come back. His own experiences con- 
firmed him in the belief which was strength- 
ened by the words spoken by the lieutenant 
whom Tom had called Joe. No reference 
had been made to Erwin. Taylor assured 
himself that such would not have been the 
case if his friend had been found by the 
searching party. 

The punt was poled across the muddy 
creek, and, almost on the opposite shore, was 
once more thrust under the thick bushes that 
there also overhung the bank. Once ef- 
fectively concealed by the branches, he ar- 
ranged several small open places through 
which he himself could peer without fear of 
discovery. He could hear sounds which any 
near-by parties might make, and, in a 
measure at least, Taylor was assured .not 
only that he was quite effectively concealed, 
but also that he would be able to discover the 
approach of Erwin. He was planning to re- 
main until dark and if his friend should not 
appear by that time, then Taylor would not 
remain longer but he would try to find some 
measures for a search for his missing com- 
panion, or so he assured himself. 


198 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


Seating himself in the boat, Taylor first ate 
a small piece of the corn bread which he had 
‘‘borrowed’’ from Aunt Dinah. His hunger 
had returned with increased force now and he 
looked longingly at the part that remained. 
Certain of Erwin’s needs as well as being 
fully aware of the uncertainty as to when 
other supplies might be had, he resolutely 
restrained his impulse and restored the re- 
maining food to its place. He might be 
compelled to fiee suddenly and food was alto- 
gether too precious to be lost in the exi- 
gencies of a sudden flight. 

Utterly wearied, Taylor soon was lying on 
the bottom of the punt, assuring himself that 
he could hear as well in that position as in 
any other if any men came to the creek. It 
was not long, however, before the young sol- 
dier was asleep, not even his anxiety for him- 
self or his fears for Erwin availing to keep 
him longer awake. 

Dusk had settled over the land when Tay- 
lor awoke. He was shivering in the cold. At 
first, it was impossible for him to realize 
where he was. He roused himself as the 


THE WORD ON THE BANK 199 


sound of voices of men nearby was heard. 
In a moment his own plight was recalled and 
he was excitedly listening to the words he 
overheard. 

^‘Yes, I’m a good friend,” some one was 
saying. ^^I missed ’em both on the way. 
You say they were both here*?” 

‘‘Yaas, suh.” 

‘‘Did you see them both!” 

“Ah reck’n Ah sholy did.” 

“Were they here when you saw them!” 

“One was yere.” 

“Where was the other one!” 

“He done stop a bit at we-all’s cabin, suh.” 

“Yes. Yes. That was Taylor. How did 
he get away from the house when your father 
was on guard!” 

“Ah caint ’xplain dat, suh. He des nach- 
ully lef ’.” 

“What was the one you saw here at the 
creek doing!” 

“Nuffin, suh. He des look lak he was mo s’ 
done foh. He sho’ly was de mos’ tremblein- 
list man what Ah — ” 

Taylor was unable to hear the conclusion 


200 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


of the sentence, but he was fully awake now. 
He had recognized the yoice of one of the 
men as that of Uncle Sam and beyond ques- 
tion his companion was Aunt Dinah’s son, 
Nebo. 


CHAPTER XVI 


A SEARCH 

Hesitating no longer, Taylor called softly 
from his hiding place, Uncle Sami Uncle 
Sam! Wait a minute and 1^11 be with you.’^ 

‘‘Wha-a-a’ dat?” stammered Nebo, his 
teeth chattering in his terror. Samuel, how- 
ever, even if he was startled by the unex- 
pected hail, did not betray his alarm, but re- 
mained on the bank, peering across the little 
stream whence the voice of the unseen man 
who had hailed him was heard. 

Seizing his pole, Taylor pushed the punt 
from beneath the bushes. As he was seen by 
the negro and his companion, the former 
without waiting for further information 
turned and fled across the cornfield in the di- 
rection of the cabins of the slaves. Samuel, 
however, apparently unmoved, awaited the 
approach of the boat and when Taylor 
landed he said : 


201 


202 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


‘ ‘ I knew it was yon. ’ ’ 

‘^Did yon? Wkat are yon doing here, 
Uncle Sam?^’ 

‘^Looking for yon.’^ 

‘‘YonVe fonnd me.” 

‘‘Yes, I knew I wonld.” 

“How did yon get ont of the camp?” 

“I came with Lientenant Evans.” 

“Is he here now?” 

“Yes.” 

“Where?” 

“I left him at the big honse back there be- 
hind the trees.” 

“WTiat is he doing here?” 

“Looking for yon. Men have been sent 
from the camp till they have a circle all 
aronnd it. They’re sconring the conntry. 
Yon see, some others got away besides yon 
and Erwin. ’ ’ 

“Why did the lientenant bring yon?” 

“He thonght I’d help find yon and Erwin.” 

“What made him think yon wonld?” 

“He knew I was down on Erwin.” 

“Well, yon’ve fonnd me anyway.” 

“Yes.” 

“WTiat are yon going to do next?” 


A SEARCH 


203 


going with you.’’ 

Where?” 

‘^Wherever you go?” 

‘^You mean you want to get to our lines?” 
course. What did you think I 
meant?” 

didn’t know but you were going to take 
me to the lieutenant. ’ ’ 

^ ‘ He ’ll never see me again. ’ ’ 

‘ ‘ But he thinks he will. ’ ’ 

^‘That’s his own lookout. I fooled him 
good. He thought I was ready to go back 
on our men. I let him think so just as long 
as he wanted. I got into his good graces and 
now I’ve got more than I ever thought I’d 
have. He asked me if I’d like to go with 
him and if I’d help find the men that got 
away. ’ ’ 

^^And you told him you would?” 

did,” Samuel replied as simply as if he 
had no conception of what his words implied. 
Indeed, to his friend the knowledge of Uncle 
Sam’s treachery was not surprising — it was 
so thoroughly in keeping with all that Taylor 
had known of him since they were small hoys. 
Uncle Sam’s propensity to take what did not 


204 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


belong to him was understood by all his ac- 
quaintances and his word no one would trust. 
In the little village in which the boys dwelt 
the prevailing impression was that Samuel 
was not altogether responsible for his deeds. 
The kind-hearted country people referred to 
him as one who was slightly ‘‘lacking in his 
upper story, ’ ^ by which term some described 
the lad who was called by others “half-wit- 
ted^’ or a fool. Shrewd in certain directions 
the boy certainly was, although in school he 
had not been able to do what others of his 
own age had done. Even now Taylor re- 
called the sight of Uncle Sam, a tall, awk- 
ward, ungainly boy of fourteen standing in a 
row with six or eight little fellows not more 
than half his age, trying vainly to read the 
lesson that had been assigned. Samuel him- 
self had at last rebelled and refused longer 
to attend school to be the sport of boys so 
much younger than he was. The two chief 
causes of distrust on the part of others were 
Samuel’s apparent failure to understand the 
difference between truth and falsehood, and 
his vindictiveness. 

Taylor was thinking of these things while 


A SEARCH 205 

Samuel was speaking. Had lie told the truth? 
Could he be trusted? 

‘^Where’s Erwin? inquired Samuel. 

‘ ‘ I don ^t know. Do you ? Have you heard 
anything about him?^’ 

^‘Have I heard? No. I haven ^t heard 
anything. Isn^t he with you?^’ 

‘‘Where is he?^’ 

“I wish I knew.’’ 

“ Where ’d you lose him?” 

“I haven’t seen him since last night.” 
“Probably the rebs have got him again,” 
suggested Samuel complacently. “What you 
going to do now, Taylor?” 

“I’m not sure. Yes. I am,” Taylor sud- 
denly added. “You say you want to go with 
me?” 

“That’s what I said.” 

“Have you had anything to eat?” 

“Yes, but they wouldn’t let me eat with 
’em!” said Samuel angrily. 

“Who wouldn’t?” 

‘ ‘ The lieutenant and the men at the house. 
They thought I wasn’t good ’nough for them. 
I’ll show ’em whether I am or not!” 


206 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIFES 


course you will, Uncle Sam,’’ said 
Taylor encouragingly. ‘‘They don’t suspect 
you, though, do they?” 

“Suspect me of what?” 

“That you are not going to ‘find’ me or 
that you have decided to leave them. ’ ’ 

“Of course they don’t.” 

“Good. Then I’ll tell you what you are 
to do. Uncle Sam. You go back to the house 
and do what I tell you. If you can find any- 
thing to eat, fill your pockets with it. It 
doesn’t make any difference what it is if 
it’s something that we can eat. Then if you 
can find an old coat, bring that. If you 
could get a pistol it would be just what we 
need. Do you think you can?” 

“I didn’t intend to go back to the house at 
all.” 

“That’s all right. You can go, though. 
If you can get these things I’m telling you 
about, we’ll be on our way home before you 
know it. I’d like to see the old place, 
wouldn’t you. Uncle Sam? Seems to me now 
I can almost see your mother sitting there 
in front of the little old wood-colored house 


A SEARCH 207 

where you lived. I think she ^11 be glad to 
see you, Sam.’’ 

^^Quit that!” 

‘‘And then when you start up the street 
the very next morning after you arrive in 
town how the people will praise you! The 
boys will say, ‘There’s Uncle Sam! The 
rebels couldn’t keep him in their prisons. 
He was too slick for Lee or Stonewall Jack- 
son.’ The girls, too. Uncle Sam, will all be 
talking about you and when they see you 
they’ll he proud to know you. Maybe 
they’ll—” 

“Maybe they’ll what?” broke in Samuel. 

“Oh, you know as well as I do what the 
girls will do. You know how they all act 
when they see the boys in their blue uni- 
forms — ” 

“Come on, Taylor!” interrupted Samuel 
eagerly. “Let’s start now.” 

“Come back here in two hours and I think 
we’ll be ready. Don’t let Lieutenant Evans 
or anyone else suspect that you’ve seen me.” 

“I won’t. Where you going, Taylor?” 

“Not very far away. I’ll be here waiting 


208 FOE TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


for you. Don^t forget what I told you about 
something to eat — and the clothes and the 
pistol, too, if you can find one.’^ 

‘^1^11 do it,’’ said Samuel excitedly. ^‘You 
really think, Taylor, the girls — ” 

know they will,” responded Taylor 
quickly. ‘ ^ You ’d better start now, Sam. ’ ’ 

Taylor smiled at the eagerness with which 
Samuel started in the direction of the man- 
sion. The poor half-witted fellow might 
have serious trouble if he tried to carry out 
the suggestions which had been given him, 
but Taylor’s conscience at the time did not 
trouble him. He was persuaded, too, that 
Samuel really meant what he said when he 
had expressed his desire to accompany him. 
Uncle Sam had not been as foolish as Lieu- 
tenant Evans had believed him to be when 
he had brought him in the hope that he would 
assist in running down the prisoners who 
had escaped. 

As soon as Samuel was gone, Taylor 
started briskly toward the cabin of Aunt Di- 
nah. He had slight fear of discovery now, 
and was eager to satisfy himself concerning 
two perplexing questions. Somehow he was 


A SEARCH 


209 


convinced that Erwin must be somewhere 
about the plantation. The questions which 
Samuel had asked Nebo indicated more than 
appeared and Taylor had refrained from ask- 
ing Uncle Sam until a later time. For the 
present he preferred to act upon his own 
impressions. 

In a brief time Taylor approached the low 
cabin of Aunt Dinah. The little building was. 
in darkness and not a sound could he hear 
from within it. First assuring himself that 
no one was near, Taylor approached the front 
door and rapped. His summons were twice 
repeated before the door was opened and 
the form of Aunt Dinah loomed large be- 
fore him. 

‘‘Who darU’ demanded the negro woman. 

“1^11 tell you,’’ said Taylor, as he stepped 
inside the building. “You know who I am 
now,” he added. “I’ve come back to have 
you help me again. Aunt Dinah.” 

“ ’Pears lak dey all do,” grumbled the 
woman, recognizing who her visitor was. 

“Yes, we all must come to you. Aunt Di- 
nah. You are our friend. Where is Nebo 1 ’ ’ 

“Whatfur yo’-all want ter see ’imP’ 


210 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


‘‘I must see him/’ 

‘‘Nebo gwine away/’ 

‘‘Has he goneT’ 

“He ain’ hyer/’ 

“Where is ’EastusT’ 

“He ain’ yere neider. Howcome yo’ git 
away fo’m de house what ’Rastus done 
watch ? ’ ’ 

“You knew I would not stay there, Aunt 
Dinah. So did ’Rastus know it, too.” 

The black woman chuckled as she said, 
“Yo’ sho’ly did pester ’Rastus. Yo’ did’n 
come outen de do’, an’ de winder was 
fas’.” 

“Did Tom do anything when he found I 
was gone?” 

“Mas’ Tom clar ter goodness yo’-all is des 
lak de smallpox — yo’ caint fin’ de way how 
hit get inter de house or outen hit.” 

“Never mind that now,” said Taylor hur- 
riedly. “Has anything been heard of my 
friend? I mean the one I left in the boat 
when I first came here.” 

“Ah reck’n he done gone, suh.” 

“Gone where?” 

“To de norf.” 


A SEARCH 


211 


‘‘What do you meanr’ 

‘ ‘ Hit des lak Ah tell yo ^ Tears lak two 
men was yere dis mo’nin^ an^ Nebo he done 
tak ^em bof on der way.’^ 

By dint of persistent questioning Taylor 
at last learned that two men who had escaped 
from the prison pen had been conducted by 
one of the blacks on “Mas^ Tom’s’^ planta- 
tion to a plantation a few miles northward. 
There the friendly negroes were to hide and 
care for the men until they could be taken to 
another plantation still farther away. The 
plan was not new to Taylor, who had fre- 
quently heard of this “underground rail- 
way, and, indeed, he had not been without 
hope that he and Erwin might secure the aid 
of faithful blacks if they were so fortunate 
as to escape from Camp Sorghum. 

The one pressing problem now was whether 
or not Erwin had really been one of the two 
men who had been assisted forward by the 
black man whom Aunt Dinah had referred to 
as Moses. He was unable to obtain from her 
any detailed information because she had not 
seen either of the men. 

“Why canT Nebo or Tastus take me and 


212 FOE THE STARS AND STRIPES 


perhaps another man to the next plantation 
to-night 1 ’ Taylor asked. 

’Eastus? ’Eastus? He’s sho’ly de mos’ 
wuffless man wha’ Mas’ Tom own!” snorted 
Aunt Dinah. 

‘‘Then let Nebo take us.” 

“He’s mos’ wuffless ’s ’Eastus.” 

“Let him try it,” suggested Taylor 
eagerly. 

Somewhat reluctantly, Aunt Dinah at last 
gave her consent. It was plain to Taylor 
that she knew more about her son’s where- 
abouts than she had admitted, because she 
promised that within an hour he would 
be at the place where the punt had been left. 
When Taylor reported his theft of food from 
beneath the trapdoor in the floor, Aunt Dinah 
laughed and insisted upon his taking with 
him another large piece of corn bread. When 
the young soldier departed from the cabin his 
heart was warm in the recollection of the 
black woman’s kindness. He was still deeply 
troubled about Erwin, however, when at last 
he approached the bank where the punt had 
been left. 


CHAPTER XVn 


A BLACK LEADEE 

Peeking cautiously before him, Taylor saw 
the tall form of Samuel approaching from 
the shore. The sight was not surprising, be- 
cause the young soldier somehow had been 
confident that Uncle Sam would not desert 
him. Indeed, it was the fear rather than the 
hope that the unreliable Samuel, who had se- 
cured permission from Lieutenant Evans to 
accompany him in a search for the missing 
prisoners against whom he had doubtless ex- 
pressed his hostility, would remain with the 
escaping prisoners instead of with the young 
Confederate officer. Perhaps, too, the lieu- 
tenant had not been unwilling for the un- 
gainly Samuel to be ^‘lost.^’ His presence 
apparently, was not desired by either of the 
contending forces. 

Taylor, however, was not afraid of Sam* 
uePs misdeeds — he understood the half-wit- 
ted fellow too well for that. Undesirable his 
213 


214 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


company might be, but he was not likely to 
add to the peril and might even be of service 
at times. Accordingly, Taylor confidently 
drew near, and, in a low . voice, inquired. 

Anyone been seen since I went away?^’ 

‘^Has Nebo — the young negro — been 
here ? ^ ^ 

^‘Nobody has been here.’’ 

‘‘Then we must wait.” 

“What are we waiting for?” 

“Someone is coming.” 

“Who? Erwin?” 

“I’m afraid not. I wish he was coming. 
Haven’t you had any word about him. Uncle 
Sam ? Did the lieutenant say anything about 
him?” 

“No. I didn’t hear a word except that he 
was sure that Erwin would be found. He 
couldn’t get away.” 

“Why Erwin? Didn’t Lieutenant Evans 
include me, too?” 

“Yes. He said he ’d have you both. ’ ’ 

“And yet you are going to take your 
chances with us.” 

“Yes.” 


A BLACK LEADER 


215 


is thatr^ 

don’t know. I gness it’s because I 
want to.” 

^‘Did yon tell the lieutenant yon’d help 
find ns?” 

‘^He thought I would.” 

‘‘Didn’t you promise you would help? 
Wasn’t that the real reason why he brought 
you ? ’ ’ 

“Not exactly, Taylor,” replied Samuel un- 
abashed. “There wasn’t any harm in let- 
ting him think what he wanted to, was 
there ? ’ ’ 

“I don’t know,” said Taylor moodily. 
“Come on into the punt. We’ll have to wait 
awhile. ’ ’ 

Together the two boys made their way to 
the rude little craft which they thrust under 
the projecting branches. There the young 
soldiers waited while the moments slowly 
passed. The moon was up now and in its 
light Taylor could see across the cornfield 
to the low cabins of the negroes in the dis- 
tance. A silence rested over the region that 
was so tense that it was almost oppressive. 
A branch snapped on the shore a few yards 


216 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


away and Taylor, startled by the sound, 
gazed anxiously in the direction from which 
it had come. The sound was not repeated 
and the young soldier ^s vigil was unrelaxed. 

The moon climbed higher into the heavens. 
It was eleven o^clock now, Taylor thought, 
and still Nebo did not come. Fear of his 
not coming at all began to trouble the anxious 
boy. The. danger of proceeding without a 
guide was as great as that of remaining 
longer where they then were. The time for 
action of some kind had come. Delay was 
not to be thought of longer. 

Slowly Taylor reached past his silent com- 
panion to grasp the long pole. He had de- 
cided not to wait any longer for the coming 
of Nebo. As Taylor thrust the pole silently 
into the muddy bottom of the stream he 
abruptly stopped when he became aware of 
someone on the bank. A hasty glimpse re- 
vealed the presence of Nebo. Calling softly, 
Taylor directed the young negro to the place 
where the boat was concealed. 

^‘Here we are, Nebo,’^ whispered Taylor. 
‘‘Everything all right F’ 

“Ah don’ see nobody.” 


A BLACK LEADER 


217 


^‘Have any word about my friend T’ 

‘‘No, snb.” 

“Are you ready to start T’ 

“Ah spec’s Ah’m mos’ ’s ready ’s Ah 
will be.” 

“Good. What’s the plan I” 

“We’ll pole de punt er while.” 

“All right. Get on board, Nebo.” 

The young negro stepped into the boat and 
grasping the pole pushed the little craft into 
the stream. For a time no one spoke, while 
Nebo, manifestly skilled in his task, pushed 
the little boat forward. Occasionally he 
stopped and listened, but the stillness was 
unbroken. 

“Whose punt is dis yere?” Nebo inquired 
at last. 

“Your’s, Nebo, when we leave it.” 

“Ah reck’n we mought bettah leabe it, 
now,” Nebo promptly responded. 

“You’ll not leave us, though?” 

“No, suh. No, suh. Not yet,” laughed 
the young negro. “Dis yere’s de place T^ha’ 
we leaves de punt, suh.” 

“Where are we going?” 

“To Hitt’s plantashun.” 


218 FOB THE STARS AND STRIPES 


‘^How far is it from hereT’ 

Hit’s a right sma’t way.” 

^‘Five miles?” 

‘‘Yas, suh.” 

‘‘How do we go!” 

“Erlong de road, suh, foh er piece. Hen 
we leabs de road an’ Ah ’ll tak’ yo’-all erlong 
de blin’ road.” 

“The ‘blind road.’ What’s that!” 

“Yo’-all will see. Ah caint des ’splain any 
mo ’.” 

“All right, Nebo. We’ll trust you.” 

The punt was carefully concealed by its 
new and prospective owner and when the 
task was accomplished the three men made 
their way to the near-by road. Nebo’s air 
of timidity apparently was gone now. He 
was active, cautious and confident. Halting 
behind the rail fence, he turned to his com- 
panions and said in a low voice, “He bes’ 
way now is fer me t’ go ahaid. Yo’-all fol- 
low des a little way behind. If Ah see any 
signs er de whackers — ” 

“Of what!” 

“Signs er de bushwhackers — de men wha’ 
runs der plantashuns in de daytime an’ den 


A BLACK LEADER 219 

in de night dey des nachnlly gets demselves 
t’gedder an^ watches de roads.’’ 

^^What do they watch the roads for?” 

^‘Foh ter cotch de pris’ners which am es- 
capin’ onten de camp.” 

‘‘What shall we do if we find any of these 
men ? ’ ’ 

“Das des wha’ Ah’m ’splainin’ t’ yo’-all. 
Ah’m goin’ ter percede ahaid o’ yo’-all an’ 
yo’ gemmens is ter follow. Does Ah mak’ 
dat observation pertinaciously t’ yo’, suh?” 

“Yes. Yes,” said Taylor, impatiently. 

“Den ef dat’s des sasfficen’ly perlatatious, 
hit des nachnlly follows, suh, dat ef Ah goes 
ahaid Ah’m de one ter mederfy wif de 
’nouncements of de whackers dere. If yo’ 
gemmens follow, den yo’-all ’s de ones wha’ 
must signerfy de ’structions wha’ come f’om 
de reah oh dis yere percession. Is dat all 
’splicit?” 

“It is as clear as moonlight. You are to 
go ahead, and if you find any danger you are 
to warn us. We are to follow you, and if we 
find any bad signs we are to warn you. ’ ’ 

“Da’s hit! Da’s hit, suh, ’s sho’ ’s yo’ ’re 
bo’n.” 


220 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


‘‘What will you do — call to usT^ 

“No, suh. Ah ’ll lif ’ up my vocal voice an’ 
do dis — ” Nebo suddenly emitted a weird, 
shrill cry like that of a night hawk. The cry 
was repeated three times and was agreed 
upon as the warning of danger. 

“Co’se you gemmens isn’t ’spected ter try 
dat,” said Nebo, graciously. “Yo’-all is des 
ter shout an’ cry erloud an’ spare not. Ah ’ll 
sho’ly understan’.” 

The change from the glum, silent Nebo to 
the talkative and self-conscious leader was as 
amazing as it was puzzling. There was no 
opportunity for explanation, however, and in 
a few moments the three boys were walking 
along the rough roadway, the order of ad- 
vance being that which Nebo already had 
suggested. 

The young negro could not be seen as he 
led the way, but occasionally he stopped and 
waited for his companions to join him. Not 
a sign of danger had thus far been seen, and 
Taylor’s hopes were brighter than when the 
journey began. His greatest anxiety was 
concerning the fate of Erwin. The possibil- 
ity that his friend had been one of the two 


A BLACK LEADER 


221 


men to whom Aunt Dinah had referred as 
having been already conducted by faithful 
negroes to a plantation farther north was in 
Taylor’s thoughts, and he tried to make much 
of the report. From Nebo Taylor had not 
been able to learn anything definite concern- 
ing the previous party he had led. Whether 
this was due to the negro’s unwillingness to 
enter into any details, or was the result of 
stupidity, Taylor could not determine. He 
was positive that he had adopted his best 
plan in following Nebo. Further discoveries, 
he decided, must be left to the events of the 
coming day. 

Three times Nebo had halted and reas- 
sured his followers that the way was clear. 
After a brief rest the journey each time had 
been eagerly resumed, and now Nebo de- 
clared that the end was not far distant. 

The road now led through a long and some- 
what dismal stretch of woods. The waving 
branches, weird and leafless, seemed almost 
like the arms of men extended in warning. 
The shadows of the trees were almost ghostly 
as they flickered or danced on the road. Nei- 
ther Samuel nor Taylor spoke, though both 


222 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


were looking forward to the cleared tract 
which Nebo had assured them lay not far be- 
yond the borders of the woods. 

Suddenly there was a shout heard by the 
boys. The sound came from a place not far 
in advance of them. Halting abruptly, Tay- 
lor listened intently for the warning call of 
Nebo. He could hear the voices of men and 
was able to distinguish that of the young ne- 
gro, who was loudly protesting, althougji 
Taylor was unable to hear what was said. It 
was evident that Nebo had been abruptly 
halted, and it was plain that several men 
were in the band or party that had accosted 
him. 

‘^Come! Come on!^^ whispered Taylor 
abruptly, as he turned and grasped Samuel 
by the arm. 

Without a protest, Uncle Sam followed as 
his companion ran swiftly back over the road. 
They had gone a hundred yards or more 
when Taylor turned sharply into the woods 
and then ordered his companion to follow his 
example, as he stretched himself upon the 
ground behind the trunk of a large tree that 
at some time had been uprooted by a storm. 


A BLACK LEADER 


223 


Breathlessly the boys waited. Taylor was 
peering above the trunk of the tree behind 
which he was hiding. There!’’ he whis- 
pered excitedly a moment later to his com- 
panion. ^‘It is just as I thought it would be. 
They’re coming this way and they have Nebo 
with them! Keep out of sight! Don’t 
move! Don’t speak!” 

In a brief time, Taylor, who still was peer- 
ing over the fallen tree, saw the party ap- 
proaching. He was trusting to the darkness 
to hide him. The moonlight enabled him to 
see into the road and in a brief time he 
counted eight men in the approaching hand. 
In the midst he could discern the form of 
Nebo. Manifestly the men were all excited, 
and they were talking so loudly that as they 
drew near Taylor was able to hear what was 
said. 

‘‘Yo’re Tom Baby’s Nebo, aren’t yo’?” 
one of the party noisily was demanding. 

‘‘Yaas, sub,” replied the young negro. 

‘‘Does Tom know yo’ are heah?” 

“No, sub.” 

“What are yo’ heah fob!” 

“Ah’se des gwine ter see — ” 


224 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


^‘That’s a likely story,” interrupted an- 
other of the men with a loud laugh. “Do 
yo^ know what happens t^ niggers when they 
help the Yanks! They jest nachelly stretch 
hemp. Do yo’-all want t’ try that!” 

“No, suh. No, suh,” stammered Nebo, his 
teeth chattering in his terror. 

“Then tell us whar the Yanks are! Tell 
us, or we-all ’ll string yo’ up t’ th’ nearest 
tree. Heah, Ben,” the man added savagely, 
“try yer new rope on th’ nigger!” 


CHAPTER XVIII 


THE BLIND KOAD 

Foe a moment Taylor hesitated. The band 
of eight bushwackers were standing about the 
terrified young negro. By their actions the 
prospect of serious trouble for Nebo was 
more than threatening. Ought he to lie still 
and permit their leader to sutler, or was it 
better to give themselves up and thereby save 
his life, was the question now in Taylor ^s 
mind. The thought of the conditions in the 
prison camp, as well as of the escape and the 
troubles through which he had come, was also 
vivid. If, to save the frightened negro, he 
should now surrender, it would mean, as Tay- 
lor well knew, a condition for himself much 
worse than any he had previously known. 

Hesitation departed quickly. Hard as it 
must be to give himself into the hands of 
these men, and to be returned to Camp Sor- 
ghum, there to be punished for his escape, as 
225 


226 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


well as to abandon all future hope of release, 
such conditions would not be so unbearable 
as the knowledge that the faithful young 
black had met his death while he was aiding 
the young prisoners in their attempts to es- 
cape. He decided that he would announce 
his presence if Nebo’s plight should become 
desperate. 

Taylor, the decision once made, waited 
while he watched the proceedings in the road. 
The man whom the leader addressed as Ben 
advanced, having a rope in his hands. All 
the men were armed. Crowding about the 
negro, they appeared to be all excited, and 
doubtless were a desperate band. They were 
all strong, too, as was manifest in their bear- 
ing. 

‘^Slip the noose ovah his head, Ben,’^ called 
the leader. 

The man stepped forward and adjusted the 
rope about Nebo’s neck. 

‘‘Now, suh, fling th^ rope ovah the branch,’’ 
called the leader. 

The rope was adjusted in accordance with 
the command. 

‘ ‘ Now, then, f oah o ’ yo ’-all get hold. When 


THE BLIND ROAD 227 

I say th^ word, stretch th’ nigger. When 
yo^-all pnll, pnll ha^d.’’ 

Taylor moved as if he were about to rise 
from his position behind the log. 

‘‘Now, Nebo, yo’ wan^ ter say yo’ 
prayers ? ^ ’ demanded the leader, as he turned 
to their trembling victim. 

Taylor thought he could hear the chatter- 
ing teeth of the terrified young negro. Ap- 
parently the privilege either was ignored or 
not understood, for not a word at first was 
spoken by Nebo. Suddenly, however, the 
victim seemed to realize more completely the 
peril that was threatening him. In a voice 
shrill and so loud that it could have been 
heard far away, Nebo screeched, “Ah’se 
Mas^ Tom’s nigger — Mas’ Tom Baby’s! Ef 
yo’-all doan look out, yo’-all ’ll have Mas’ 
Tom atter you’. Ah’se wuth mor’n a thou- 
san’ dollahs. Ah done heah Mas’ Tom say so 
hisself. Yo’-all kin hang me ef yo’ says so, 
but wha’ll Mas’ Tom have foh ter say ’bout 
hit? He’ll—” 

The men laughed loudly at the words of 
the negro, but it was manifest that what he 
had said had not been without its effect upon 


228 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 

them. If indeed, as Taylor shrewdly sus- 
pected, their sole purpose was to frighten 
their victim into telling what they thought 
he knew, and not to do him any bodily harm, 
Nebo’s words certainly added to his sus- 
picion. 

‘‘What dl Tom Eaby do ef he heahs yo’-all 
have been helpin’ th’ Yanks to git out?” de- 
manded one of the band. 

“Ah spec’s he’ll sen’ foh Big Jim,” said 
Nebo, eagerly. As Big Jim was the over- 
seer of the Eaby plantation, every man 
within Nebo’s hearing understood what was 
implied in the suggestion. 

“If yo’ tell us, Nebo, whar th’ Yanks are, 
we’ll let yo’ go. Futhermo’ we’ll fo’get t’ 
tell Tom Eaby yo’-all was caught yere by 
we-uns,” suggested the leader of the little 
band. Taylor was convinced now that no 
real harm would be done the negro. His 
eagerness to hear what Nebo would say, how- 
ever, was so keen that he lifted his head still 
higher above the log. 

“Ah dunno whar they be,” moaned Nebo. 

‘ ‘ How many were with yo ” 

“Foah, suh.” 


THE BLIND ROAD 


229 


‘‘Where was yo’-all er takin’ ’emT’ 

“Des nowhar, suh. Ah’m tellin’ yo^-all 
de truf/’ Nebo added eagerly, when the band 
langhed noisily. “Ah des wanted foh ter git 
’em gone. Dey was sho’ly de mos’ disde- 
lapdated trash what Ah eber see, suh.” 
“Why didn’t yo’-all tell Tom Eabyf ” 

“Ah did, snh! Ah sho’ did! Mas’ Tom 
done shet one ob ’em np’n ole Hagar’s house 
an’ he done set my fader foh ter watch out fo’ 
de place. But de Yank des didn’t stay. ’Pears 
lak yo’ des caint hoi’ ’em in Camp Sorghum 
no mo’n yo’ can in old Hagar’s house.” 
“Where mought th’ Yanks be now I” 
“Ah dunno, suh. Ah specs dey done gone 
back ter Mas’ Tom’s place.” 

“Wheah was yo’ a takin’ ’em, NeboT’ 
“Ah wasn’t takin’ ’em nowhar, suh. Dey 
des nachelly makes me go. And Ah shore 
was glad foh ter get ’em outen de place 
dar. ’ ’ 

“Yes. Yes. But where are they now?” 
“Ah caint des ’pear fo’ ter rec’lec’ at dis 
yere moment, suh. When day seed yo’-all, 
’pears lak dey couldn’ des git away fas’ 
’nough. Dey was makin’ tracks like dey 


230 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


thought dey would rather tak dey chances 
back in Camp So’ghum dan wid yo’-all.^’ 

^‘Did they come back this wayT’ demanded 
the man quickly, as he glanced back over the 
road. 

’Pears lak dey did.” 

‘^Are yo’ shuah, Nebo? If we-uns fin’ 
yo’re lyin’, we’ll git two ropes. When we go 
ter Tom Eaby fo’ ter tell him ’bout yo’ 
doin’s, he’ll give us two moah. An’ we’ll 
use ’em all on you, you black houn’ dog, 
ef we-all fin’ yo’ve been a deceivin’ of 
us!” 

Hit’s de truf,” persisted Nebo, fran- 
tically. ‘ ^ Dey is come back dis yere way. ’ ’ 

‘^Why didn’t yo’ say sof” retorted the 
leader, angrily. ‘‘We-all mus’ get th’ Yanks. 
Go back an’ get yer dawgs, Sim,” he ordered 
one of his men. ‘ ‘ Two creep erlong th ’ road, 
one on each side, while Jetf an’ I follow up. 
Th’ rest of yo’-all go back ovah th’ way we 
don’ come an’ see if the’s any sign o’ Yanks 
ahead. ’ ’ 

“What’ll we do with NeboP’ inquired one 
of the band. 

“Take him erlong with us,” replied the 


THE BLIND ROAD 231 

leader, as lie removed the rope from the ne- 
gro ’s neck. 

The directions were speedily followed and 
almost before Taylor was aware, the entire 
band had disappeared. The departure of 
the negro, the probability that dogs would be 
used in the search, the knowledge that three 
of the men were on the road in the direction 
in which the escaping prisoners had been 
proceeding, all added to the difficulties which 
now confronted Taylor. 

‘‘Uncle Sam,’’ he whispered, “we must get 
out of this place.” 

“Where?” 

“I don’t know. Somewhere. Anywhere.” 

“Better stay right where we are.” 

“No, they’ll have dogs. They’ll all be 
back pretty soon. They’ll find us, too, if we 
stay here till it is light.” 

“No, they won’t. This is the best place. 
I’m tired, anyway.” 

“I’m going on,” said Taylor quietly, as he 
arose. 

“Well, I guess I’ll have to go, too, then,” 
replied Samuel, as he also arose. “But 
we’ll lose our way.” 


232 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


‘‘We haven’t found it.” 

“Go ahead.” 

Together the two boys stepped cautiously 
into the road. Not a person was in sight. 
The night was far advanced and silence 
rested over the region. Apparently Samuel 
was indifferent alike to his surroundings and 
to the peril in which he and his companion 
stood. He was complaining in a low voice 
of the cold and of his feeling of hunger. 

Ignoring Samuel, Taylor delayed a few mo- 
ments to satisfy himself that no one was in 
the immediate vicinity. As soon as he was 
convinced that they were alone he said 
sharply, “Come on. Uncle Sam.” 

Making no protest, Samuel followed obedi- 
ently, and together they started, walking 
briskly in the direction in which they had 
been going, when they had been halted by 
the coming of the bushwhackers. 

In Taylor’s thoughts, now, that of the blind 
road to which Nebo had referred was prom- 
inent. What this road was, or how it was to 
be found, he did not know. The young negro 
had said it led to Hitt’s Plantation, what- 


THE BLIND ROAD 


233 


ever or where that might be. In a general 
way, Taylor understood that it was about five 
miles northward from that where he had been 
sheltered in the cabin of Aunt Dinah. As 
nearly as he was able to estimate the distance 
they had come, he did not think more than 
three miles at the utmost had been covered. 
Plainly there were friendly negroes on the 
Hitt Plantation, which was one of the ‘‘sta- 
tions” on the underground railway that led 
to freedom. 

Watching either side of the road as they 
advanced, Taylor at last halted abruptly. 
Pulling his companion with him, he turned 
into what appeared to be an opening in the 
brush by the roadside. A hasty examination 
revealed the presence of ruts which wagon 
wheels had worn in the ground. The en- 
trance was almost hidden by the bushes, and 
yet a wagon easily could be driven through 
it. 

Was this the blind road! There was no 
answer to the question. The pathway led 
among trees and could be seen for only a 
short distance. The main road was unsafe 


234 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


at best. With the men searching it, as Tay- 
lor knew them to-be, the peril of discovery 
was increased. 

^‘Come on. Uncle Sam,’’ he said abruptly 
in a low voice. don’t know where this 
path leads, but we’ll try it awhile. It can’t 
be any worse for us than the main road any- 
way. ’ ’ 

Making no protest, Samuel followed his 
friend, who led the way slowly and cautious- 
ly. The road was not difficult, for the soil was 
soft, and not many rocks were in it. The 
darkness which the trees produced made the 
objects on either side dim. Men might be 
watching or following, but no one would be 
aware of their presence until they were close 
upon them. 

As the boys advanced, Taylor became more 
convinced that they were following a path- 
way which was only occasionally used. 
Whether or not it was the blind road that 
led to the Hitt Plantation only their further 
progress would reveal. At all events, for the 
time it was safer for the boys to be there than 
on the open road. Taylor accordingly kept 
steadily on his way, still walking slowly and 


THE BLIND ROAD 235 

frequently stopping to ascertain if buildings 
or men were near. 

Already be bad formed a vague plan and 
was now attempting to supplement it. Tbe 
road must bave an end, and there must also 
be a reason for its being where it was. Even 
if tbe plantation be was seeking was not near 
it, some people must be found, for a road 
without men was an absurdity. If these men 
chanced to be negroes be was confident of 
help. If, on tbe other band, they were white, 
they still might be willing to give him food or 
shelter. 

Just as the dawn appeared, the boys came 
to the border of the woods through which 
they had wearily made their way. They 
were now looking across open fields. On the 
border beyond them were rude buildings. 

‘‘This is a plantation of some kind,’’ sug- 
gested Taylor. 

“Is it!” inquired Samuel, indifferently. 

“Yes. Over there are cabins,” continued 
Taylor, pointing to the low buildings he had 
already seen. “One of us must go there. 
Will you go, or shall I!” 

“You.” 


236 FOE TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


^‘All right. There’s only one thing for 
yon to do, Uncle Sam.” 

‘^What’s that?” 

^^You stay right here till I come back.” 

‘^Suppose yon don’t come back?” 

^ ^ Then wait till noon. Don ’t move. ’ ’ 

'^I’ll go to sleep, I gness.” 

^ ^ Good. Bnt don ’t make mnch noise. ’ ’ 

‘‘I shan’t,” said Samnel, solemnly. ‘‘I 
told yon I was going to sleep.” 

‘^That’s what I meant.” 

Delaying no longer, Taylor started briskly 
across the open fields. The light steadily 
was becoming clearer and in the fear of be- 
ing seen he began to proceed more rapidly. 
In a brief time he arrived at the nearest of 
the hnts. No one was to be seen near it, 
and the place was still. Moving on to the 
nearest hnt, the yonng soldier hesitatingly 
stopped before the door. Onght he to rap 
and seek an entrance? 

The question was abruptly answered for 
him when the door suddenly was opened and 
a young white girl, apparently near his own 
age, appeared. Staring at Taylor, she hesi- 
tated a moment and then quickly approached. 


CHAPTER XIX 


A WARM DEFENDER 

‘‘Who are you? What are you doing here 
at this time in the morning?^’ demanded the 
girl, gazing at Taylor in anger or alarm. The 
young soldier, coatless, hatless, his clothing 
torn, his feet almost hare, was aware that his 
appearance was far from being assuring. 
The girl before him plainly belonged to the 
class that dwelt in the big house. She was 
simply dressed and in her face the expression 
of sympathy which Taylor had noticed when 
she first appeared, had now given place to 
one in which pity apparently found no part. 
Nevertheless, Taylor abruptly decided to tell 
her who he was and to trust her for aid in 
his desperate plight. 

“Just at present,’’ he said, “I am doing 
nothing. It’s an occupation I would like to 
keep up for a week, judging from my feel- 
ings.” 


237 


238 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


Who are youT’ repeated the girl sharply. 
She was almost staring at him in her mani- 
fest excitement, though she did not advance 
any nearer. 

She was standing about fifteen feet in front 
of him, but there was no evidence of alarm 
now in her bearing. 

‘‘Do you mean my name?” 

“Yes. Yes. Who are you?” 

“My name is Cooper — Taylor Cooper.” 

“What are you?” 

“I was once a soldier. I belong to the 
— th New York.” 

“You are a Yankee!” exclaimed the girl 
scornfully. 

“I am.” 

“Have you come here to rob us? You 
probably knew our men are not at home. 
You are as brave as the rest of them — when 
there are no men around! Now, what do 
you want?” 

“I haven’t asked for anything, have I?” 

“You look as if you might ask for our 
lives. ’ ’ 

“Perhaps you’ll understand when I tell 
you I have escaped from Camp Sorghum.” 


A WARM DEFENDER 


239 


‘‘At Columbia 

“Yes.'' 

“Why do you tell me this! I haven't any 
pity for the Yankees shut up there. If I 
had my way I'd put every one of them behind 
bars along with other criminals." The 
girl's dark eyes flashed as she spoke. 

Taylor looked at her a moment without 
speaking. Then he laughed as he said, 
“Your sentiments are not of your heart." 

“Yes, they are, too!" retorted the girl, 
sharply. “What are you but a lot of — of — 
men worse than cutthroats or thieves I Why 
are you here ? What did you come down here 
for anyway! You have robbed our houses, 
shot our men, stolen our crops, burned our 
homes — Oh, I don 't know all you have done ! 
And — and you have the audacity to stand be- 
fore me and tell me you are a Yankee sol- 
dier just escaped from Camp Sorghum I 
Why — why, I never heard anything like it in 
all my bo'n days. How do you know I'll not 
turn you over at once to some of our brave 
men!" 

“You'll not do it," said Taylor, quietly. 
He could not explain why he was not afraid. 


240 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


The girl manifestly was intense in her devo- 
tion to the Confederate cause. . Her anger or 
indignation and her sharp words somehow 
seemed to interest greatly the young soldier, 
and his admiration for the glowing cheeks 
and shining eyes of the girl, loyal to her own, 
was not concealed. ‘‘No, you’ll not do it,” 
he added. 

“Why won’t I?” 

“You can’t.” 

“I can’t! Lieutenant Evans will be here 
at ten o’clock. WTiat will prevent me from 
telling him there is a poor, wretched creature 
on our plantation who says he is a Yankee 
prisoner — ” 

“Was, not ‘is’ a prisoner, if you please,” 
interrupted Taylor. 

“It’s all the same I” ^ 

“Is it? If you were in Camp Sorghum for 
a day or two I think you’d change your mind. 
Here I am free. It’s true my coat does not 
fit me, my shoes have not been blacked, my 
clothes are not in perfect condition, and I 
am almost starved. But what is all that 
compared with the misery and filth of the 
camp ? ’ ’ 


A WARM DEFENDER 


241 


you don’t like it, why did you come 
down here?” 

‘‘You know why I came,” said Taylor, 
quietly. 

“No, I don’t know. I can’t think of any 
excuse. There isn’t a reason in all the world 
— but one,” she added, sharply. 

“What’s that?” 

“You just wanted to fill the heads of the 
negroes full of wrong ideas. You wanted to 
steal our silver. You hate us — ” 

“ ‘Hate’ you? You’re mistaken! I don’t 
hate you. On the contrary I — ” 

“Then tell me why you didn’t leave us 
alone. We never troubled you. We never 
went north and shot your men — ” The girl 
stopped abruptly, her eyes filling with tears ; 
but T.hether her emotion was due to sorrow 
or to anger, Taylor was unable to decide. 

“Listen a minute, will you?” pleaded Tay- 
lor. The girl’s unconscious declaration that 
no men were on the plantation as well as the 
fact that it was early in the morning relieved 
him of part of his fear. Besides, the girl, 
in spite of the intensity of her feelings, was 
somehow most interesting. “Tell me who 


242 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


began this war? Did we of the north! 

‘‘Of course yon did!’’ 

“Please tell me how.” 

“Yon-all sent yonr armies down here.” 

“Why!” 

“I’ve told yon already. Yon jnst wanted 
to steal, bnrn — Oh, I can’t tell yon all the 
horrible things yonr men have done.” 

“Who began the war! Was it onr men who 
fired on one of the government’s forts!” 

“Yon mean the fort at Charleston!” 

“Yes. Fort Snmter.” 

“That was in onr territory.” 

“Then why did yon attack it!” 

“ Because — because — Oh, I hate the Yan- 
kees!” 

“Me, too!” 

“Of course! Most of all! Yon are a 
Yankee, and one of the few I ever saw.” 

“And yon don’t like the looks of me!” in- 
quired Taylor quizzically, as he looked down 
at his dilapidated clothing. 

“You’re not to blame for everything,” said 
the girl quickly, following his glance. 
“You’re a Yankee. You’re on my father’s 
plantation — ” 


A WARM DEFENDER 


243 


‘‘Not because I want to be,’^ interrupted 
Taylor with a laugb. “If I bad my wish I^d 
be a thousand miles from bere tbis morn- 
ing.’' 

“I wish you were,” said tbe girl not un- 
kindly. 

“Tbank you. I knew you bad a good 
heart. ’ ’ 

“You don’t know anything about me.” 

“I think I know more than I did an hour 
ago.” 

“And less, perhaps, than you will an hour 
from now.” 

“I’m sure of that.” 

‘ ‘ Sure of what ? ’ ’ 

“That I shall never forget how good you 
were to me.” 

“ ‘Good’ to you? Why should I be good 
to the worst enemy I have ? ’ ’ 

“There’s something somewhere I have 
read, ’ ’ said Taylor, drily, ‘ ‘ that if even your 
enemy hungers you are to feed him. ’ ’ 

The girl looked at him for a moment as if 
her feelings at the time would more clearly 
find expression in other ways than “feeding” 
an enemy. “If I thought you’d leave our 


244 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


country I might help you do that/’ she said, 
after a moment’s silence. 

^‘Whether I leave the country or not de- 
pends on you and your people more than it 
does on me.” 

^‘Whydoesit? How does it! I don’t un- 
derstand you, sir.” 

told you a moment ago that our men are 
not down here in the South because we want 
to be. We didn’t begin the war. We’d be 
glad to stop it anytime. There’s just one 
word and the whole thing is fixed. ’ ’ 

‘^What word!” 

“I don’t think I’ll say it for you. You 
know what it is as well as I. ” 

‘‘You mean ‘surrender’!” she demanded 
with flashing eyes. “Never! We’ll never 
say that as long — as long as there’s one man 
left in the Southland. And if the last man 
falls then the girls and the women will take 
it up!” 

“That all rests with you,” said Taylor, 
soberly. “We didn ’t begin it. W e don ’t like 
it. We’d be glad to have it stop to-day. 
But when a country is attacked what would 
you have it do! Smile! Say ‘Thank you, a 


A WARM DEFENDER 245 

little more, please,’ or woujd yon have the 
men stand np and fight ? ’ ’ 

‘‘Yon are not defending yonr conntry. 
Yon are attacking onrs.” 

“Is that the way yon talked when Old 
Hickory fonght the SeminolesT’ 

“It’s the way we talk now!” said the girl, 
defiantly. “Oh,” she added in softer tones, 
“yon don’t know what it means! We’re in 
fear of onr lives every minnte. When I first 
saw yon I took yon for a cntthroat Yankee.” 

“A Yankee, bnt no cntthroat.” 

“Either word will do. They both mean 
the same thing. ’ ’ 

“Yon hate me so mnch yon ’ll help me, 
thongh,” snggested Taylor. 

“I’ll never help yon! What do yon 
want ? ’ ’ 

“A little food, a place in which to hide, and 
a coat, if yon please.” 

“We never yet have tnrned away a beg- 
gar. ’ ’ 

Slowly the color spread over Taylor’s face, 
so deep that even its coating of dirt conld 
not hide it. He tnrned away as if there was 
nothing more to be said. 


246 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


‘‘Wait a minute! I did not mean that — 
at least, I did not mean what you thought I 
meant, the girl exclaimed eagerly. “You 
see it’s this way. My father — ” her voice 
broke a moment, but she quickly regained 
control of herself. “My father was shot at 
— at the second battle of Manassas. Both 
my brothers are in Johnston’s army. If I 
had two more brothers I’d have them both 
go, even if I had to lash them to do it — which 
I wouldn’t, for they’d be as brave as their 
father and his brothers. I know they would I 
If they weren’t I’d never own them! But — 
but, you see it does not make one very cor- 
dial in one’s feelings for the Yankees.” 

“Did you ever think that we had feelings 
like that, too % ’ ’ inquired Taylor, stopping be- 
cause he was touched by the manifest ear- 
nestness of the girl. 

‘ ‘ I don ’t know that I ever did. ’ ’ 

“Well, do it now. Let me tell you that I 
have a sister, too. I don’t suppose she knows 
to-day whether I’m alive or not. My mother 
hasn’t had a word about her boy for a good 
many weeks. She knows I was taken pris- 
oner, and so many of our boys have died in 


A WARM DEFENDER 


247 


the reb — in your prisons, that yon can hardly 
expect she naturally would have much af- 
fection to waste on the men that took me. 
No, I tell you we^re a good deal more alike 
than we think sometimes. I^m willing to 
give you credit for thinking you’re right, 
but don’t you think we’re entitled in all fair- 
ness to a bit of consideration, too?” 

Yes, if you’d only go back home and stay 
there and not come down here shooting, steal- 
ing, burning our houses, and all the rest.” 

‘^How would you have us carry on the 
war ? Bring our knitting work and sit down 
on your lawns and talk about the weather?” 

The girl laughed for the first time since 
the strange interview began. ^^It’s no use in 
trying to explain to you,” she said. ^‘You 
cannot see.” 

‘‘Not as you see,” replied Taylor lightly. 
“We use our eyes and you use yours. I’m 
willing to own up that your eyes are bright 
enough and are better than mine — ” 

“That will do, sir,” laughed the girl in- 
terrupting him. 

“But look for a minute through my eyes. 
Oh, I don’t mean you’re to look into them,” 


248 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


Taylor said, banteringly. ‘ ‘ Bat what do you 
think you would see if it was your brother 
who was a prisoner and he had escaped and 
was talking to my sister as you are to me ? ’ ^ 
‘‘If she was any good she’d say as much 
or more than I have. ’ ’ 

“I know one thing,” said Taylor, soberly. 
“What’s that?” 

“She wouldn’t call him a ‘beggar’ just be- 
cause he ’d dragged his way to where she was. 
I’ve a notion, too, she’d help him. If you 
knew my sister you’d understand what I 
mean. ’ ’ 

“I haven’t said I wouldn’t help you. I 
hate Yankees, and you’re one of the first I 
ever saw. Here! Here!” she added in a 
low, tense voice. “Go into Aunt Katy’s 
cabin ! Go right in ! ” 

The excitement of the girl caused Taylor 
to glance quickly in the direction in which she 
was looking. On the borders of the woods 
he saw eight men. They were just emerg- 
ing from amongst the trees. One glance was 
sufficient to convince the young soldier that 
the men were the bushwhackers whom he 
had seen the preceding night. Whether or 


A WARM DEFENDER 


249 


not they had discovered his presence, Tay- 
lor did not know, as he instantly followed the 
girl when she led the way into Aunt Katy’s 
cabin. 


CHAPTEE XX 


A PIECE OF PAPEB 

‘‘Aunt Katy/’ exclaimed the girl quickly, 
as she and her companion entered the little 
house. “Hide this man I Don’t let the men 
get him. You know how to do it, for I know 
you have done it before.” 

“Lor’, Miss Sallie — ” began the colored 
woman. 

“Don’t stop I Don’t talk! Hide him! 
Be quick ! The men will he here before you 
know it!” 

The negress, in what seemed to Taylor a 
most deliberate manner, flung open the door 
to her pantry and then turning to her vis- 
itors, said, “Go in yerel I’ll stan’ in de do’. 
Ef dey gets pas’ me dey’ll sho’ly have ter 
move de mountains fust off. ’ ’ 

As Taylor slipped quickly past Aunt Katy, 
he laughed despite his alarm at the thought 
of the bushwhackers moving the huge 
woman from her position. She was larger 
250 


A PIECE OF PAPER 


251 


even tlian Aunt Dinah. Her red bandanna 
handkerchief twisted about her woolly head 
gave her a warlike appearance, which her 
great size and the expression of determina- 
tion on her face made still more pronounced. 
In a moment, however, the door was closed 
upon him and he was left to himself. A 
small window in the outer side of the room 
was open and he could see what was going 
on outside the hut if he were to raise him- 
self to the level of the rude sash. However, 
he had no desire at the time to expose him- 
self needlessly, and he crouched low in a cor- 
ner of the room. He was able to hear what 
was being said in the other room of the cabin 
and to his surprise the girl, who had led him 
into the place, was bidding the colored woman 
defend the visitor at all hazards. 

In a brief time the sound of the voices of 
men was heard at the door, and Taylor was 
aware that the hand, of which he was in fear, 
had come, and the critical moment was at 
hand. 

‘^Hi, there,’’ called one of the men to some 
one outside the door whom Taylor had not 
seen. ^^Got any Yanks in yo’ place I” 


252 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


aint done seen none, suh,’^ replied 
some one whom Taylor took to be a boy. 

We ’ll take a look anyway.” 

‘‘Das all right, snh. Ah reck’n Ah ’ll des 
keep ’way.” 

“What’s the trouble?” 

“Dem Yanks has horns, snh,” exclaimed 
the boy in apparent fear. “Mas’ George 
’clar ter goodness dey all has horns right 
on dey haids. Dey don’ cotch dis chile!” 

“You’re c’rect, Sambo,” laughed the man. 
“The Yanks has hons’ and a red-hot pitch 
fo’k too. They all like nothin’ hettah than 
to take little nigger hoys an’ broil ’em over 
the fire. They turn ’em on the’ fo’ks like 
they was ’possums. You hettah keep ’way 
from ’em, Sambo.” 

“Ah shore will, sub.” 

The men now turned to the door of the 
hut, and from the sounds Taylor concluded 
that the girl was still standing there. 

“Has yo’-all seen any stray Yanks?” de- 
manded the man. 

“What kind of Yanks?” responded the 
girl. 

“Mos’ly prisoners. Mis’ Sallie,” said the 


A PIECE OF PAPER 


253 


man, who apparently recognized the girl be- 
fore him. ‘^We all have a ^spicion that the 
niggers is helpin^ some o^ ^em to get away. 
A right sma’t number has been breakin’ 
away from Camp So’ghnm lately. 

‘‘Do you think we^re likely to hide any 
here 1 ^ ^ 

“No, no. Mis’ Sallie, we-uns know yo’ too 
well fo’ that; Cap ’in George is too big a 
fighter fo’ any ’spicion like that. But we- 
all didn’t know hut you might ’a’ seen some 
skulkin’ Yanks somewhere ’bout the quar- 
ters. They mos’ gen’ly makes fo’ the 
quarters. ’ ’ 

“Aunt Katy, have you seen any Yankee 
prisoners ? ’ ’ demanded the girl as she turned 
to the huge negro woman in the room. 

‘ ‘ Humph ! ’ ’ snorted Aunty Katy. 

The girl laughed as she faced the man and 
said, “I’m sorry, but I don’t believe you’ll 
find any escaping Yankee prisoners here. If 
I do find any what shall I do with them?” 

“Shet ’em up an’ send word ter Cap ’in 
George or ter me.” 

“I don’t know you. Where can I find 
you?” 


254 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


might sen’ word ter the sto’ fo’ 
’Lonius Shattuch. We’ll come and take the 
Yanks offen yo’ ban’s. Bettah look out, 
Mis’ Sallie, an’ see that th’ Yanks don’ do 
yo’-all no harm befo’ yo’ shet ’em up.” 

can take care of myself,” said the girl 
quietly. 

‘^We-uns ’ll trest yo’ fo’ thet, Mis’ Sallie. 
I reck’n we-all had bettah take er look ’bout 
th’ place befo’ we go.” 

‘‘Why! Do you really think any of the 
escaping prisoners are here ! ’ ’ 

“We-all tracked some in this yere direc- 
tion, Mis’ Sallie.” 

“Can I be of any assistance in seaching 
for them!” 


“No, no. Bless yer kin’ heart, Mis’ Sallie 
I reck’n yo’ve got troubles enough of yer 
own without addin’ ter ’em.” 

The conversation ended abruptly and for 
a time silence followed. Taylor in his hid- 
ing place tried to hear what was being said 
in the main room, but Aunt Katy and the 
girl were talking in such low tones that not 
a word was audible to him. He crept to the 
window and peering out was able to to see the 


A PIECE OF PAPER 


255 


men. They had scattered about the planta- 
tion and were manifestly making a thorough 
search of the place. 

To Taylor they appeared to he a hand 
with which he had no desire for further ac- 
quaintance. Every man had a gun in his 
hands and it was plain that the negroes were 
all in great fear of their visitors — a feeling 
which Taylor fully comprehended. 

Suddenly the girl who had conducted him 
to his place of refuge appeared walking 
directly toward the men. For an instant 
Taylor’s alarm returned in full force. Was 
she about to betray him! Had her loyalty 
triumphed over the momentary sympathy 
she had expressed for him! Anxiously he 
watched her as she stopped a moment to 
speak to one of the men and then passed on 
toward the mansion and soon disappeared 
from his sight. 

An hour or more the men delayed about 
the plantation before they started together 
for the woods where they had first appeared. 

Eelieved by their departure, Taylor waited 
for the negro woman to open the door and 
bid him come forth from the pantry. At 


256 FOE THE STARS AND STRIPES 


last when his patience was nearly exhausted 
he opened the door and stepped into the 
room where the woman was preparing some 
hoecakes in the fireplace. 

‘^It^s safe to come out now, isn’t it?” sug- 
gested the young soldier. 

Ah reck’n hit is,” said Aunt Katy coldly. 
‘‘Who is yer!” 

“I’m a prisoner escaping from the rebel 
camp.” 

“Is yer a Yank?” demanded the huge 
colored woman, stopping in her occupation 
and staring almost incredulously a ner vis- 
itor. 

“I am. WTiat did you think?” 

“Whaffur Mis’ Sallie done hide yer yere 
fo’?” 

“I don’t myself understand.” 

“Mis’ Sallie done hate de Yankees wussen 
de pizin. ’ ’ 

“I know she does. Who is she?” 

“Mis’ Sallie — das who she is. Ah reck’n 
everybody know dat. ’ ’ 

‘ ‘ Miss Sallie who ? ’ ’ 

“She’s ole Mas’ Henry’s youngest gal. 
Mas’ Henry he done get shot in de wa’. 


A PIECE OF PAPER 


257 


Eber since Mas^ Henry he done get shot ole 
Mis’ an’ Miss Clara an’ Miss Ma’g’ret an’ 
Miss Sallie dey mos’ crazy. Mis’ Clara an’ 
Miss Ma’g’ret dey bof gone to the hospit’ls 
fo’ to nurse de po’ sick sojers. Miss Sallie 
she des stay to home ter he’p her ma; 
but, honey, she suhtainly does hate de Yanks. 
Mas’ George he gone to de wa’ too an’ dey 
ain’ anybody lef’ into de place but jes’ old 
Mis’ an’ Mis’ Sallie, ’ceptin’ when Mas’ 
George come home.” 

^‘Whe^^does he come? Is he here now?” 

‘‘Deyf ies ain’ no tellin w’en dat man 
come, ’"'^ears lak he come des when dey 
is le ^plectin’ on ’im.” 

‘Hs he here now?” again Taylor inquired. 

‘‘Lan’, honey, Mas’ George may be yere 
an’ den he moughn’t. Dey is’n enny way 
fo’ to fin’ dat out, ’ceptin’ when he come.” 

‘^What was Miss Sallie doing here in your 
house just before I came?” 

‘‘Howcome she come Ah dunno. She des 
come, da’s all.” Aunt Katy glanced shrewdly 
at Taylor as she spoke. 

Suspecting there was more than at first ap- 
peared in her expression the young soldier 


258 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


suggested, ‘‘Perhaps she suspected you, Aunt 
Katy. ’ ^ 

“Ah reckon she do.’’ 

“You help the Yankees, do you. Aunt 
Katyf” 

“Ah shore does.” 

“And that’s why you do for me?” 

“Yaas suh. Mis’ Sallie she hates de 
Yankees. Ah reck’n she ’specs Ah ain’ 
doin’ ’em enny ha’m. Leas ’wise she done 
come down yere fo’ to fin’ out ’bout ’em.” 

“Aunt Katy, have you helped any lately — 
within a day or two?” 

“Whatfur yo’ ax me dat?” 

“Did you have a young fellow here — not 
as tall as I am? He had light hair and blue 
eyes — ” 

“Did he hab de woe-begondest face, mos’ ’s 
begonedest as you hab ? ’ ’ 

“Very likely. When was he here ? When 
did he go?” 

“Wha’ mought be his name?” 

“Erwin — Erwin Smith.” 

“Ah don’ des rec’lec’ ’bout de name. Dey 
was a young man here day befo’ las’. Was 
he somebody what yo’-all wan’ to fin’?” 


A PIECE OF PAPER 


259 


‘‘Yes, yes. Did he leave any message? 
Any word for me? I understand some of 
the colored people have a regular line over 
which they send all of us who are fortunate 
enough to get away. Is that so?’’ 

“Yo’-all mus’n axen me. Ah knows yo’ is 
a Yankee.” 

“How do you know?” 

“By de soun’ oh de words,” chuckled the 
huge negro woman. “Bettah take dis yere 
hoecake an’ see wha’ yo’ can do wif hit.” 

The woman’s task before the tire was now 
completed and when she handed the cake to 
the young prisoner, Taylor was positive that 
never before had food tasted so good. His 
cook watched him with evident satisfaction, 
he! countenance beaming with sympathy and 
interest. 

“Yo’ sholy is pow’ful hongry,” she said 
at last; “des de same lak ’em all. De hoe- 
cake don’ las’ long when de Yankees is 
come.” 

‘ ‘ I don ’t wonder. Aunt Katy. It ’s the best 
I ever ate.” 

‘ ‘ G ’long wit yo ’, chile ! ’ ’ 

“It surely is the best. Some day when 


260 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


the negroes are all free and yon come north, 
I’ll send for you, Aunt Katy, and have yon 
come to our house. If I ever get home. I’ll 
send for you the very first thing. ’ ’ 

^‘An me leab Miss Sallie, and old Mis’ an’ 
Mas’ George!” 

‘‘Why, yes, of course.” 

“Ah reck’n yo’-all don’ know some tings.” 
The eyes of the black woman almost flashed 
as she glanced at her visitor. 

“Don’t you want to be free?” 

“Ah don’ leab Mis’ Sallie.” 

“Wrhy do you help the Yankees then?” 

“Chile, yo’ mus’ be pow’ful tired. Don’ 
yo’-all wan’ ter go ter sleep?” 

‘ ‘ I feel as if I could sleep two days. ’ ’ 

The black woman laughed and started 
toward the back door. In a moment she re- 
turned with a small ladder, which she placed 
against a beam in the ceiling. “Dey is er 
doah ’treckly t’ yo’ right han’. Des open de 
do’ an’ dim’ in, an’ don’ fo’get t’ close de 
do’ when yo’ is inside. Dey’s er bed dere 
an’ yo’-all c’n sleep till ‘Gabrel blow de 
trumpet in de mawnin’,’ if yo’ desiahs.” 

Aware of the purpose of the woman, Tay- 


A PIECE OF PAPER 


261 


lor speedily made his way into the small 
loft of the cabin, carefully closed the door 
behind him and then turned to a bed on the 
floor. 

The room was not dark, because light came 
in through the chinks of the logs and a small 
open window at one end of the loft admitted 
light and air alike. 

Thoroughly wearied, Taylor prepared to 
throw himself on the bed. As he drew near 
he saw on the floor a small folded piece of 
paper. Without expecting to find it anything 
of importance, he picked it up and held it in 
the light. 

To his amazement he saw his own name 
on the outside of the paper. Before he 
could open the startling missive, he was 
aroused by a call from the room below. 
Hastily thrusting the paper into his pocket 
he turned at once to the door in the floor. 


CHAPTER XXI 


m THE MANSION 

It was the voice of the young girl — Miss 
Sallie — which Taylor heard in the room be- 
low. Startled by her unexpected return, 
Taylor listened a moment and then heard 
Aunt Katy summoning him. 

Hastily raising the trapdoor, the young 
soldier peered down at the black woman and 
her companion. The girl laughed as she 
saw the face of the young Yankee and she 
called sharply, ‘^Come down here, sir, I want 
to speak to you. ’ ’ 

Puzzled by the strange summons, Taylor 
nevertheless speedily swung himself through 
the opening and dropped to the floor. 

“Did you want to see meT’ he inquired, 
as he turned to the girl. 

“I did.’’ 

“Well, here I am.” He spoke simply and 
as he gazed at his torn clothing and the rem- 
262 


IN THE MANSION 


263 


nants of what once were shoes, he added, 
afraid the sight isn^t one to interest 
yon very much. What can I do for yonT' 

‘^Nothing.’’ 

‘‘Why then do you want to see meT’ 

“Because I can do something for you/’ 

“You are very kind — to beggars.” 

“That is very unkind of you. You know 
very well what I meant when I used that 
word.” 

“I beg your pardon.” 

“It’s granted. I’ve been thinking of what 
you told me about your mother and your 
sister. I think I understand how they feel 
and I’m going to do for you what I would 
want them to do for my brother if he was a 
prisoner up north. Thank goodness, he will 
never be though I No Yankee can ever make 
a prisoner of my brother George.” 

‘ ‘ For your sake as well as for his own, I am 
sure I hope they never will,” said Taylor 
quietly. 

‘ ‘ That settles it ! There may be occasion- 
ally a good man even among the Yankees. 
Perhaps you are the one — at least you are 
the only one I have ever seen. If they would 


264 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


only go back where they belong and not 
come down here doing all they are doing 
The girPs dark eyes flashed, but the smile 
on her face belied the fierce tone she used. 

‘‘I told you why we were here and how 
glad we would all be to start for home to- 
morrow.’’ 

told you I was going to help you, and 
I am on one condition. ’ ’ 

‘‘What is that?” 

‘ ‘ That if I help you to leave, you will never 
come back.” 

“What do you mean? That I am to leave 
the army?” 

“Yes.” 

“I can’t do that.” 

“Yes, you can do it, too!” 

“Do you want me to desert?” 

“I don’t care what you call it or what you 
do if you only do what I tell you. I don’t 
ever want to see or hear of you again. ’ ’ 

“Thank you,” said Taylor mockingly, 
bowing low as he spoke. 

“Oh, you know what I mean. I hate the 
Yankees!” 


“So I have heard you say.” 


IN THE MANSION 


265 


^^And you won’t promise me?” 

‘‘No.” 

“Then I don’t believe you want to get 
away very badly.” 

“Don’t I look the part?” inquired Taylor, 
once more glancing at his tattered clothing 
as he spoke. 

“You Yankees are the vainest creatures,” 
laughed the girl. 

“Yes, if you mean we are proud. We’re 
too proud to forget a promise.” 

“What do you mean by that?” 

“If we enlist and promise to serve our 
country we don’t go back on that promise 
and we don’t try to get any other one to do 
it either.” 

“What do you mean?” demanded the girl 
angrily. 

“Just what I say. What would you think 
of my sister or mother if either of them 
promised your brother he would be helped 
if he would agree to desert?” 

“He couldn’t do it I You don’t know 
him. ’ ’ 

“And yet you want me to do that very 
thing and you promised to help me if I would 


266 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


do what you would despise your own brother 
for doing.’’ 

“I hadn’t thought of it in that way. For- 
give me!” The expression of Miss Sallie’s 
face softened even as she said, ‘‘You know 
I hate the Yankees.” 

“Are you afraid I’ll not understand 
that?” asked Taylor quizzically. 

“But I do ! I wish every one of them was 
where he deserved to be.” 

“So do I,” Taylor said so fervently and 
seriously that the girl laughed as she looked 
at him. 

“I’m going to help you.” 

“Good! I am grateful.” 

“I’m going to help you because I hate the 
Yankees.” 

“I hope the feeling will increase.” 

“You are to come with me.” 

“'Where?” 

“To the house.” 

“Did you ever hear of the spider who in- 
vited the fly to visit her ? ’ ’ 

“You may do as you please, sir!” retorted 
Miss Sallie sharply, turning away as if she 
were about to depart. 


IN THE MANSION 267 


‘‘Don’t think I’m ungrateful,” said Taylor 
quickly, “but — ” 

“You’re afraid.” 

“Naturally.” 

“What are you afraid of?” 

“Why even an invitation to visit the home 
of Captain George Hitt by his sister isn’t to 
he taken seriously by a Yankee prisoner 
when he’s dressed as I am.” 

“You’re too proud.” 

“No. I’m afraid.” 

‘ ‘ There, I knew it. ’ ’ 

“Yes, I’m afraid Captain Hitt would give 
me a welcome that I should remember a long 
time.” 

“He isn’t at home.” 

“Think of the trouble you would have if I 
should be found.” 

“I’m not afraid. I ’m not going to give you 
a guest room. I’m going to put you in the 
attic.” 

“A ragbag is where I belong just now.” 

“That’s true. You think too much of 
your clothes. I thought that would be a good 
place for you to hide in for a day or two. 
No one would ever think of looking into our 


268 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


attic for a Yankee prisoner.^’ The girl 
laughed as she spoke and even Taylor smiled 
at the suggestion. ^^You will be fed and 
cared for and I think I can find some gar- 
ments the scarecrows have discarded that 
will be an improvement over that suit of 
yours. ^ ^ 

^‘Suppose I am seen going into the house 
with you?” 

‘‘You won’t be. The men that came here 
this morning are gone. Aunt Katy will 
bring you to the house, won’t you, Aunt 
Katy?” 

“Ah sholy will. Mis’ Sallie,” said the negro 
woman. It was plain that she was puzzled 
by what she was hearing, but of her loyalty 
to her young mistress there was no question. 

“Why do you think I’ll be safer at the 
house than here?” asked Taylor of Miss 
Sallie. “I’m afraid — ” 

“There it is again!” laughed Miss Sallie. 
“Are you always afraid?” 

“I’m afraid of trouble for you.” 

“You needn’t have any fear for me. I 
can take care of myself, thank you!” re- 


IN THE MANSION 


269 


torted the girl. may be foolish, but I^m 
no coward.^’ 

‘‘I’ll do what you say,’’ said Taylor 
quietly. 

“Even a Yankee has a grain of sense — 
sometimes,” said Miss Sallie lightly. “Lis- 
ten then and I’ll tell you what you are to do. 
In a few minutes — directly after I go back 
to the house — you are to come to the side 
door. Aunt Katy will come with you. 
Eeally, I’m afraid it is not safe for you here 
any longer. And Aunt Katy must not harbor 
any more Yankee prisoners. She’s sus- 
pected of doing it now. I don’t care much 
what she does in that line as far as I am 
concerned. I hate the Yankees and every 
one that Aunt Katy or any one else can get 
out of the country — why, it’s ‘a good rid- 
dance to bad rubbish’ — that’s the way I feel. 
I’m going now,” the girl added abruptly as 
she at once departed from the cabin. 

The huge negro woman looked keenly at 
the departing girl and then turned and 
glanced at Taylor. She made a sharp sound 
through her teeth — “K-l-u-ch” — but said 


270 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


no more until her young m-istress had en- 
tered the big house. 

^‘Now, chile,” said Aunt Katy, ^^take de 
cheer an’ carry hit in yo’ ban’s. We-uns 
mus’ do wha’ Mis’ Sallie done tole us.” 

Perceiving the meaning of her suggestion 
that some apparent purpose in the visit must 
be shown, Taylor took the rush chair in his 
hands and at once followed Aunt Katy as she 
led the way to the mansion. No one was seen 
on their way and when they arrived at the 
entrance which Miss Sallie had indicated, 
they were met by the girl herself. 

Apparently without fear she at once dis- 
missed the negro woman and bidding her 
‘‘guest” follow her she turned to the large 
hall in the center of the house. Up the 
broad stairway she quietly conducted Tay- 
lor until they came to the attic. 

The young soldier was excited but quiet. 
In spite of the strangeness of his experience, 
he was aware how large the house was, how 
spacious its rooms and how wide the stair- 
ways. Manifestly it had been built for com- 
fort. For a moment Taylor was aware as 
he never had been before of what the loss of 



Up THE BROAD STAIRWAY SHE QUIETLY CONDUCTED TAYLOR. 

Page 270. 


X 



4 



% 
















& • 


IN THE MANSION 271 


the home life, the life on the great plantation, 
must be to its owners. He had more sympa- 
thy for the people against whom he had 
been waging war than ever before. Perhaps 
he understood more clearly, for understand- 
ing, on either side in a quarrel, of the atti- 
tude and feelings of the other party is a sure 
path to less intense bitterness and more gen- 
erous sympathies. 

‘^Nobody comes here now,’’ said the girl 
when at last she and her companion arrived 
at the attic. ‘^You’ll be safe here for a time. 
Don’t try to get out and don’t leave till I 
give you the word. I feel almost as if I were 
a traitor, but what you said about your 
mother and sister helping my brother made 
me do it. Besides, I hate Yankees,” she 
added irrelevantly. think you’ll find 
everything you need in there.” 

Without waiting for a reply. Miss Sallie 
hastily closed the door as soon as Taylor en- 
tered the room, and at once departed. 

The novel experience was so strange that 
for a moment the young soldier stared 
blankly about him. In one corner of the attic 
was an old-fashioned bedstead on which the 


272 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


bed looked most inviting. Several pails of 
water were there too and on a small table 
was food — fried chicken and other viands 
that were tempting. On the back of a chair 
fresh clothing, including a partly worn suit, 
were displayed. On the coat a piece of paper 
was pinned which Taylor took and read the 
words written on it — ‘‘Food, clothing, water 
and a bed — what more can be done for ‘ thine 
enemy’? Perhaps I might heap coals of 
fire on his head but I’m afraid they would be 
so hot they would burn his very soul. I hate 
Yankees.” 

Taylor smiled as he read the note, his 
heart warming within him as he realized 
what all this had cost the high-spirited girl 
who had befriended him. He was no longer 
afraid. The one who had done so much 
would not now betray him. 

Suddenly realizing that he had not fas- 
tened the attic door, he at once advanced and 
turned the button. A bath, clean clothing 
and food followed in order. The sight of the 
inviting bed was appealing now and in a 
brief time the young soldier was soundly 
sleeping. 


IN THE MANSION 


273 


It was noon of the following day when 
Taylor awoke, although he had no means of 
knowing or reckoning the passing of the 
hours. When his eyes were open at first he 
was unable to recall his surroundings. In 
a moment, however, he understood, and the 
first thought in his mind as he arose from the 
bed and dressed, was of the strange piece of 
paper he had found in the loft of Aunt 
Katy’s cabin. In the excitement of going 
to the big house he had forgotten the dis- 
covery of his own name on the folded slip. 
Hastily he searched the pockets of his cast- 
off clothing. He found the paper, but be- 
fore he could read it he turned to the door 
on which some one was rapping. 


CHAPTER XXII 


INTERCEPTED FLIGHT 

Cautiously opening the door, Taylor be- 
held before him the girl who had already 
befriended him in so many ways. Without 
speaking she indicated her desire for silence. 
Handing him the food she had brought, she 
remained outside the door and watched the 
young prisoner as he quickly received what 
she had brought and placed on a chair in the 
room. 

Turning again to his visitor, Taylor in- 
quired in a whisper, ‘‘What time is it?’’ 

“Noon.” She laughed lightly as an 
expression of incredulity crept over Tay- 
lor’s face. “I have been here twice before 
this morning,” she added. “As I could not 
get any response to my knocking I didn’t 
know but you had gone. ’ ’ 

“I wish I had,” said Taylor fervently. 
“Is there anything new?” 

“Nothing except that my brother and a 
274 


INTERCEPTED FLIGHT 275 


friend are coming to-day. I have heard too 
that the men found a Yankee yesterday in 
the woods and took him away. ’ ’ 

^‘When is your brother coming T’ inquired 
Taylor. He had no question in his mind 
concerning the man who had been taken. 
Uncle Sam was again in the hands of his 
enemies. 

don’t know. He sent word that he 
would be at home to-day( That is all I 
know. ’ ’ 

ought to leave before he comes.” 

Miss Sallie did not reply and it was plain 
to the young soldier that she agreed with 
him in his suggestion. 

‘‘You have been good to me. I want to 
thank you for all you have done,” Taylor 
said in a low voice. 

“Don’t thank me; thank your mother and 
sister; they are the ones who really did it. 
As for me, I hate all the Yankees.” 

“Every one?” asked Taylor quizzically. 

“Yes, every one,” replied the girl sharply, 
although the expression of her face in part 
belied her words as she looked at the young 
soldier. “Eeally,” she added, “I don’t 


276 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


know that I should have recognized yon in 
yonr new clothes and having a clean face. 
What are you going to do ? ” 

Leave as soon as I can.’’ 

^‘Perhaps you would do better to wait till 
night.” 

‘‘And let your brother find me here?” 

“I don’t believe he’ll find you, that is, if 
you keep quiet.” 

“It is almost too great a risk to run. Tell 
me,” Taylor added quickly, “what road to 
take and where to go.” 

‘ ‘ That I cannot do. I have done my part, 
and a good deal more than I ought to have 
done, in hiding you as I have. I don’t know 
what George would say if he should find out. 
Think of it — Sallie Hitt keeping a detested 
Yankee! It’s too improbable for any one to 
believe. If it wasn’t for your mother and 
sister you never would be here. I hate the 
Yankees.” 

“I’ll tell them how good you were to them 
if I am ever so fortunate as to see them 
again.” 

“If you wait till night I’ll see that the 
door on the side piazza is left unlocked. Go 


INTERCEPTED FLIGHT 277 


down the same stairs up which you came, 
and if you are careful, perhaps no one will 
overhear you. I must go now. ’ ’ 

‘^Will you shake hands with a Yankee 
asked Taylor, as he extended his hand as he 
spoke. 

^^No, sir!’^ replied the girl, drawing hack 
with flashing eyes. ‘‘I told you I hate the 
Yankees.’^ 

‘^That’s all right,’’ laughed Taylor; “I 
don’t blame you. When you first saw me 
I wouldn’t have shaken hands with myself.” 

‘‘You are just the same now — inside.” 

“What? And after you have fed me as 
you have ? ’ ’ 

“Yes, sir. You are trying to drive us out 
of our homes.” 

“Do you mean me?” said Taylor, so 
solemnly that a smile appeared on the girl’s 
face. “Why, I’m doing my best to get 
away.” 

“But you wouldn’t promise not to come 
back.” 

“How could I make any such promise? 
Besides I shall want to come back because 
you — ” 


278 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


Taylor stopped abruptly as the sound of 
swiftly approaching horses was heard near 
the house. The look of alarm which Miss 
Sallie gave him was almost lost upon Taylor 
as he darted to the window in the attic and 
looked down upon the ground. Two young 
officers, each wearing the Confederate uni- 
form, were riding rapidly up the long lane 
that led from the road to the house. Dis- 
mounting lightly as they stopped in front of 
the piazza, one of them called sharply, 

‘ ‘ Eben, you black rascal, come here and hold 
our horses. 

‘^Yaas, Mas’ Gorge,” exclaimed a colored 
boy, as he came running in response to the 
call. 

Miss Sallie ’s brother had returned then, 
Taylor thought, and with him was a friend. 
Perhaps they did not intend to remain long. 
The call to Eben to hold the horses indi- 
cated that the young officers might soon de- 
part. The suggestion was helpful and the 
young prisoner turned quickly to the door 
of his room. 

This he found had been closed. Opening 
it cautiously, he discovered, as he had ex- 


INTERCEPTED FLIGHT 279 


pected, that the girl had gone. Cautiously 
closing the door once more, Taylor turned 
the button and then stepped carefully back 
to the window. 

The horses were still where they had been 
left and the negro boy was holding both bri- 
dles. From within the house the sounds of 
laughter and of eager voices in conversation 
were heard. There was no question now in 
Taylor ^s mind that it was Miss Sallie^s 
brother George who had come. The young 
soldier smiled as he thought of the anxiety 
of the girl. Certainly she had been kind to 
him and her kindness never would be for- 
gotten, he assured himself. If he only knew 
just what the plans of the young officer were. 
How surprised he would be if he should 
discover a Yankee from Camp Sorghum 
hiding in his house. Again Taylor thought 
of the plight of the girl in such an event. 
He must leave the place as soon as such an 
attempt would be reasonably safe. His 
own case was bad and that of the girl who 
had befriended him was even worse. He 
must act soon, he decided, because of both. 

Seating himself near the window from 


280 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


which he could see all that occurred in the 
yard below, he ate the food which had been 
brought him. This he thought was the part 
of wisdom, for where his next meal was to be 
obtained was most uncertain. 

When Taylor had eaten the food, he 
stepped to the door and opening it a few 
inches listened intently. The sound of the 
voices in the house had now ceased, although 
he could hear some negro woman singing in 
the hall below him. 

When he closed the door and returned to 
the window he saw the colored boy leading 
one of the horses toward the barn, the other 
having been tied to the post near which the 
young officers had alighted. Plainly then, 
Taylor concluded, one of the young men was 
intending to remain for a while and the 
other might depart at any time. Looking 
out toward the barn, he discovered Miss 
Sallie and a young man walking side by 
side. The air was chilly and the young 
officer stopped and was adjusting a wrap 
about the girPs shoulders. 

Where was her brother? The question 
suddenly presented itself to Taylor. In- 


INTERCEPTED FLIGHT 281 


stantly returning to the door of the attic, he 
again opened it cautiously and stepped into 
the hall. Not a sound in the house was he 
able to hear. Stepping softly to the stair- 
way, a sudden decision having been made by 
the young soldier, he began to descend. He 
had no means of defending himself in case 
he was attacked, but he was feeling stronger 
now after his long sleep and the food which 
had been given him. 

He must move as swiftly as possible as well 
as silently, he thought. There had been no 
discovery of his presence when he gained 
the hallway on the second floor. The doors 
into the rooms here were open and all must 
be passed before he could gain the stairway 
at the further end. Trembling in his excite- 
ment, Taylor passed through a part of the 
distance and then beheld a young negro 
woman in the further room. Her hack was 
toward him and he quickened his pace, step- 
ping softly, and hoping to avoid discovery. 

To his great relief he passed the open 
door without being seen and then began to 
descend the stairs. When he arrived at the 
platform half-way down he again stopped 


282 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


and breathlessly peered all about him. The 
entire house seemed to be silent save for the 
sounds that came from what manifestly must 
be the dining-room and kitchen, he concluded. 
The door into the former was open and to 
pass it without being seen seemed well-nigh 
impossible. It was too late now to turn back. 
His sole hope rested upon gaining the side 
piazza. 

When he passed the open doors he dis- 
covered a young man seated before a desk 
in the room at his left. For a moment it 
seemed to Taylor almost as if his heart had 
stopped beating, so great was his excitement. 
He had no difficulty even in his first hasty 
glimpse in concluding that it was ‘‘Mas’ 
George ’ ’ who was there. The young man was 
writing and was seated in such a manner, 
having his back to the window, that if he 
should look up he must of necessity see any 
one passing through the hall before him. 

The heavy rug on the floor of the hall 
deadened the sound of footfalls and Taylor 
instantly decided to move quickly to the door. 
Success now depended upon escaping the at- 


INTERCEPTED FLIGHT 283 


tention of the young man who was writing 
at the desk. 

Dropping his head, almost as if he were 
striving to push his obstacles away, the young 
soldier stepped hastily forward. His eyes 
were turned toward the man in the room, 
who apparently was engrossed in his writing. 

^‘Not quite ready yet,’’ suddenly said the 
young officer without looking up. 

Taylor did not reply and quickly was be- 
yond sight of the writer. 

‘‘That you, Tom?” called the voice again. 
“Come back in five minutes and I’ll have it 
ready for you.” 

Naturally, Taylor did not reply, but was 
moving swiftly toward the door, which now 
was only a few feet away. He heard the 
young officer push back his chair and was con- 
fident the man was coming into the hall to 
discover why his question was not answered. 
There was a door in the hall near where Tay- 
lor was. He concluded that it would be im- 
possible for him to escape to the piazza 
without being seen; in desperation he pulled 
the knob of this door. It readily yielded to 


284 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


his frantic efforts and instantly he stepped 
inside. He did not even attempt to close the 
door after him, so great was his haste. He 
found himself in a small coat room and coats 
were hanging from the side walls. In a 
moment the desperate young soldier took his 
stand against the wall and drew one of the 
coats over him. Between its folds he could 
look out, and as he himself was in the dark he 
could not be seen, as he believed, by any one 
in the hall. 

The light in the hallway, however, enabled 
him to see what was going on there. The 
young officer had come out of the room in 
which he had been writing and was peering 
above him. 

Eliza, was that Tom who was heref” 

‘‘Ah didn’ see ’im. Mas’ George,” replied 
a negro girl, who also was in the hall. How 
he had escaped her notice, Taylor could not 
understand. He was, however, too excited 
as he watched the young officer, to give any 
thought to what might have occurred. The 
present was too important to be ignored. 

“Some one was in the hall. I reckoned it 
was Tom. If he comes, tell him I want to 


INTERCEPTED FLIGHT 285 


see Hm. I told Eben to send him to me 
right away. Eliza,’’ the young officer added, 
as he pointed to the door of the coat room in 
which Taylor was concealed, “what does 
your mistress say to you when you leave 
doors open like that?” 

“ ’Pears lak dat do’ wo’n’ stay shet, Mas’ 
George, nohow.” 

“What’s the trouble with it?” 

“Ah dunno. Hit des wo’n’ stay shet.” 

“Perhaps the catch is broken. Eun along, 
Eliza, and tell Tom to come here directly. 
I’ll have a look at the door while you are 
gone. Find Tom for me while I’m doing 
it.” 

“Ah spec’s Tom is outen de kitch’n. He’s 
mos’ gen’ly is dere w’en dey is enny cookin’ 
bein’ done.” 

“Find him anyway, and* be quick, too, 
Eliza. I have an important errand I want 
him to do.” 

As “Mas’ George” started toward the coat 
room to discover what was wrong with the 
door, Taylor crouched more closely behind 
the coat that partly concealed him. 


CHAPTEB XXIII 


A BORKOWED HORSE 

Every nerve in the young soldier’s body 
was tense, as he watched the actions of the 
man before him. Apparently unsuspecting, 
the young officer bent over the knob of the 
door, testing it several times. His attempts 
to discover what was wrong did not meet 
with any success. The knob and key both 
turned readily in his hand. 

Stepping inside the little room, ‘‘Mas’ 
George” tried the knob in a different man- 
ner. His back was now turned toward Tay- 
lor, and the temptation at the sight presented 
was too great for the desperate young soldier 
to resist. Beaching forward without being 
discovered, Taylor suddenly seized the officer 
by his shoulders and with one supreme effort 
flung him back into the coat room. 

Before the man could recover from his 
surprise, or regain an upright position, Tay- 
lor leaped forward, flung the door hack into 
286 


A BORROWED HORSE 


287 


its proper place, turned the key in the lock, 
and then thrust the key into his pocket. He 
had a confused vision of Eliza standing in 
the hallway, regarding him with open eyes, 
and uplifted hands. Ignoring the startling 
effect his presence had produced, Taylor 
darted through the door on his way to the 
side piazza. 

The prolonged screech of terror which now 
came from the startled colored girl was min- 
gled with the muffled sound of shouts and 
pounding from the coat room. Aware that 
the confusion would be vastly increased 
within a few moments, and that the danger 
of his own position was certain to be en- 
larged, Taylor rushed down the steps lead- 
ing to the driveway. Before him, tied to a 
post, was the horse of ‘ ‘ Mas ’ George. ^ ’ Tay- 
lor now instantly decided what he would do. 
Springing to the post, with one frantic pull 
on the strap he freed the horse, and then 
sprang upon the back of the startled animal. 

At that moment Eben appeared on his way 
back from the barns. 

For an instant the black boy stopped and 
in open-eyed astonishment gazed at the sight 


288 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


before him. Then, realizing that evidently 
something was wrong, he darted swiftly for- 
ward, shouting in his loudest tones, “Hi! 
Mas’ George! Mas’ George!” 

The sight of the approaching negro boy in- 
creased Taylor’s excitement. At any mo- 
ment the young Confederate officer might be 
freed from his place of confinement. As the 
man doubtless was armed, the peril of the es- 
caping prisoner would be greatly increased. 
The appearance of Miss Sallie on the piazza 
added to Taylor’s confusion. For a moment 
she gazed at the fleeing young soldier, and 
then her cry of alarm was added to that of 
the servants. 

So sharply did Taylor pull on the rein that 
the horse reared and backed, and for a time 
it almost seemed to the rider that he would 
not be able to turn him about. The young 
soldier’s hands were trembling, and the rein 
was shaking in his grasp. 

At last, after what seemed to him in his 
desperation a long time, although in reality 
it was quickly done, the horse was headed 
down the lane, and in response to Taylor’s 
urgent slapping of the bridle rein, leaped for- 


A BORROWED HORSE 


289 


ward. The rider’s feet were not yet in the 
stirrups. He was, however, accustomed to 
horseback riding, and now, without delaying 
for further precautions, he darted swiftly 
away. 

Leaning low on the neck of the horse, he 
glanced behind him. He could see the serv- 
ants and Miss Sallie in the driveway in front 
of the great house, and even while he looked 
the young officer appeared in their midst. 
He, too, joined in the shouting, and then 
quickly raised his hand, in which he was hold- 
ing a revolver, and fired at the fleeing man. 
Again he fired, but either his aim was poor 
in his excitement, or the swiftly running 
horse proved a deceptive target. At all 
events, neither horse nor rider was hit. 

Eesisting the temptation to mock his foes, 
Taylor still bent low upon the neck of the 
horse and urged the beast to increased speed. 
In a brief time he gained the road, and 
though he had no conception of the places 
where danger was most to be feared, he un- 
hesitatingly turned to his right. That way 
at least led northward — the direction in 
which every hope of safety pointed. 


290 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


For a mile or more Taylor did not permit 
his horse to slacken the speed at which he 
was running. Several times side roads were 
passed, and the young rider peered intently 
into them as he fled past, fearful of behold- 
ing pursuers more familiar than he with the 
region, who had taken advantage of their 
knowledge of short cuts or paths through the 
woods or across the country. 

His horse now began to manifest signs of 
distress. The poor animal might already 
have had a long run before his master had 
returned to his home, Taylor thought; but 
pity had no place in his mind now. Flight 
from the region was his supreme purpose. 

When another mile had been covered, Tay- 
lor was aware that he must check his speed. 
The poor horse was wet and almost covered 
with foam, and his breathing was agonized. 

Turning into a path on his left that led 
into a tract of woods, Taylor soon permitted 
his horse to walk. He continued on his way 
until he was convinced that no one passing 
on the road could perceive him. He then 
dismounted and tied his panting steed to a 
sapling. He himself was almost in as dire 


A BOBBOWED HOBSE 291 

straits as his horse for, despite the cold, his 
face was dripping with perspiration, and he 
was shaking like a leaf in the wind. 

Peering amongst the trees to make certain 
that no one was near, Taylor soon decided 
to leave the horse where he was tied, while 
he went back to the border of the woods near 
the road. Taking a stand behind a large 
tree, where it would be possible for him to 
see men approaching from either direction 
without being seen himself, he waited and 
watched the road. 

Nor did he have long to wait before he 
saw some one approaching from the direc- 
tion in which he himself had come. A man 
was riding furiously, and as he drew near 
Taylor at once recognized him as Miss Sal- 
lie ^s brother. The horse upon which he was 
mounted was large and apparently strong 
and fresh. The apparent confidence of the 
rider in his ability to overtake any fugitive 
was well placed, Taylor thought grimly, as 
he watched horse and rider until they disap- 
peared beyond a bend in the road. 

It was now nearly the middle of the after- 
noon. Glancing first at the sun and then at 


292 . FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


the roadway, Taylor decided to remain where 
he was until darkness should come. Mean- 
while, too, it was possible that the young 
Confederate officer, who was so keen in his 
pursuit, might return and abandon his at- 
tempt to regain his horse and secure the 
man who had stolen it. That the officer did 
not have any knowledge who the man he was 
pursuing really was, Taylor was confident. 
He was equally positive that Miss Sallie, 
despite her call, when he had taken flight, 
would not betray him. 

The thought of the girl caused Taylor to 
look down at the clothing he was wearing. 
The suit was warm and not ill fitting. Shoes 
and stockings were on his feet, and a soft 
felt hat on his head. There was nothing in 
the garments to betray their wearer as be- 
longing to either side in the great struggle 
which at the time was going on. 

He thrust his hands into the pockets in 
the coat, and from one he drew forth a piece 
of paper on which there was roughly traced 
a map of the adjacent country. The rivers 
and larger towns even to the borders of Ten- 


A BORROWED HORSE 


293 


nessee and North Carolina were all indi- 
cated. The girl had done more than clothe 
and feed him ; she had even given her enemy 
a clue to the entire region. Grateful, as he 
thought of what this meant for him, as well 
as how much it must have cost the girl who, 
as he was aware, was intense in her devotion- 
to the cause of the Confederacy, the young 
soldier thrust the rude map back into his 
pocket and continued his investigations. 

He did not find anything in the other pock- 
ets until at last he drew out the folded slip 
of paper which he had so strangely received 
at the cabin of Aunt Katy. For an instant 
he gazed at his name, which had been in- 
scribed on the outside. Evidently the writer 
had used a small charred stick to do his writ- 
ing, and yet the name — ^‘Taylor Cooper’^ — 
was entirely legible. 

Hastily opening the paper which in the 
confusion of his flight from Miss Sallie^s 
house had been forgotten, he gazed a moment 
in astonishment at the one word it con- 
tained — ‘‘Winnisboro.’^ What did the word 
mean? What was implied in the strange 


294 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


missive? Was the name that of a place or of 
a man? Taylor had never before heard the 
word. 

Again he drew forth the map which Miss 
Sallie had made and given him as he believed. 
There, not far from the Wateree river was 
a little place which had the name inscribed on 
the slip which he had received. But what 
was the relation between Winnisboro and 
Taylor Cooper? Had some one written him 
from there? If so, for what purpose? Or 
was it meant that he was to seek the place ? 

Consulting his map again, Taylor con- 
cluded that the little place was forty or more 
miles distant from Columbia. At all events 
it was north of Camp Sorghum, and the di- 
rection in which it was located of itself ap- 
pealed to him. 

For several minutes he studied the slip, 
striving to discover some clue as to its writer 
and his purpose. The scrawling writing was 
in a hand which he was unable to recognize. 
It was quite possible that Erwin might have 
been at Aunt Katy’s cabin before he arrived 
there. The colored woman had acknowl- 
edged that other escaping prisoners had been 


A BOBEOWFD HORSE 295 


aided by her. Taylor had no difficulty in 
conjecturing that Aunt Katy was one of the 
faithful negroes who were aiding the soldiers 
of the North. Doubtless her cabin, too, was 
one in the long line where escaping prisoners 
were received and cared for, and then as- 
sisted on their way to the North. 

But what of Winnisboro! Was that a link 
in the chain! Was he expected to find his 
way there? And if he succeeded in his at- 
tempt, whom was he to seek in the town? 
The mystery was by no means cleared when 
at last the young soldier thrust the note back 
into his pocket and resumed his watch. 

The hours dragged on slowly, but only a 
few people passed the place. An aged negro 
had been one. He was seated in a rude little 
two-wheeled cart, which was drawn by a 
small and cadaverous black ox. At first Tay- 
lor had been tempted to hail the man, but 
thinking better of his purpose he had not 
done so. A white man having long yellow 
hair and a tobacco-stained, straggling beard 
as yellow as his hair, had walked down the 
road, but his appearance had been still less 
inviting than the negro’s. 


296 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


The afternoon crept slowly on and at last 
the dusk appeared. Not another sign had 
been seen of the young Confederate officer, 
who had been eager in his pursuit. If he had 
returned, he must have done so by another 
road, Taylor concluded. Even if it was not 
entirely safe for him to resume his flight, it 
would be less perilous than to remain longer 
where he then was. Accordingly Taylor re- 
turned to the place where his horse had been 
left. The time for further action had ar- 
rived. 

A low whinny greeted him as he ap- 
proached the horse. Unfastening him, Tay- 
lor led the animal, upon which his hopes now 
depended, to a brook and permitted him to 
drink his fill. Still not mounting, he led the 
horse by the bridle until the road was again 
before him. 

First satisfying himself that no one was 
within sight, Taylor mounted and turned 
northward. For a time he proceeded slowly, 
maintaining a careful outlook as he advanced. 
Winnisboro, which he now had decided to 
seek, must lie somewhere to the north. This 


A BORROWED HORSE 297 

was the sole idea of direction in his mind 
now. 

He passed several hnts or houses, but not 
one appeared inviting, and he dared not stop 
to make the inquiries he was eager to make. 
He must save the strength of his horse, too, 
for at any moment he might be compelled 
to flee for his life. 

An hour had elapsed and the darkness had 
deepened. The sky was overcast and signs 
of an approaching storm were multiplying. 
Taylor had crossed two small streams, his 
horse’s hoofs sounding noisily on the timbers 
of the rude bridges, and now not far before 
him he discovered another bridge. As he 
came nearer, his anxiety increased when he 
became aware that before him was a long 
covered bridge that spanned the stream. 
With every sense alert he slowly entered the 
dark structure. Not a sound was heard un- 
til he had come nearly to the exit. Then the 
silence was broken by the sharp call of a man. 


i 


CHAPTER XXIV 

CAPTAIISr HITT^S BAND 

The first impulse in Taylor’s mind was to 
turn sharply about and flee back across the 
bridge. He could see the man before him in 
the dim light, and apparently he was alone. 
The gun in the hands of the man; however, 
was a deciding element, even if Taylor had 
not been aware that his horse was so nearly 
exhausted as to make flight well-nigh impos- 
sible. 

^^Who goes there?” again demanded the 
man. 

‘‘A friend,” Taylor responded quietly. 
The sharp call implied that the stranger was 
a soldier, and also that a camp might be near. 
The fact, however, that no one else was to 
be seen was somewhat reassuring. Trusting 
to his ability to explain his presence on the 
bridge, or at least to avoid arousing the 
man’s further suspicions, Taylor rode for- 
298 


CAPTAIN HITT’S BAND 299 

ward in response to the call for him to ad- 
vance. 

As he passed ont from the darkness of the 
bridge the man seized Taylor ^s horse by the 
bridle and peered intently into the young 
rider ^s face. The searching scrutiny was 
borne quietly by Taylor, who was doing his 
utmost to maintain an air of indifference. 

‘‘Whar’ you ’-all goin’T’ inquired the 
guard sharply. 

‘^Winnisboro.” 

‘‘What fur?” 

“I don’t know that it concerns you.” 

“We’ve orders t’ stop ev’ry man an’ make 
him give an account of himself,” said the 
soldier almost apologetically, as Taylor 
thought. 

“That’s right,” responded Taylor. 
“Can’t he too careful in these times.” 

“Yo’-all might be a stranger in these hyar 
pahts ? ’ ’ 

“That’s correct.” 

“Whar’ did yo’-all come from?” 

“Just now I came from Captain George 
Hitt’s.” 


300 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


Apparently the man was interested at 
once, and Taylor regretted what he had said. 
It was too late to recall the words, however, 
and the young soldier was aware that now he 
must do his utmost to play well the part he 
had assumed. 

^‘Is the cap^n cornin’ shortly?” 

‘‘Yes, sir. He was in great haste the last 
time I saw him.” 

“Yo’ had bettah stop an’ explain to the 
lieutenant. ’ ’ 

“That isn’t necessary,” said Taylor, 
hastily. “Just now I am needed at Winnis- 
boro, and the captain himself will soon be 
here. He can explain to the lieutenant better 
than I can.” 

“That may be so, sub,” said the guard, 
dubiously. “The lieutenant’s orders was 
fo’ me t’ bring ev’ry suspicious man t’ 
him.” 

“You don’t think I’m suspicious, do you?” 
inquired Taylor, attempting to speak lightly. 

“Yo’-all are a stranger.” 

“To you, but not to the captain.” 

“Thet may be so, stranger.” 

“I’m in great haste now. I don’t think 


CAPTAIN HITT’S BAND 301 

Captain Hitt would take it kindly if you de- 
layed me/’ 

^'Was you a goin’ to Win’sboro fo’ th’ 
cap’n?” 

it hadn’t been for him I shouldn’t even 
have thought of going there.” 

What’s wrong, Phoeb?” inquired a sec- 
ond man who now drew near out of the dark- 
ness. 

If Taylor’s horse had been only measur- 
ably fresh the young soldier would have at- 
tempted to dash past the men. The position 
was more perilous than it had been before, 
and Taylor’s alarm increased. It was well- 
nigh impossible to escape two men who 
blocked his way. His wits must serve him 
now, Taylor decided. 

Nothin’ wrong, I reck’n. Lieutenant,” 
said the guard. ^^This yere man is just 
come from Cap’n Hitt’s, an’ is on his way to 
Win ’boro.” 

^^From Captain Hitt’s!” exclaimed the 
lieutenant quickly. That’s good. Did he 
send any word to me?” he added, as he 
stepped forward, and in the dim light tried 
to look into Taylor’s face. 


302 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


‘‘No, sir,’^ responded Taylor. 

“That^s strange.’’ 

Taylor did not feel called upon to explain 
what he himself did not know, and accord- 
ingly was silent. 

‘ ‘ When did you leave the cap ’n T ’ inquired 
the officer. 

“This afternoon.” 

The lieutenant appeared to be startled by 
the simple reply, although Taylor was unable 
to comprehend the cause. 

“Yo’-all will have to stop and explain,” 
said the officer at last. 

“I haven’t anything to explain.” 

“Yo’-all will have to explain that, too,” the 
lieutenant suggested. 

“I don’t understand.” The confusion of 
Taylor was as great as his fear, now that 
every way of escape seemingly was being 
blocked. 

“Dismount and follow me,” said the of- 
ficer, abruptly. 

There was no help for it, and the young 
soldier dismounted. “You will not keep me 
very long, will you?” he inquired. 

“That’s as may be,” replied the lieuten- 


CAPTAIN HITT^S BAND 


303 


ant, enigmatically. ^‘That^s Cap’n George 
horse, Mag, all right enough,’’ he suggested 
to the guard, as soon as he had inspected 
the animal as well as the insufficient light 
permitted. 

reck’n th’ man ’s all right, sho’ 
enough,” responded the guard. 

The officer did not refer to his own impres- 
sions, and turning to Taylor, he said 
briefly, ‘ ‘ Come with me. ’ ’ 

Turning sharply about, the officer led the 
way into a path which Taylor had not before 
seen. The way led through bushes, and was 
at right angles to the road. The young sol- 
dier’s heart was filled with misgivings now, 
but apparently he made no objection, as he ^ 
proceeded beside his guide. 

The two men had not advanced more than 
fifty yards when Taylor beheld before him 
a camping place. A smouldering fire was 
burning in the center, about which a score 
of men were lying on the ground, and 
wrapped in blankets. 

The scene was not comforting, and Tay- 
lor’s alarm increased at the sight of the 
sleeping men before him. In some way, he 


304 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


was confident, they were connected with Cap- 
tain George Hitt, though why they were here 
was a problem for which he could not think 
of any solution. 

The return of the lieutenant did not 
arouse his followers, although one or two 
men stirred at his approach. 

‘^Sit down there!’’ said the lieutenant to 
Taylor, when they drew near the fire. As 
his suggestion was obeyed, he continued, 
‘‘Now, then, stranger, th’ best thing fo’ yo’- 
all to do is t’ make a clean breast of it.” 

“Of what?” 

“Of the whole thing.” 

“I don’t understand.” 

“What are yo’ doin’?” 

“ ‘Doing!’ Can’t you see? I’m not do- 
ing anything.” 

“Perhaps yo’ll say yo’ aren’t a Yank?” 

“Do I look like one?” inquired Taylor, 
striving to speak lightly, although his alarm 
was renewed by the startling and unexpected 
question. 

“I can’t jest say about the ‘looks,’ 
stranger. I reck’n I can tell better ’bout 
that when it’s daylight. But from what I 


CAPTAIN EITT^S BAND 305 

heahy I s^pect yo^ are a Yank, as sho’ ’s yo^re 
born/’ 

^^Wbat have you beard?” 

‘‘What did I heah you say was the time 
when yo’-all lef’ Cap’n George Hitt’s place, 
suh?” 

“I don’t think I mentioned the hour.” 

“Yo’ sho’ly did not. But yo’ made a ref- 
erence toe th’ time.” 

“This afternoon,” suggested Taylor. 

“That’s it, stranger. Yanks say ‘after- 
noon.’ Down yere, we-uns all say ‘evenin’, 
suh.” 

It was true, Taylor had betrayed himself 
by his speech. He had endeavored to say as 
little as possible, but even the few words he 
had spoken had revealed him as he was to 
the keen-witted officer. 

“I lived north when I was a small boy,” 
began Taylor. “My grandfather lived in 
New York State, and I have spent many a 
summer with him.” 

The statement, of course, was not untrue in 
a way, but the eager young soldier was not 
confident his explanation would be well re- 
ceived. 


306 FOR THE STARS AND STRIFES 


‘‘That may all be as you say, stranger,’^ 
said the officer. “I’m not denyin’ a word of 
it. Perhaps yo’ mought be willin’ toe in- 
form me whar yo’ home mought be?” 

“What good will that do? You think I 
am a Yank, and anything I can do or say 
won’t do any good now. I think I’ll — ^you 
are expecting Captain Hitt, soon?” he ab- 
ruptly added. 

“I reck’n Cap’n George mought turn up 
mos’ any time.” 

“Then our best plan will be to wait until 
he comes.” 

“Thet’s fo’ yo’ toe say, stranger.” 

“If you are going to hold me here, I think 
I prefer to wait until Captain Hitt comes.” 

“That’s agreeable to me.” 

“It may not be to the captain,” Taylor 
suggested. 

“I shan’t dispute yo’ as to thet.” 

For a moment there was silence which was 
broken by the approach of the horse Taylor 
had been riding, now being led by one of the 
men whom the lieutenant had sent for it. 

“This is the cap’n’s horse all right 
enough,” remarked the lieutenant, “and 


CAPTAIN HITT’S BAND 


307 


everything may be just as yo’-all says it is, 
but yo^-all will have toe stay with us, stran- 
ger, till be himself comes an’ says so.” 

‘‘That’s what I suggested, wasn’t it!” 

“I b’lieve yo’ did refer toe it. Now, then, 
stranger, I reck’n we mougbt as well turn in. 
In the mo’nin’ things may look ditferent. 
Perhaps I’d better inform yo’ thet the’s a 
guyard about this yere camp, an’ any 
man who tries fo’ toe get away is likely toe 
heah a gun go oft without much waitin’ fo’ 
toe find out whether he happens toe be a 
Yank or the first cousin o’ Jefferson Davis. 
I reck’n yo’ understan’s toe what I’m re- 
ferrin’P’ 

“Yes. I think I take your meaning.” 

“Then we mougbt ’s well turn in, sub. I 
regret that I am not able to set hefo ’ a friend 
o’ th’ cap’n what is mo’ becomin’, but I 
reck’n yo’ all won’t object t’ sharin’ my tent 
with me?” 

“That will suit me all right,” responded 
Taylor. In a few minutes he and his captor 
were lying on blankets on the ground of the 
sole tent apparently in the possession of the 
band. 


308 FOE THE STARS AND STRIPES 


For a time schemes of escaping so filled 
the thoughts of the young soldier that all 
else was banished from his mind. Mani- 
festly he was in the midst of a small force 
which in some way was connected with Miss 
Sallie^s brother. He was not even positive 
that he would be able to recognize the young 
captain if he should see him. 

The momentary glimpse he had obtained 
of the man seated at a table not far from the 
door which Taylor had swiftly passed in 
the hallway, had not been sufficient to fasten 
the recollection of the young officer’s face in 
his memory. On the other hand, there was 
no question that the captain would recog- 
nize his own horse, and naturally conclude 
that the rider had been the man who had 
unceremoniously departed with it from the 
Hitt plantation. 

Taylor’s thoughts were far from pleasing. 
To attempt to escape now was not to be con- 
sidered. His sole hope rested upon the fail- 
ure of the young captain to return before he 
himself had found or made some way out of 
his present difficulties. The prospect of 


CAPTAIN EITT’S BAND 309 

either was not bright, but at last Taylor fell 
asleep. 

It was daylight when he was awakened 
by the sound of voices near the entrance to 
the tent. Bring him out!’’ Taylor heard 
someone say, sharply. Concluding that the 
captain had returned and was demanding 
that the unknown rider of his horse should 
be produced, Taylor at once arose and 
stepped outside, there to find himself face to 
face with a young Confederate officer whom 
he at once recognized by his striking resem- 
blance to Miss Sallie. 

‘‘You are the man that stole my horse, are 
you?” demanded the young officer sharply, 
as he looked sternly at Taylor. 

“That is too strong a word. Captain.” 

“It is, is it? And I sent you to Winnis- 
boro, did I? And you wanted to wait until 
I came back, did you? Well, here I am! 
What have you to say?” 

As Taylor did not reply, the angry captain 
turned to two men near him and said, 
‘ ‘ Search him ! Search him from his head to 


his toes.” 


310 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


It was useless to resist, and in a moment 
the search began. The first discovery was 
of the map Miss Sallie had made. When 
the paper was handed to the captain, he 
glanced sharply at it, and then looking up, 
said quickly — ‘‘It is just as I thought. The 
man is a spy.^’ 


CHAPTEE XXV 


UNDEE GUABD 

^‘You are mistaken,” said Taylor quietly, 
although a great fear had arisen in his heart 
at the charge. He was well aware that there 
were many, many things to confirm the young 
captain in his belief. First of all, Taylor 
realized that his speech betrayed him, for 
it bore slight resemblance to that of the men 
about him. Then, too, the vest he wore was 
part of the uniform of a Confederate soldier. 
The map was also an added cause of sus- 
picion, while the discovery of his horse in 
the possession of the prisoner did not tend 
to soothe the angry feelings of the captain, 
even if it did not of itself do more than 
imply a theft. 

‘‘That will be for you to explain to the 
court-martial,” replied Captain Hitt brusque- 
ly* 

“Will you believe me if I tell you exactly 
who I am?” inquired Taylor. 

311 


312 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


“lai listen/^ 

‘‘I am a Union soldier. I am perfectly 
willing to own that. I have been a prisoner 
in Libby, at Danville, and then at Camp Sor- 
ghum, near Columbia. I escaped from the 
camp — 

‘‘When? How?^^ interrupted the young 
officer. 

“A few days ago — I can’t tell you just how 
long ago it was. How I got away I shan’t 
explain. It might hurt some of the other 
poor fellows there who may be suffering as 
much as I did while I was in the horrible 
place.” 

“Go on,” said the captain, quietly. 

“Well, I managed to get away — ” 

“Were you alone?” 

“No, sir.” 

“How many were with you? Where are 
they now?” 

“I wish I knew where they were,” said 
Taylor. 

“You don’t know?” 

“I don’t.” 

“How many got away when you did?” 

“I shall not tell you.” 


UNDER GUARD 


313 


‘‘Go on with your story, sir/^ 

“There isnT much more to tell. Some- 
how, I managed to keep out of the hands of 
the rebels until to-day After I got your 
horse I thought I was sure to gain our lines. 
Now I wish I had never seen the animal. 

The young officer laughed for the first time 
in the interview. “Then you are the man 
who shut me in the cloak room of my own 
house, are you? If you donT mind, I wish 
you would explain to me what you were do- 
ing in the house — ^how you happened to be 
there. ’ ^ 

“I was hiding.” 

“In the house?” 

“Yes, sir.” 

“That sounds well, but it isnT very likely, 
that’s all I have to say.” 

“It is true.” 

“You weren’t looking for papers or any- 
thing?” 

“No, sir.” 

“What made you go to the house?” 

“I found the door on the side piazza open, 
and I went in. I knew that a search for 
Union men wouldn’t be made in Captain 


314 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


Hitt’s house. In one way the place was dan- 
gerous, but in another it was the safest place 
I could find.” 

‘‘Where did you hide?” 

“Upstairs — in the attic.” 

“And you did not meet anyone in the 
house?” inquired the captain, incredulously. 
“That isn’t very likely.” 

“It’s more likely than that anyone in your 
house would help me.” 

“That may he so, sir. It’s fortunate for 
you that Sallie — my sister — did not see you. 
She hates Yankees worse than any girl in 
the South does.” 

“So I heard — so I have heard,” Taylor 
hastily corrected himself. 

“Where did you get those clothes you are 
wearing?” 

“I found them in the attic.” 

“And helped yourself to them?” 

“I did,” said Taylor, drily. “Wouldn’t 
you?” 

“No, sir. I wouldn’t wear a Yankee rag 
to keep me from freezing! You have not 
told me about the map.” 

“It is just a rude little affair, as you can 


UNDER GUARD 


315 


see. There isnT a mark on it to show a 
thing about the rebel camps, or men. It’s 
just a plain paper that I thought would help 
me to work north.” 

‘^Your men are south,” said the captain 
bitterly. ‘‘That villain, Sherman — ” The 
officer checked himself abruptly. 

“I do not know where Sherman is,” said 
Taylor. “We prisoners were not kept in- 
formed about the doings of the armies. I 
wanted to know, though. Has Eichmond 
fallen?” 

“Eichmond fallen!” retorted the captain. 
“When the sun falls out of the sky, then 
you may look for the fall of Eichmond, and 
not before.” 

“What is General Sherman doing so far 
south, then?” 

“Doing? He’s done everything a fiend 
incarnate ever did. He has robbed our 
houses, burned our barns, turned the negroes 
against us — ” 

“I have heard all that,” interrupted Tay- 
lor, “but you aren’t fair yourself.” 

“Not fair? What do you mean?” 

“Just what I say. You wouldn’t expect 


316 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


General Sherman to come down South and 
have his men sit around in tents knitting 
stockings or doing fancy embroidery, would 
you? I never heard that war was a pic- 
nic — 

‘^Did you ever see my sister — Miss Sallie 
Hitt?’’ abruptly demanded the officer. 

For a moment Taylor was well-nigh stag- 
gered by the question. He was not minded 
to betray the aid which the young girl had 
given him. He understood how intense her 
feeling of loyalty to the Confederacy was, 
but if it was even suspected that she had 
aided an escaping Union prisoner, even her 
devotion would be questioned, and her trou- 
bles would be greatly multiplied. His mo- 
mentary hesitation was manifestly not pleas- 
ing to the young officer, whom Taylor, as he 
glanced up, found to be sternly regarding 
him. 

‘Hs your sister the young lady with light 
hair and blue eyes that are very bright? Is 
she tall? Is she the one who was singing 
most of the time?” 

‘‘You seem to have a pretty full descrip- 
tion. ’ ’ 


UNDER GUARD 


317 


^^Well, if she is the one I mean, then I 
did see her. She must have been the young 
lady who was so angry when I ‘borrowed’ 
your horse. She was shouting for some one 
to come and stop or ^hoot the horse thief. I 
saw her, and I heard her, too. If all the girls 
in the South are like her — ” 

“That was Sallie, all right,” said the 
young captain, plainly led into other thoughts 
by Taylor’s reference to Miss Sallie ’s fran- 
tic calls for aid. “Your story may be a true 
one,” he added. “Indeed, I am inclined to 
believe it is true. But you will have to go 
with the detail — ” 

“Where?” 

“South — to our men in the rear of Sher- 
man. I am sorry I can’t go with you my- 
self, but I’ll see to it that you don’t lose your 
way. I must stay up here and be on the 
lookout for Yankee spies and escaping pris- 
oners, to say nothing of our deserters. The 
hills of Tennessee and North Carolina are 
too tempting for such fellows. We have to 
cut them off if we can — and we can. You 
can tell your story at the court-martial. Per- 
haps you will be believed. I am inclined to 


318 FOE THE STARS AND STRIPES 


think you are telling me the truth, but I have 
not found that I could just take the word of 
every man in these times — and I^m afraid 
it hasn’t made very much difference whether 
he came from the North or South.’’ 

The young captain held a whispered con- 
versation with one of his men, then mount- 
ing his horse, which had been rested and fed, 
rode away from the camp. After his de- 
parture, some plain food was brought Tay- 
lor, which he eagerly ate, but not a word was 
spoken to him by any of the men, nor were 
any plans for departure apparent. That 
Taylor was to be taken to the South, he did 
not doubt, though how he was to go he could 
not discover. 

Indeed, the entire day passed and still not 
a word was spoken concerning the departure. 
At nightfall he begged for the privilege of a 
bath in the cold waters of the stream in the 
valley below the camping place. The priv- 
ilege was granted, and two of the force ac- 
companied him to the bank, although neither 
of them shared or apparently approved the 
project. 

Greatly refreshed, Taylor returned to the 


UNDER GUARD 


319 


camp, and as soon as snpper was served, he 
was ordered within a tent. There he 
stretched himself npon the ground and slept 
heavily until he was awakened in the morn- 
ing. 

Again food was served the prisoner, and 
despite the apparent hopelessness of his po- 
sition, Taylor ate heartily, not knowing when 
a similar opportunity would be had. Soon 
after sunrise he was summoned by two of the 
men and told that he must accompany them. 
His questions as to their destination were 
not answered, but soon he was aware that 
they were proceeding over the road on which 
he had traveled the previous day. One of 
the two men who were with him was riding 
an old and stiffened horse. The other man 
was walking behind the young prisoner, who 
was compelled to advance in a position be- 
tween the horse and the second man. 

Somehow, the feeling in Taylor’s heart 
was not entirely one of despair. To have 
been retaken, after his successful efforts in 
leaving Camp Sorghum, and the journey he 
had made for what he was positive must be 
twenty miles or more, was certainly not in- 


320 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


spiring. And yet the information he had ob- 
tained from Captain Hitt that General Sher- 
man army was in Georgia, was in turn a 
source of hope. Exchanges of prisoners 
might be made, and as Taylor was confident 
that he would be successful in convincing the 
proper authorities that he really was what 
he claimed to be, and not a spy, there was 
hope that he might be among the fortunate 
number to be returned to the Union army. 
The determination to escape also, was by no 
means slumbering. He was watchful of 
every step the little party was taking, pre- 
pared to make the most of any opportunity 
that presented itself. As mile after mile 
was covered in the weary journey, and the 
attendants were keenly observant of him all 
the way, Taylor almost decided that for the 
present his wisest course would be to con- 
form fully to the demands of his guard. 

He several times attempted to draw them 
into conversation, but his efforts were un- 
successful. At intervals the men exchanged 
places, and the one who before had been serv- 
ing as a rear guard, advanced and took his 
companion's place on the back of the horse, 


UNDER GUARD 


321 


and the former rider became the guard. If 
he had possessed any means of doing so, 
Taylor would have tried to bribe the men, 
but he had no money, even the few Confeder- 
ate dollars which Aunt Katy had given him 
having been given up when the captain had 
searched his person. 

Taylor enviously watched the two men 
when they exchanged places, and suddenly 
decided that he, too, was entitled to ride at 
least a part of the way. For a long time he 
had been walking in silence. Suddenly with a 
groan he seated himself upon the ground, 
and the little procession at once halted. 

‘‘WhaFs th’ trouble, YankF’ inquired one 
of the men. 

^^IVe turned my ankle, replied Taylor, 
groaning heavily. 

‘‘That’s too bad. I reck ’n yo’-all ’ll hev 
ter keep on.” 

“I can’t walk,” replied Taylor, attempting 
to rise as he spoke, and then sinking back 
to the ground with a heartrending groan. 
“If I only had some hot water!” 

“Can’t be had. Yo’ll feel better after a 


hit.” 


322 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


‘‘Perhaps I will. It^s good of you to wait 
for me.’^ 

“We haven’t said we’d wait. We jest got 
t’ be at th’ crossroads by two o’clock.” 

Taylor’s groans became still more pro- 
nounced and agonizing. 

“Let tb’ Yank ride a bit,” suggested the 
man on horseback. 

“Walkin’ is good enough for tb’ blue- 
belly,” retorted the second man. 

“Naw, Tom. We-uns ’ll lose time. Give 
him a lift.” 

Groaning loudly, Taylor was helped to a 
seat on the back of the horse. The little 
procession resumed its advance, but any hope 
Taylor bad cherished that bis horse would be 
of assistance in escaping was lost when one 
of the men, drawing bis pistol, an example 
which his companion followed, called, “Now, 
none o’ yer tricks, Yank! We-uns hev got 
yo’ all spotted, and th’ first sign o’ trouble 
makes th’ gun pop. Understand?” 

Taylor was convinced that he did, and re- 
plied accordingly. He strove to console 
himself with the knowledge that, even if es- 
cape was impossible, riding was much more 


UNDER GUARD 


323 


easy than walking, an assurance that became 
more impressive when he glanced at the men 
toiling over the rough road. 

The ‘‘lame’^ prisoner was not requested 
to give up his seat until two hours later, 
when the little party arrived at what evi- 
dently was a small camp. In the center of 
the band of twenty men Taylor beheld a half- 
dozen who evidently were prisoners like him- 
self. His surprise was even greater than his 
interest when he beheld both Erwin and Sam- 
uel in the number. 


CHAPTEE XXVI 


CAEBYING A LOAD 

The arrival of tlie party apparently 
aroused but little interest in the assembly, 
even the prisoners scarcely glancing at the 
newcomers. Indeed, Taylor had as yet not 
been seen by either of his friends when he 
alighted from the horse, which his guard had 
permitted him to ride all the way to the 
camp. 

Proceeding at once to the two boys, all 
signs of his lameness having disappeared, 
Taylor approached Erwin, who was seated 
upon the ground, and touched his friend’s 
shoulder. The condition of Erwin was such 
as to startle the young soldier. He was so 
thin that his face appeared to be emaciated. 
His clothing was in tatters, and his complete 
dejection was manifest in his bearing. Tay- 
lor himself was thin and worn, but his 
friend’s condition was evidently so much 
worse than his own that for the moment all 
324 


CARRYING A LOAD 


325 


his thoughts were centered upon Erwin. 

As Erwin slowly turned his head toward 
the one who had touched his shoulder, his 
eyes betrayed no expression of interest or 
even of surprise. He gazed stolidly at his 
recent companion and did not speak. 

‘‘How did you happen to come hereT’ in- 
quired Taylor. 

“The rebs brought me,’’ replied Erwin. 

“Where did they get you?” 

“I don’t know.” 

“Don’t know? What do you mean?” 

“I don’t know and I don’t care,” replied 
Erwin, dejectedly. 

“How long have you been here?” 

Erwin shook his head and was silent. 

Taylor’s fears were aroused by the ex- 
haustion of his comrade. Something must 
be done for him, and at once, he concluded, 
although what aid could be secured was not 
apparent. As Taylor looked helplessly about 
him, he saw Samuel approaching, and in- 
stantly he turned to the lank prisoner. 
“Uncle Sam, where were you and Erwin 
caught ? ’ ’ 

“I don’t know anything about Erwin. I 


326 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


hadn^t seen him since you ran away from 
me.’^ 

didn’t run away from you.” 

‘‘Yes, you did!” 

“Where?” 

“I don’t know the name of the place. It 
was in the road where we saw the bush- 
whackers.” 

If Taylor had not been so depressed by the 
sight of Erwin’s sufferings, he would have 
laughed. Eun away? Why, he had waited 
vainly for Samuel to follow him. The last 
glimpse he had had of his unfortunate fellow 
townsman had been as the latter was leaping 
frantically from the road for the shelter of 
the adjacent woods. And now Uncle Sam 
was aggrieved because his friend had not 
‘ ‘ waited ’ ’ for him. 

“Never mind that, now. WTiat can we do 
for Erwin ? ’ ’ 

“Nothing, I guess.” 

“But we must. He’s in bad shape.” 

“So am 1. I’ve got a blister on one of 
my feet. I’m hungry, and I hate the whole 
war! I wish I was at home or lived down 
here.” 


CARRYING A LOAD 


327 


‘‘Why don’t yon join the rebels?” 

“I’ve been thinking of it.” 

“That’s right. A man with no more to 
him than there is to you belongs there. I’ll 
give yon a couple of kicks to help yon on.” 

Taylor turned sharply away and at once 
sought one of the soldiers. ‘ ‘ Can you tell me 
where you found this man?” he inquired, 
pointing to Erwin as he spoke. 

“I picked him up myself. I found him 
sick about three miles from here in old Eich- 
ard’s cabin.” 

“Why didn’t you leave him there? He’s 
a sick man. ’ ’ 

“We-all will attend to his troubles pretty 
quick, sub.” 

“What do you mean by that?” 

“We’ll send him to the hospital.” 

“When you reach camp?” 

“Yaas, sub.” 

“When will that be?” 

“Eight soon, I reckon.” 

“But the man is sick. He can’t travel,” 
protested Taylor. 

“He sho’ly does look lak he is feelin’ 
po’ly.” 


328 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


‘‘He^s starving/^ 

reckon the’ aint any o’ us troubled with 
high livin’. Yo’ wait right yere an’ I’ll see 
what I can do fo’ yo’.” 

The soldier turned away and in a brief 
time returned with a piece of corn bread and 
a single roasted sweet potato in his hands. 
‘‘This is th’ best I can do fo’ yo’, suh,” he 
said quietly, as he offered Taylor the food. 

“Thank you. You are good to us. Did 
this come out of your own rations ? ’ ’ 

The soldier laughed good-naturedly, as he 
replied, “Don’t yo’ trouble yourself about 
that. I reckon I shan’t have to give up my 
supper many times to that po’ fellow. He 
won’t be livin’ on co’n bread or anything 
else much longer. ’ ’ 

“What yo’-all doin’, Ed?” demanded an 
approaching soldier who had seen his fellow 
soldier’s generous act. 

“Nothin’ much, I reckon. Jest helpin’ th’ 
Yank t’ a bit o’ forage.” 

“You’re a fool, Ed! I wouldn’t give one 
of the bluebellies a crumb if it kep’ him from 
starvin’ t’ death.” 


CARRYING A LOAD 


329 


‘‘I reckon no more yo^ wouldn% John/’ 
said the first soldier, simply. 

^^Yo’re right, I wouldn’t! If th’ Yanks 
got what they deserved, they’d all be — 

'‘What you got there, Taylor?” inter- 
rupted Samuel, who at this moment ap- 
proached and stood near, looking longingly 
at the food in the hands of his friend. 

“Something for Erwin to eat. This man 
gave it to me,” Taylor added, as he looked 
at the Confederate guard. “I hope he’ll fare 
as well when he falls into our hands.” 

“That’s all right, Yank. I’ll repo’t if I 
ever gits whar I need yore help.” 

“Yo’-all bettah shet Ed up in an idiot 
’sylum, if he ever is a prisoner,” said the 
second Confederate, scornfully. 

Taylor laughed good-naturedly, and at 
once retraced his way to the place where he 
bad left Erwin. By his side walked Samuel, 
silent, his eyes seldom turned away from 
the food his companion was carrying. 

“You’re going to go snucks, aren’t you, 
Taylor?” he inquired at last. 

For an instant Taylor’s eyes flashed om- 


330 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


inously. Then, without replying to the 
query, he said, ‘‘Uncle Sam, how did the rebs 
get youT^ 

“I walked right into a camp of five bush- 
whackers. ^ ’ 

“Without suspecting who or what they 
wereT’ 

“I might ’a’ suspected, hut they had some 
chickens roasting over a fire — 

“I see,’^ interrupted Taylor, dryly. “Un- 
cle Sam, 1^11 give you a piece of this corn 
bread on one condition.’’ 

“What’s that?” 

‘ ‘ To-morrow morning, or whenever we are 
taken out of this place, you and I will take 
turns carrying Erwin on our backs when we 
have to wade a stream. Erwin is played 
out.” 

“So ’m I.” 

“You whine as if you were good for what 
I’m asking, anyway.” 

“I agree if you’ll agree to what I propose, 
too.” 

“What is that?” 

‘ ‘ That we draw cuts to see whether you or 
I’ll be the first.” 


CARRYING A LOAD 


331 


“I’ll do that,” said Taylor, quickly. 

“Hold your horses! I’m not all done yet. 
What I propose is that the one that draws 
the cut to carry Erwin should come back and 
take the other one across. There’s no use 
in both of us getting wet, is there ? ’ ’ 

“Not a bit. I’ll agree to it. Here’s your 
corn bread. Uncle Sam,” said Taylor, as he 
divided the bread and gave a piece to his 
companion. 

When the two boys arrived at the place 
where Erwin was seated, Taylor said ea- 
gerly, “We’ve been lucky, Erwin. We 
found a reb who gave us some supper. 
Here’s yours. You must eat every crumb 
of it.” 

As Erwin sat quickly erect and took and 
almost ravenously began to devour the food, 
his friend smiled and nodded his head ap- 
provingly. “You’ll do. We’ll get you back 
to York State yet,” he said to himself. When 
the last crumb had been eaten by the fam- 
ished prisoner, Taylor turned to Samuel and 
inquired, “Got your ‘cuts’ ready?” 

“Yes,” replied Samuel, extending his left 
hand, which was tightly closed, two blades 


332 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


of grass appearing between his thumb and 
forefinger. ‘‘Which ^11 you takeT^ 

“Wait a minute. Is it the long or the 
short that is ‘it’?’’ 

“The long.” 

“All right. Then I’ll take the short,” 
said Taylor promptly, as he drew forth one 
of the straws. “Here! Hold on! We 
don’t do that,” he added hastily, as Samuel 
attempted to break the straw remaining in 
his hand. 

“I was just fooling,” said Samuel, blandly. 
“You’ve got me, all right.” 

“I intend to keep you, too!” retorted Tay- 
lor, sternly. 

“Don’t you be too sure o’ that!” 

Taylor did not reply, because at that mo- 
ment word was passed that “supper” had 
been provided for the prisoners. It is true, 
sweet potatoes provided the sole article of 
food, but the men were weary and hungry, 
and all eagerly devoured their portions, even 
Erwin joining in the repast with as great an 
appearance of enjoyment as when his friend 
had brought him food a little while before. 

It was soon learned that the party was to 


CARRYING A LOAD 


333 


remain for the night in the place where it 
then was. Taylor and Erwin, together with 
the other prisoners, were taken to the local 
jail, and the two boys, at their own request, 
were assigned to one cell. Strong as was 
Taylor ^s desire to talk to his friend, he said 
but little when night fell. To his delight Er- 
win was soon sleeping soundly. When morn- 
ing came and roasted sweet potatoes once 
more were served, Erwin appeared like a 
different boy from the one of the preceding 
night. Food, even of such a quality as had 
been provided, sleep, and, more than all, the 
company of Taylor, had served to revive 
somewhat the drooping spirits of the young 
soldier. 

As for Taylor, he was more firmly resolved 
than ever he had been to attempt to escape. 
The horrors of prison life were too vivid 
still for him to be reconciled to the thought 
of again being shut up in a pen. When at 
last preparations for the departure of the 
band were completed, he was rejoiced when 
he discovered that Erwin, Samuel and him- 
self were assigned to two men. Apparently 
it had been deemed wise not to take the half- 


334 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


dozen prisoners in a body to their destina- 
tion, whatever that might prove to be, but to 
divide the party into two divisions, assign 
an armed guard of two soldiers to each, and 
leave the other men free to continue their 
search for escaped prisoners, and for de- 
serters from the Confederate army. 

Soon after sunrise the three boys de- 
parted. The guards both marched behind 
the prisoners, directing them in their course, 
but otherwise apparently in no fear of at- 
tempts to escape being made. Each guard 
was fully armed, carrying a carbine over his 
shoulder, and a brace of pistols showing 
threateningly from their belts. 

‘‘Here’s your place!” exclaimed Taylor to 
Samuel, as they approached the ford in a 
stream about twenty feet wide. ‘ ‘ Carry Er- 
win first, and then come back for me.” 

The guards laughed, as they heard the de- 
mand, but neither made any objection to the 
proposal. 

“Wait till we come to the next,” suggested 
Samuel. 

‘ ‘ This is the next. Take up your load ! ’ ’ 

“That’s right, Yank,” laughed one of the 


CARRYING A LOAD 335 

guard. yo’-all make it go, then we-uns 
’ll give yo’ another load.” 

Apparently Samuel was about to refuse, 
but thinking better of his action, stooped 
morosely and Erwin placed himself on the 
back of the tall young soldier. Entering the 
stream, Samuel at once carried his burden 
to the opposite bank of the stream, and then 
called tauntingly to Taylor to follow. It 
was only when the laughing guards threat- 
ened to throw him into the water if he did 
not live up to his promise, that Uncle Sam 
re-entered the stream and crossed to the side 
where Taylor was awaiting him. 

‘^Now, be careful. Uncle Sam,” remarked 
Taylor, when he was on his companion’s 
back in midstream. ‘ ‘ Go slow ! Hi there ! ’ ’ 
he added as his carrier stumbled and almost 
fell. 

However, Samuel at last deposited his bur- 
den safely, and the advance was at once re- 
sumed. Taylor’s chagrin was as great as 
Samuel’s elation, when they soon approached 
a second ford. 

‘^My turn now!” Samuel shouted, as he 
threw his arms about Taylor’s neck. 


336 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


‘^Not much, it retorted Taylor, as 

he flung his burden aside. ^‘You will wait 
till I have taken Erwin across. 

In spite of SamuePs rage, his companion 
was first taken. Then without a word, Tay- 
lor returned, took the long, lank Samuel on 
his back, advanced into the stream, and 
when he was half-way across, deliberately 
sat down, despite the angry shouts of pro- 
test from his passenger. 


CHAPTER XXVII 


THE JAIL 

Letting go his grasp on Taylor ^s neck, 
with a splash Samuel fell into the water. 
Instantly darting forward to the bank, Tay- 
lor halted there and called to his luckless 
comrade, ‘^You dropped something. Uncle 
Sam!^^ 

Sputtering, splashing, apparently unable 
to regain a foothold, the luckless victim be- 
stowed a glance of anger upon his tormentor, 
but did not speak. 

‘^Come here. Uncle Sam, and I’ll pick you 
up,” called Taylor, banteringly. 

Both guards laughed loudly at the discom- 
fiture of their lank prisoner, and even Er- 
win joined, the first time in many days that 
he had betrayed any signs of mirth. 

At last Samuel came stumbling to the 
shore, and, almost beside himself with rage, 
rushed upon Taylor. The derisive calls of 
the guards increased the dripping prisoner’s 
337 


338 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


anger. ^ ‘ I ^11 show you ! ’ ^ he shouted. ‘ ‘ That 
was a mean trick. I’m wet — ” 

^‘I’m sorry,” broke in Taylor. had no 
idea that water was wet. It isn’t like — ” 

By this time Samuel was close upon him, 
and stepping hastily to one side, Taylor 
flung his arms about his angry comrade and 
held him tightly. ^‘Now, Uncle Sam,” he 
said, soothingly, ^^be reasonable. I didn’t 
want to do what I did. In the language of 
our ancestors, ‘It hurt me more than it did 
you.’ I was thinking only of your good. 
You had not learned the lesson we all have 
to learn, and that is, that every one must 
bear his own burden. You did not seem to 
take kindly to the part you agreed to take. 
I feel it to be my duty to impress the needed 
lesson. Besides, Uncle Sam, it will be your 
turn next time, and if you want to, you can 
douse me then. Will you he good!” 

As Samuel had ceased to struggle, and his 
resistance apparently was at an end, Taylor 
released him and turned at once to his guard. 

“I think we are all ready now. Thank 
you for your kindness in waiting.” 

The laughter of the two soldiers was re- 


THE JAIL 


339 


newed, and a deeper scowl appeared on the 
face of the angry Samuel, but otherwise no 
results of the ‘discipline’’ were apparent. 

When another hour had elapsed, Erwin’s 
weariness became so marked that his friend 
begged their attendants to stop for the night. 
The request, however, was unheeded, and the 
little party proceeded on its way, Taylor fre- 
quently being compelled to assist his well- 
nigh exhausted companion. Uncle Sam had 
not spoken since his mishap. He was morose, 
and evidently still angry, and kept to himself 
all the way. 

Taylor was still watchful of an opportu- 
nity to escape the vigilance of the soldiers. 
The men were not ill-disposed, but their vig- 
ilance was unrelaxed. The direction in 
which the little band was moving was still 
southward, and what their destination was 
to be Taylor was satisfied he well knew. 

They were passing through a long stretch 
of woods now. Very few people had been 
met on the way, and the plantations ap- 
parently were for the greater part neglected 
or abandoned. Doubtless the nearness of the 
armies, Taylor concluded, had caused many 


340 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


of the people that dwelt in the region, to 
seek safety in the nearest cities. 

Suddenly one of the guards raised his car- 
bine and fired. The shot was startling to 
the prisoners, not one of whom had discov- 
ered any danger on the way. 

got him!’^ shouted the soldier. ‘‘Look 
out for the men, Jim,’^ he added, as he 
dashed into the woods. 

Still the source of the man^s excitement 
could not be seen. Erwin was trembling in 
his weakness, and crept close to his friend ^s 
side. In a brief time the soldier returned 
and, flinging a black squirrel upon the 
ground at the feet of his comrade, said, “I 
reckon we-all had better stop fo’ supper, 
Jim.’^ 

The second soldier hesitated. “We-uns 
ought t’ be thar by midnight.^’ 

“We ^11 make it, suh. We’ll do better if 
we-uns first have a bite. ’ ’ 

The protests ceased and preparations for 
a fire were at once made. In this task Tay- 
lor assisted, and in a brief time the squirrel 
was being roasted. The savory odor was 
tempting and tantalizing. Taylor’s heart 


THE JAIL 


341 


was heavy, as he watched the hunger ex- 
pressed in Erwin ^s eyes. He himself, how- 
ever, was thinking of other things. The de- 
termination to escape was now so strong as 
to be almost overpowering. Had he been the 
only prisoner, he would have leaped upon the 
guard left in charge when his companion had 
darted into the woods in search of the squir- 
rel he had shot. The desperate project ap- 
peared to be strongly attractive. The peril 
was not to he considered in comparison with 
the meaning of success. The project had 
been abandoned, however, because of Er- 
win’s manifest weakness. He could not, he 
would not abandon his friend in such a time. 
The thoughts of possible means of escape, 
however, in all of which Erwin was included, 
were still foremost in Taylor’s mind, as he 
assisted in the preparation of the squirrel. 
It was not probable that the prisoners would 
be. given any share in the repast, although 
Taylor was not entirely without hope. If 
a bit of the meat should be given him, he was 
planning to give it all to Erwin. His 
friend’s strength now was the most impor- 
tant of all the problems to be faced. 


342 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


At last the browned and roasted squirrel 
was taken from the spit, and the two sol- 
diers prepared to divide it. Some corn 
bread and roasted corn which they had 
brought with them were placed on a log 
nearby, and then one of the men took his 
knife and divided the squirrel into two por- 
tions. 

‘‘Jim, let^s share with th^ Yanks,’’ sug- 
gested the younger of the two soldiers. 

“Co’n bread is good enough fo’ the blue- 
bellies,” growled Jim. 

“Yaas, sub. I reck’n that’s so; but I’m 
so doggoned tired o’ the whole wa’ I don’t 
keer much if I don’t live toe git back t’ 
camp. I reck’n we-uns mought as well be 
good.” 

His companion hesitated a moment, and 
then said, sulkily, “We-uns will take half an’ 
let th’ Yanks have th’ other half.” 

“That’s right,” said Samuel, at once ad- 
vancing and seizing one of the halves before 
anyone could protest. 

“Let me take your gun a minute,” said 
Taylor, hastily, to one of the guards. 

“I was goin’ to divide it,” exclaimed Sam- 


THE JAIL 


343 


uel quickly, before the man could respond. 

do the dividing,’’ said Taylor quietly, 
as he held out his hand for the half portion 
of the squirrel. 

Uncle Sam hesitated an instant, and then, 
without a word, gave the meat to Taylor. 
The latter at once cut oft the tail, which he 
handed back to Samuel. ‘‘There! Your 
thoughtfulness and generosity shall be re- 
warded. ’ ’ 

“Give me my share,” shouted Samuel. 

“Softly, my friend. I am not deaf. The 
voice is one of the surest methods of finding 
out the physical condition of a man. If I 
can judge from the sound of your’s. Uncle 
Sam, I think you will live to the age of eighty- 
nine years, ten months and thirty days. 
That being the case, I was about to suggest 
that you and I dine upon the bread and 
roasted corn, and give this meat to our 
friend Erwin, who is far from being in as 
good condition as you or I.” 

“I want my share,” declared Samuel, 
though his voice was lower now. 

“He is going to have it, as far as I am con- 
cerned,” said Erwin quickly. “And you 


344 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


will take yours, too, Taylor, or I sha^nT 
have mine. ’ ’ 

‘‘Just as you say,’^ laughed Taylor, who 
for reasons of his own did not care to pro- 
long the conversation. 

A half-hour later, when the march was re- 
sumed, it was evident that Erwin was greatly 
refreshed by the repast, and Taylor ^s hopes 
of being able to discover some means of es- 
cape returned. Samuel, still glum, had noth- 
ing to say to his companions, a course which 
met Taylor’s warm commendation. He had 
already decided that Uncle Sam’s company 
could not be endured. The plight of Erwin, 
the sight of whose emaciated body and color- 
less face strongly moved his friend, was so 
great that success must not be imperiled by 
the presence of Samuel, who was certain to 
make trouble wherever he was. 

But the guards were both alert, and when, 
late in the evening, the party arrived at a 
small town and the three prisoners were con- 
fined within the walls of the jail there, 
not an opportunity to escape had even sug- 
gested itself. 

Utterly wearied by the long march, the 


THE JAIL 


345 


boys ate the scanty food which was brought 
them, and then flinging themselves upon the 
brick floor, were soon asleep. 

In the morning, when the boys were in- 
formed that they were to remain where they 
then were until further orders had been re- 
ceived, at first Taylor was disappointed. 
They were to be conducted, as he supposed, 
to the Confederate lines, and every day the 
difficulty of escaping would naturally be in- 
creased. However, when he thought what 
the rest would do for his friend, he was more 
content, and striving to meet the conditions 
with the best possible grace, he was thinking 
of the means he might employ to aid him. 

In response to his request, permission was 
granted for the boys to spend a part of the 
day in the open court adjoining the jail. A 
high wall of brick had been built around 
three sides of this open place, the fourth side 
being protected by a fence of high palings. 

Not long after the prisoners had been 
granted this freedom, the straggling people 
of the vicinity began to gather in front of the 
fence and gaze with manifest curiosity at the 
boys. 


346 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


guess they thought all the Yanks had 
horns/’ suggested Taylor demurely, as he 
watched the assembly. Children, old men 
and women were solemnly peering at the men 
before them, seldom speaking and as seldom 
turning away their eyes. 

‘^Listen to me,” suggested Taylor a few 
moments later, as he arose and approached 
the fence — an action which caused some of 
the children to draw back in manifest alarm. 

‘^Good morning,” called Taylor, pleas- 
antly addressing an old man in the assembly. 

‘^Mawnin’, sub,” replied the old man sol- 
emnly. The curiosity of the assembly in- 
creased and drew those who had retreated 
back to a place where the conversation might 
be heard. 

‘^Any place near here where we might get 
a little milk?” 

“I dunno.” 

‘‘Where is milk kept?” 

“I reck’n mos’ly in the cows.” 

“Surely. I wonder why I hadn’t thought 
of that before,” laughed Taylor. “Might I 
inquire where the cows are kept ? ’ ’ 

“The’ aint kep’, stranger.” 


THE JAIL 


347 


^‘Why notr^ 

‘‘They has mostly been taken. Th’ Yanks 
took some, an^ what they didn’t take, the 
Confederates took. They’re gone anyway.” 

“Can we get anything to eat here?” 

“I reck’n yo’ can.” 

“Even if we can’t pay for it — now?” 

The old man made no reply. Turning to a 
lad near him he said, “Eun home, boy, an’ 
bring some o’ the co’n bread yo’ maw baked 
this mo’nin’.” 

The boy departed, but without displaying 
any propensity to “run.” 

Corn bread ! Apparently it was the chief 
if not the sole article of food among the poor 
people of the region. Not alone the armies 
suffered in the struggle, thought Taylor. Pri- 
vation was apparent in every face before 
him. And no young men and only a few boys 
to be seen in the curious assemblage! In 
spite of his own sufferings and disappoint- 
ments, Taylor appreciated now, as he never 
had before, the meaning of the war. 

In a brief time the “co’n” bread was 
brought, but instead of being able to add it 
to their supplies, as Taylor had hoped, he 


348 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


soon learned that it was to take the place 
of the food which the guard might provide. 

Striving to keep np the spirits of Erwin, 
who slept a part of the day, and ignoring 
Samuel, who still kept to himself, Taylor, as 
night drew nigh, when most of the curious 
people had departed, suddenly thought of a 
plan which he at once prepared to test. 

At his request one of the girls in the as- 
sembly secured for him a sheet of paper and 
a yellow envelope. A lead pencil was more 
difficult to obtain, but at last that, too, was 
found. Provided with these, Taylor with- 
drew to a corner of the court and there, seat- 
ing himself on the ground, at once began to 
write. 


CHAPTER XXVIII 


AN ENLAEGED FOKCE 

Ignoeing the curiosity of Samuel, who at 
once approached and gazed in manifest in- 
terest at his companion, Taylor soon wrote 
his letter and sealed it in the yellow envelope. 
What he had written was as follows : 

SoMEWHEEE IN THE LaND OP CoTTON. 

Sometime in the Winter. 
‘^My dear Miss Sallie: 

‘^Recalling your urgent request for me to 
drop you a line, I am availing myself of a 
few moments of leisure to fulfill my promise. 
I regret exceedingly that I was unable, when 
I departed from your house, to respond to 
your cordial invitation to remain longer. I 
fully appreciated your etforts to induce the 
negroes to persuade me to remain, but it was 
impossible, at the moment, to comply. The 
loan of your brother's horse, I am sure, was 
very kind on your part. I returned the horse 
on the following morning. Your brother is 
a fine man. We had a very warm interview 
when we met. I was reluctant to proceed 
349 


350 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 

without him, but he selected several of his 
best friends to go with me, so I have not been 
lonesome at any time. In fact, I am very 
much taken by the people of the South. How 
hospitable they are! They are so cordial 
that they are not willing to have me out of 
their sight. I have not changed my colors, 
but I think it is quite likely I shall go to the 
camp of General Wheeler, whose cavalrymen, 
I understand, are not far from this place. 

hope you will appreciate my inability to 
depart from the Southland. I confess there 
are moments when I feel homesick, and long 
to see my family and friends of the North, 
but the ties that bind me here are even 
stronger. I simply canT tear myself away. 

‘‘ What I want most of all, if this letter 
finally reaches you, is for you to tell Captain 
Hitt to look me up if he chances to be in 
Wheeler’s camp — that is, if Sherman leaves 
any camp, and there is anything left of 
Wheeler. I have something very important 
to say to your brother, and I promise you I 
will treat him gently. Don’t forget either 
that or the hated Yankee who was a guest in 
your delightful home. 

‘ ‘ Taylor Cooper. ’ ’ 

When this letter had been written, and the 
envelope directed — though the young soldier 


AN ENLARGED FORCE 351 


was by no means certain the directions were 
accurate — the promise of the guard was ob- 
tained that he would do his utmost to see 
that it was forwarded. 

Two days the prisoners were held in the 
little jail, and then when a dozen more un- 
fortunates were brought to the same place, 
the entire band, early the following morning, 
was ordered to proceed under a guard of 
four men. 

From the conversation of the soldiers and 
the people, Taylor had become convinced that 
the Confederate General Wheeler was not 
far away. The affection for, and confidence 
in the daring, dashing little leader of the 
Confederate * cavalry were so marked that 
even the young prisoners almost shared in 
the prevailing feeling. The thought, how- 
ever, that the cavalry was in the rear of 
Sherman ^s army was what most cheered 
Taylor, who was determined to escape and 
find a way into the ranks of his near-by com- 
rades, if escape was in anywise possible. 

Eepeatedly he had talked with Erwin dur- 
ing the two days, and to Taylor’s delight his 
friend now apparently was almost as eager 


352 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


as lie to make the attempt. The rest had 
done great things for Erwin, who had slept 
much of the time, and the food, though 
coarse and uninviting, had been ample for the 
needs of the three prisoners. 

Early in the morning, the fifteen men, most 
of whom were pale and emaciated, were 
formed in line, and, with four soldiers as a 
guard in command of a sergeant, the band 
started southward. Halts were occasion- 
ally made, but the prisoners had been in- 
formed at the start that twenty-five miles 
were to be covered that day. 

When night fell it was not known whether 
or not the requisite number of miles had been 
covered, but the prisoners were so wearied by 
their long march that, with the exception of 
Taylor, every one was asleep as soon as the 
opportunity was granted. For a long time 
Taylor remained awake, more determined 
than ever to find some way out of his diffi- 
culties. His last hope was centered upon 
Captain Hitt, though the young soldier fully 
understood how remote were the chances, 
either of Miss Sallie receiving the letter 
he had written her, or of her brother paying 


AN ENLARGED FORCE 353 

any attention to the request he had made in 
case he was carried into the Confederate 
camp. 

The sergeant in charge of the band of pris- 
oners was a dull-witted fellow, faithful in his 
efforts to follow the directions given him by 
his fellow oflScers, and plainly one who was 
not to he easily turned aside. Taylor had 
been observing him much of the time on the 
march, desirous of learning what his weak 
points were. Every one of the guard was 
heavily armed and plainly much reliance was 
placed upon this fact as well as upon the 
weakness of the prisoners themselves, as a 
prevention of escape. 

The two days that followed were not un- 
like the first except that the weakened condi- 
tion of the prisoners prevented as long a 
march. On the third day it was known that 
the Georgia line had been crossed, and Tay- 
lor was becoming almost desperate. The 
vigilance of the guard had not once been 
relaxed. To escape had been impossible. 

As a method of aiding him in his ultimate 
plan Taylor had been among the most docile 
of the prisoners. Quick to heed every de- 


354 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


mand, laughing when others were groaning 
or complaining, he had steadily endeavored 
to banish any suspicion that might have 
arisen concerning him. And in a measure 
he had been successful, or so he believed. 
The sergeant frequently had marched beside 
him, and on occasions even entered into con- 
versation with him. 

On the fourth day a brief stop .had been 
made at a humble abode near one of the 
many swamps that were passed on the march. 
The sergeant had gone to the house in a vain 
attempt to secure food. When he had re- 
taken his place beside Taylor, he said drawl- 
ingly, ‘‘We-uns are a bearin’ erbout th’ 
doin’s of Sherman’s men. This woman 
back yere ’pears t’ be of th’ ’pinion it doesn’t 
make a heap o’ dif’rence whether it’s a 
Johnnie or a Yank that happens erlong. If 
the’s anything on the place she says that 
it’s gone when the men leave. This yere 
woman let on that ‘Mr. Wheeler an’ his 
critter company drove inter my back yard 
t’other day, tipped my ash-hopper over, an’ 
drawed out two streaks of light half a mile 
long, with his wagon guns on the ends of ’em 


AN ENLARGED FORCE 355 


— an^ when he went away he never paid me 
nary cent. I allers thought yo^-uns was a 
decenter set o’ men; but the Yanks their- 
selves is no wusser. Now ef yo’-uns don’t go 
’long an leave us what little we’ve got, we’ll 
shorely perish.’ I felt for the woman,” 
added the guard. 

^^Of course you did,” said Taylor cor- 
dially. ‘‘I guess either army doesn’t al- 
ways stop to apologize when it finds ra- 
tions.” 

reck’n yo’re right. We’ll make Syl- 
vany t ’night.” 

‘^Is that so!” exclaimed Taylor quickly. 

^^Yaas, suh. The ’ll be a round-up thar, 
I reckon. I’ll be ’mighty glad to turn yo’- 
uns over toe the proper authorities. ’ ’ 

We haven’t given you any trouble,” Tay- 
lor suggested. 

‘^No mo’ yo’ haven’t, suh. But I’ll he 
glad toe be shet on you.” 

^‘How far is Sylvania from General 
Wheeler’s army?” 

‘^Caint say, suh.” 

‘^I suppose the army shifts often — to 
keep away from Sherman?” 


356 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


^‘Mought be/’ 

‘‘Have you heard how far away Sher- 
man is!” 

“No, suh/ 

“He can’t be very far if Wheeler is hang- 
ing onto the rear of the army. ’ ’ 

“Like’ enough.” 

“Have you ever been in Sylvania!” 

‘H have, suh.” 

“How large a place is it?” 

“It’s a right sma’t little town.” 

“Thousand people there!” 

“I caint say as ter thet.” 

“Is it an important place!” 

“I reck’n it is toe th’ people what live 
thar. Th’ armies haven’t stopped there 
much an’ the consequence is th’ isn’t a place 
in th’ whole o’ Georgia whar the’s less 
known about th’ wa’. What yo’-all want ter 
know so much ’bout Sylvany fo’!” 

“I don’t know,” laughed Taylor, at once 
reminded that perhaps he was displaying too 
much interest. 

“Yo’-all is pow’ful fond o’ askin’ ques- 
tions. I’ve seen a good many Yanks in my 
time, an’ they’re mos’ly all alike. They can 


Al^ ENLARGED FORCE 357 


ask mo ’ questions than — Hi ! I reckon we- 
uns are right close t^ th’ place we^re seekin\ 
That^s Sylvany!^’ indicated the sergeant as 
he at once departed from Taylor’s side and 
advanced to the head of the line. 

The arrival in the little straggling town 
was heralded after the same manner the ap- 
proach to other villages had been. A motley 
assembly of children, women, old men and 
negroes solemnly watched the ‘‘Yankees” 
when the prisoners had been conducted to a 
large unoccupied house near the main street. 
The curiosity of the assembled people soon 
became more manifest than had been shown 
in other places. Eemarks were made ex- 
pressive of the impressions received and 
many began to ply the guard with ques- 
tions — a proceeding that Taylor observed 
with increasing satisfaction. If the soldiers 
were busied with the people in the crowd, 
then there would naturally he less vigilance 
in guarding the prisoners. And Taylor was 
determined to make an attempt to get away 
that very night. 

In front of the rambling old house a wide 
piazza extended the entire length of the 


358 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


building. As darkness drew on, the prison- 
ers all were assembled on this piazza, while 
in front, in the form of a semicircle, the sen- 
tinels were stationed. Apparently the num- 
bers in the assembly of the natives increased, 
as did also their questions and the replies 
of the soldiers on guard. Taylor was mind- 
ful of all that was occurring before him, 
though as yet he had not spoken to Erwin, 
nor had he any definite plan in his own mind. 
He was simply waiting and watching for an 
opportunity. 

At last he arose from the place where he 
had been seated and approaching Erwin, 
touched him quietly on his arm, and nodded 
his head toward the farther end of the pi- 
azza. Erwin quickly arose and followed his 
friend. As some of the prisoners were mov- 
ing wearily about the place, the action of 
the boys did not arouse any suspicion on the 
part of the sentinels. 

‘^We must try to-night, Erwin,’’ said Tay- 
lor, in a low voice. 

‘H’m afraid I’m not fit to try anything. 
I’m so weak I don’t believe I can walk a 


AN ENLARGED FORCE 


359 


mile. I haven any shoes, and my feet — ’’ 

‘‘The gnard isnT very hilarious either, 
after our march to-day, ’ ’ interrupted Taylor. 
“DonT forget that.’’ 

“You try it. Never mind me.” 

“I don’t know yet what we’ll do,” con- 
tinued Taylor, ignoring the suggestion. 
“We are not far from the rebels, and that 
means we’re not far from our men either, if 
what we hear is true — and I think it is. 
Keep watch of me and be ready when I — ” 

Taylor stopped abruptly, as the sergeant 
approached the place where the boys were 
standing. “My foragers have just come 
in,” he said, “and I’m giving you a word 
in advance, suh. The co’n bread we all are 
agoin’ toe keep fo’ ourselves, but th’ sweet 
potatoes yo’ are free to help yo ’selves toe.” 

“Where are they?” 

“Eight yere, suh,” and the sergeant 
pointed to some baskets in the yard, part of 
which were filled with sweet potatoes, and 
part with the corn bread. 

“Thank you, sergeant,” replied Taylor. 
“May I ask a question?” 


360 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


^^Yaas, suh. Suht’nly, suh.^’ 

‘‘Why can^t we have a fire in the yard 
and roast the potatoes there 

“I reckon yo’ c’n,’’ replied the sergeant 
hesitatingly. “It^s time yo’ all were shet 
in the house — ” 

“But we can’t roast our potatoes in the 
house,” said Taylor. “Your guard can 
watch us out here just as well.” 

“Yaas, suh. I reck’n they can. I done 
tole yo’ first off so’t yo’ can be on hand 
when the rush is made. Stay right whar yo’ 
be, suh.” 

“Thank you! Thank you!” responded 
Taylor, as the sergeant moved to the front 
of the house and made his announcement to 
the prisoners. 

‘ ‘ This is our chance ! ’ ’ whispered Taylor to 
Erwin. “I know just what we’ll do! Come 
on. Follow me!” 


CHAPTEE XXIX 

A FRIEND IN NEED 


Eunning swiftly to the end of the porch 
where the corn bread for the soldiers had 
been placed, Taylor hastily filled his pockets. 
The dim light and the eagerness with which 
the hungry prisoners were listening to the 
words of the sergeant greatly aided Taylor 
in his efforts to secure food. 

Eeturning quickly to Erwin, who had not 
even attempted to follow his friend, Taylor 
again whispered, ‘‘Come now! You must 
come, Erwin! This is our chance.^’ 

Joining their fellow prisoners, some of 
whom already were pressing their way in the 
crowd toward the sweet potatoes, both boys 
soon secured what their dilapidated pockets 
would hold, and then Erwin followed as his 
friend, instead of returning to the front 
yard, at once darted toward the bushes in 
the rear. The main guard was stationed in 
front of the house, either in the yard or on 
361 


362 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


the sidewalk. For the most part the pris- 
oners were kept within the house itself, or 
else granted the freedom of the yard in front. 
Because of this fact, Taylor, in his investi- 
gations, had not been able to discover any 
guard in the rear, and for this reason he was 
resolved to make his attempt to get away 
there. He was trusting also in the some- 
what careless or easy-going ways of the 
sergeant, who had frequently entered into 
conversation with his prisoners and was dis- 
posed to be more lenient than any whom 
Taylor had as yet found. 

The two boys had barely entered the 
bushes when they were startled by the voice 
of the sergeant: ‘‘Doggone! Those Yanks 
have taken th’ co^n bread,’’ he shouted. 
“Whar’ be they?” A hasty search re- 
vealed the absence of both Taylor and Er- 
win, although both were still in the yard 
crouching behind the thick bushes. 

“They’ve gone!” shouted the guard once 
more. “They’ve gone, o’ course, by th’ 
Springfield road. Heah, yo’ Simon!” he 
called to someone whom neither of the boys 
could see, “Yo’ go up t’ the major’s and 


A FRIEND IN NEED 363 

bring out tli’ dogs. We’ll have th’ Yanks 
back yere bef o ’ yo ’ can wink yo ’ eye 1 ’ ’ 

The departure of Simon, though neither 
of the crouching boys knew whether the mes- 
senger was a black man or white, was the 
signal for confusion among the prisoners. 
So marked was the excitement that the 
sergeant speedily gave orders for all to be 
driven within the house and the guard was 
increased. What the sergeant’s feelings 
would have been had he known that the two 
missing men were still within the yard the 
boys could only conjecture. 

‘‘Come on, Erwin,” whispered Taylor to 
his companion. “It’s time we made a start 
anyway. Be careful. ’ ’ 

Without replying, Erwin at once arose and 
together the boys stealthily withdrew from 
the place. Ignorant of the region, not even 
aware of the location of any of the roads ex- 
cept the one over which they themselves had 
been brought, their very lack of information 
was likely to prove to be their greatest source 
of peril. 

Undismayed, however, Taylor was deter- 
mined to make the attempt, and Erwin fol- 


364 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


lowed without comment or complaint. 
Either guards had not been stationed at all 
in the rear of the place they were leaving, 
or they successfully evaded them, for in a 
brief time the boys found themselves in a 
road. Taylor had a vague idea as to the 
general direction in which the army of Gen- 
eral Sherman was likely to be found, but 
beyond that he had no information. 

He hastily examined the road in the dim 
light, and though it was far from promising, 
yet he suspected that it was the Springfield 
road to which the sergeant referred when 
he had announced the disappearance of the 
two prisoners. 

A woman was approaching and Erwin 
hastily drew back into the darkness. His 
friend, however, advanced and inquired, ‘Hs 
this the road to Springfield?’^ 

reck’n hit is, suh,” she replied with a 
drawl. 

‘ ‘ Thank you. ’ ’ 

“Yo’-all ’s goin’ in th’ wrong direction,” 
cautioned the woman, as she stopped after 
she had passed. ‘‘Springfield is back yon- 
dah, suh.” 


A FRIEND IN NEED 


365 


‘‘Yes. Yes. I know,” said Taylor has- 
tily. “We ^11 understand. We won’t have 
any trouble. I just wanted to make sure 
this was the Springfield road, that’s all. 
We’ll find our way there all right. Thank 
you. Thank you. ’ ’ 

In spite of the nearness to their prison 
house, Taylor had not dared to betray to the 
woman his eagerness to leave. Apparently 
her suspicions had not been aroused by what 
he did say, and as soon as she was gone, 
Taylor ran to the place where his comrade 
was hiding, and then the two boys resumed 
their flight. 

How long it would be before the dogs would 
be in pursuit of them, Taylor could only con- 
jecture, although he was convinced that it 
would not be long. Two things were evident 
now — one that the boys must go as far as pos- 
sible before the inevitable chase was begun, 
and the second was that they must somehow 
leave the Springfield road and also without 
leaving behind them any evidence that they 
had done so. 

Soon they came to a low-spreading tree 
whose branches reached across the road. 


366 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


‘‘Here!^’ whispered Taylor, instantly turn- 
ing to his friend. 

Without a word from Erwin, the boys 
turned to the tree, hastily climbed into the 
lowest branch, worked their way across to 
the opposite side of the road and then 
dropped into the sluggish waters of a small 
stream that was there. 

Breathlessly the two boys followed the bed 
of the stream, Taylor leading the way, and 
frequently being compelled to slacken his 
speed to assist his comrade, who already was 
struggling hard. Taylor was even fearful 
that the labored breathing of his friend 
would betray them, and so, despite his own 
intense desire to proceed swiftly, he was 
compelled to favor the weakness of Erwin. 

The boys had not gone far on their way 
before they arrived at a place where an- 
other stream entered the one through which 
they were wading. The water was much 
deeper now, and their progress more difficult. 
In a little while the boys found themselves 
in what apparently was a swamp or great 
marsh, and though he knew not what lay 
before him, Taylor helped his comrade on- 


A FRIEND IN NEED 367 

ward until at last it was apparent that Erwin 
could go no farther. 

‘^You go on, Taylor, and leave me here,^^ 
gasped Erwin, as he seated himself on a log 
on the bank. 

Thank you,’’ replied Taylor. ''I’ll do 
nothing of the kind.” 

"I can’t go on.” 

"We won’t try to, then.” 

"But you must. Hark! What’s that?” 

Taylor recognized only too well the start- 
ling sound to which Erwin had directed his 
attention. The dogs had been found and 
the chase was begun. The weakness of Er- 
win was now so apparent that Taylor bit- 
terly regretted the attempt to escape. So 
eager had he himself been that he had suf- 
fered what was commonly called among the 
prisoners "the fever,” by which term the 
men referred to those of their number who 
were so filled with the determination to es- 
cape that they talked or thought of little else. 
Even the fact that they were now in Georgia, 
and probably at no great distance from their 
friends in Sherman’s army had served only 
to increase the strength of Taylor’s purpose. 


368 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


To attempt and fail was better than not to 
make any attempt at all he had said to him- 
self again and again. Indeed, that was his 
true feeling as far as himself was concerned ; 
but Erwin’s manifest weakness was now a 
new and serious problem to be met. And 
Taylor, with the sound of the pursuers now 
heard in the distance, heartily wished that he 
had not trusted to the easy-going ways of the 
sergeant who had brought them to Sylvania. 
The inditference of the man had been more 
apparent than real, and now it was quite 
probable that the efforts the boys had made 
to avoid leaving tracks behind them in their 
flight would be futile. 

Something must be done and at once. Tay- 
lor, almost in desperation, darted into the 
woods behind him, but there was no pros- 
pect of aid to be found in that direction, and 
he speedily returned. He held a stout club 
in his hands and Erwin had another, al- 
though it had now fallen from his grasp. 
Erwin was apparently even more helpless 
than he had been a half-hour before. 

All about the place where the boys were 
seated grew trees, some of which were ever- 


A FRIEND IN NEED 


369 


greens. Taylor looked into the branches, 
bnt no refuge was promised there, and even 
if there had been, his companion was now 
too ill to climb. Almost in despair, Taylor 
stopped and listened. The appalling sound 
was much clearer now. Manifestly the dogs 
were coming nearer, and with the dogs were 
men! The thought was not consoling. And 
yet Taylor was not willing to abandon him- 
self to the threatening fate. 

He turned to his friend, who now was 
leaning against a tree. Taylor could see 
that his eyes were closed, and in the dim 
light his face was ghastly. Sick at heart, 
troubled as he had not been in all his ex- 
periences in the prison camps, the young 
soldier grasped his club more tightly and al- 
most in despair turned for a moment to listen 
to the weird cry which plainly was much 
nearer than it had been. 

As Taylor turned back almost in despera- 
tion to look again at his friend, a low ex- 
clamation escaped him, and lifting his club 
he drew back prepared to defend himself. 
There before him, standing beside Erwin, 
was a man so large that at first he seemed 


370 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


to be like some shadow giant. How the man 
had approached, or where he had come from, 
Taylor conld not understand. All he saw 
was that the giant was before him, though 
whether he was friend or enemy was not 
yet manifest. 

‘‘Yo’ come!’’ said the man in a low voice 
which was so deep that it almost seemed to 
remind Taylor of the mutterings of distant 
rumbling thunder. 

Where I” the young prisoner whispered, 
hope returning for a moment as he became 
aware that the man before him was a negro. 

^‘Come,” repeated the black man, as he 
turned and listened intently to the sound of 
the dogs that now could not be far away. 

‘^Come, Erwin. We’ve found a friend. 
Get up! You must try!” whispered Tay- 
lor encouragingly, as he bent low over his 
friend. 

Apparently Erwin did not hear. His 
head had fallen forward and he sat motion- 
less. 

Almost sobbing, Taylor turned to the black 
man and said — ‘^He’s sick. He’s abso- 


A FRIEND IN NEED 


371 


lutely exhausted. I don’t believe he can 
stand upon his feet.” 

The black man bent over the silent boy 
for a moment, then lifting Erwin in his arms 
he said to Taylor, simply, ‘‘Yo’ follow me.” 

The negro ’s burden was not heavy, for Er- 
win at the time did not weigh more than 
eighty or ninety pounds, Taylor thought. It 
was speedily evident that the black man was' 
not delayed, for as he sped forward into the 
woods Taylor had to exert himself to the 
utmost to follow him. 

Leaping in the marshy places from one 
mound to another, the man sped forward, 
Taylor following as best he was able. On^ 
and still on, the man made his way until he 
halted at last on the border of a little pond. 

‘‘Dis yere’s de place,” said the negro with 
a deep chuckle. 

As Taylor glanced eagerly about him he 
was unable to perceive any place,” but he 
did not speak as in surprise he watched the 
giant before him. 

From some place of concealment the black 
man freed a rope which was hanging from 


372 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


the oak tree beneath which the men were 
standing. Hastily adjusting this rope be- 
neath Erwin ^s shoulders, the negro then 
grasped the rope above, and as soon as he 
had gained a foothold among the branches 
he drew Erwin, now apparently unconscious, 
up after him, while Taylor looked on in 
wonder. 

In a moment the rope was lowered for 
him also, and quickly he, too, was drawn up 
into the tree by the powerful negro. Not a 
word was spoken, and the only sound that 
broke in upon the stillness of the night was 
the cry of the hounds that evidently now 
had entered the swamp. And yet, though 
Taylor could not have explained its cause, 
his feeling of hope had in a measure re- 
turned. 

From a place in the branches the black 
man, still holding Erwin in his arms, pro- 
duced a board which he extended to a limb 
of the nearest tree. Across this board he 
moved swiftly, and as soon as Taylor fol- 
lowed, the negro again placed his strange 
bridge in such a manner that he passed on 
to another tree, and Taylor again followed. 


A FRIEND IN NEED 


373 


The process was repeated many times be- 
fore the negro grasped a rope hanging from 
the tree where the final stop had been made, 
and slid to the ground. Taylor again fol- 
lowed, and as he alighted he saw that the ne- 
gro, as soon as he had secured the rope, 
again produced his strange bridge, and the 
party in this manner advanced from one lit- 
tle mound to another until at last they 
stepped upon firm ground. 


CHAPTEE XXX 


A STEANGE KEFUGE 

With every advance the board, which had 
served as a bridge, was withdrawn and used 
again with each forward movement. Even 
when at last a firmer foothold had been ob- 
tained, the huge negro insisted that his com- 
panions should stand upon the hoard instead 
of the ground. Taylor saw that the negro 
was not unmindful of the pursuit, for he had 
turned his head in the direction of the 
sounds every time he had reached the mound 
he was seeking, but he had not for a moment 
delayed the flight. 

When at last the little party arrived at 
the place where apparently the ground was 
less broken than it had been elsewhere, the 
negro placed Erwin in the hands of his com- 
panion while he himself disappeared for a 
moment. As Taylor glanced about him he 
was aware that he was standing on what ap- 
peared to he a small island in the midst of 
374 


A STRANGE REFUGE 


375 


the surrounding swamp. Eank bushes grew 
all about the border, and from the center of 
the island, which Taylor concluded was not 
more than twenty-five feet in diameter, sev- 
eral tall trees rose, their branches hidden in 
part by the high brush, and, where they ex- 
tended above the bushes they reached far out 
over the foul waters of the marsh. 

Why the huge negro had brought them 
to the place, Taylor was not able to under- 
stand. The sudden appearance of the black 
man in their time of greatest need, who the 
man was, or why he should have befriended 
them as he did were also mysteries for which 
as yet the young soldier was unable to find 
any explanation. 

Taylor had not long to wait for the reap- 
pearance of his strange friend. From a 
long limb of a near-by tree the negro sud- 
denly hailed him in a low voice, and as Tay- 
lor looked up quickly he saw a ladder made 
of twisted vines suddenly let down almost 
directly in front of him. Down this ladder 
the negro came with an agility surprising in 
one of his immense size. Quickly taking Er- 
win in his arms, the negro rapidly climbed 


376 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


the ladder again and disappeared with his 
burden among the thick branches of the 
nearby trees. 

To Taylor, wearied and anxious as he was, 
it seemed as if the sounds of his pursuers in- 
dicated that they had not been led astray in 
spite of all the attempts of the negro to hide 
their tracks. The shouts of men also could 
he heard, and for a moment Taylor believed 
that he had been seen, when an unusually loud 
shout was followed by a prolonged cry from 
the dogs. The young soldier glanced fear- 
fully about him. In his eagerness he placed 
his hands on the swaying ladder of vines, but 
as he was about to ascend, the negro suddenly 
reappeared on the branch directly above him. 

Bring up de bo’d,^^ whispered the black 
man. 

Taylor instantly turned and seizing the im- 
provised bridge at once began to ascend 
the swaying ladder. As soon as he gained the 
branch, the negro leaned forward, drew the 
ladder of vines up to him, unfastened it, and 
then taking the board from Taylor’s hands, 
without a word began to move from one 


A STRANGE REFUGE 


377 


branch to another, stepping in this manner 
from tree to tree, supporting himself in part 
as he did so, by grasping other branches 
that almost interlaced those upon which he 
was moving. 

Without waiting for any instructions Tay- 
lor at once followed. When he arrived at 
the third of the trees he saw before him what 
at first sight he thought was a cluster of tall 
evergreens that had grown up close to the 
trunk. When the negro bent low, however, 
and thrusting aside the covering crawled 
within, Taylor at once understood. On this 
tree in the midst of the swamp, a small hut, 
not unlike a wigwam in its shape, had been 
erected. As he entered the strange place, 
silently following the example of his guide, 
he was aware that a platform of boards had 
been laid upon the branches, and that a small 
room was there enclosed by canvas which, 
doubtless, at some time, had served as a tent 
for the soldiers in one of the contending ar- 
mies. The top was open and sufficient light 
entered to enable Taylor to see all about 
him. The dark evergreens that were out- 


378 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 

side the room doubtless had been cut and 
then planted or arranged as a shelter for the 
hiding place. 

The room itself was about eighteen feet 
from the ground. The approach to it by the 
pathway along the branches of the near-by 
trees was of a character that left no trail. 
The use of the board as a bridge, the care 
with which the board was withdrawn each 
time after it had been used, the final ap- 
proach to the place by means of a ladder 
and the branches of the trees were all ex- 
plained now. With a sigh of relief, for dis- 
covery seemed almost impossible, Taylor 
turned to Erwin, who was stretched upon the 
floor on one side of the room, which was about 
twelve feet square. 

^‘He done tired out,’’ said the negro, as he 
noted Taylor’s glance. 

‘‘I’m afraid it’s worse than that,” said 
Taylor anxiously, as he stooped to examine 
his friend. Erwin was breathing regularly, 
but his emaciated face and ghastly appear- 
ance both served to increase his friend’s 
anxiety. It was remarkable, he thought, 
how well he himself had endured the terrible 


A STRANGE REFUGE 


379 


strain and suffering, botli of the life in the 
prisons and the no less difficult hardships of 
the escape. With his companion, however, 
how different it was. He thought of Erwin 
as he was when the two boys had left home. 
How eager he had been. How strong and 
vigorous he was. And now — . The contrast 
was so marked, so horrible that as Taylor 
looked down upon the wasted frame before 
him, it did not seem possible that it really 
was Erwin. 

There was no opportunity afforded for 
even such thoughts to be dwelt upon, and in 
a moment Taylor was recalled to the neces- 
sity of action by what the negro was doing. 
Around the sides of the room the young sol- 
dier saw four guns — two of which plainly 
were rifles, and one a musket, and one an old- 
fashioned shotgun. This last the negro took 
and loaded heavily with buckshot, crooning or 
moaning softly to himself as he did so. The 
two rifles next were loaded, and then the 
musket. Apparently not satisfied with what 
he had done, the negro next produced a half- 
dozen long knives. The blade of each had 
been ground to a point, and it was evident 


r 


380 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 

that as a means of defense the knives in the 
hands of the giant negro were not to be 
despised. Next, the man produced three 
wire nooses which he placed carefully on the 
floor near him so that any of them might be 
readily seized in case of need. 

All through his various tasks the negro 
had been crooning a weird, strange melody, 
though his voice could not have been heard 
outside the hut. 

His eyes were lighted by a strange fire, 
and a smile occasionally appeared on his im- 
mense mouth. To Taylor the smile was even 
more suggestive than the weapons, which 
were almost fondled by the black man in his 
weird preparations. 

‘‘Wha’ datr’ suddenly the black man said 
in a whisper. Standing erect he peered 
from the place through an opening in the 
canvas. Not a sound could now be heard, 
even the baying of the dogs apparently hav- 
ing ceased. 

As Taylor had not heard any alarming 
sound, he was at a loss to discover what the 
actions of the startled negro implied. For 
several minutes the black man remained at 


A STRANGE REFUGE 


381 


the porthole, and when at last he turned 
again to Taylor he merely grinned and did 
not speak. 

A half-hour afterward the negro said, 
‘^Yo’ stay yere.^^ 

Where are you going? inquired Taylor 
quickly. 

The negro grinned broadly, pointed to two 
of the nooses, which he slipped over his 
shoulder, thrust two of the knives into his 
belt, and without a word departed from the 
place. 

Unable to decide whether the man had 
merely gone forth to investigate, or had 
heard something that had aroused his sus- 
picions, Taylor at once approached the open- 
ing through which the negro had been peer- 
ing. At first he was unable to see anything 
except the dismal swamp that extended all 
about him. 

Suddenly, however, he saw a sight that 
was as alarming as it was startling. Sixty 
feet away, near the spot where the party 
had first entered the trees, he saw a huge 
dog. Not a man was in sight and the dog, 
in manifest confusion, apparently had lost 


382 FOE THE STARS AND STRIPES 


the scent. The fierce animal was sniffing, 
first on the ground, and then at the base of 
the tree. It was plain that the dog had fol- 
lowed a part of the way, even after the board 
had been used by the fugitives, but now he 
had become confused. Apparently the vic- 
tims it had been seeking had not climbed the 
tree, for the animal circled the base and was 
unable to find any footprint. Wheeling 
about, the bloodhound again returned to the 
mound, sniffing quickly about him and still 
evidently at loss what next to do. 

Again the hound approached the tree and 
then a strange thing happened. Suddenly, 
and without any cause that could be seen, the 
dog was jerked into mid air and hung there, 
pawing frantically, but apparently unable to 
emit a sound. Excitedly Taylor watched 
the struggling animal. He was unable to 
obtain a glimpse of the negro, whom he more 
than suspected to be the unseen actor in the 
strange scene. Several minutes elapsed be- 
fore the dog ceased to struggle, and then, to 
Taylor ^s great surprise, the body was drawn 
swiftly upward until it disappeared among 


A STRANGE REFUGE 


383 


the branches of the tree, which was beside 
some of the tall evergreens. 

Suddenly from the direction from which 
the dog had come a man was seen approach- 
ing. He was crouching low and carried a 
rifle in his hands. When he arrived at the 
mounds he stooped and carefully examined 
them, and then, apparently convinced by 
what he saw that someone must have pre- 
ceded him, he cautiously advanced. He was 
peering intently about him, but not once did 
he look up into the trees. To Taylor it 
seemed as if the man was following the foot- 
prints of the hound, and was looking about 
him for the animal itself. 

The man at last arrived at the tree where 
the dog had so abruptly disappeared. He 
bent low to inspect the footprints, and as he 
did so, suddenly from the tree itself the body 
of the dog shot swiftly downward, striking 
the crouching man full in the back of the neck 
and driving him, face downward, into the 
soft mud. Not a sound could Taylor hear, 
and not even a smothered cry came from the 
man as he fell. The heavy body of the dog 


384 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


rested upon the man’s head and held it. 

Fascinated by the sight, Taylor watched 
the woods in the rear, expecting other dogs 
or men now to appear. The man who had 
been struck down by the body of the blood- 
hound lay motionless. Not a sound broke 
in upon the stillness of the great swamp. 
The moments passed slowly and still the 
silence was unbroken. Neither man nor dog 
could be seen approaching, nor did the ne- 
gro, whom Taylor believed to be the one who 
had flung the dead body of the hound upon 
the crouching soldier, appear. 

At last, as Taylor was about to turn away 
to look to the condition of Erwin, the giant 
negro suddenly stepped upon the platform, 
and thrusting aside the protecting covering, 
quickly entered the hut. 

Without a word, he replaced the knives and 
hung the wire nooses on the wall. Stooping 
beside Erwin, who was either unconscious or 
sleeping, Taylor could not determine which, 
the black man examined him carefully, and 
then rising, turned to Taylor. 

^‘Wha’ yo’ do if old Eichard had’n’ he’p 

yo’r’ 


A STRANGE REFUGE 


385 


‘‘I don’t know. We would have been 
taken back to the other prisoners, I sup- 
pose.” 

The negro laughed silently and nodded his 
head vigorously. 

‘‘How did you find usf How did you 
know we were there? Why did you help 
us?” 

Again the huge negro grinned broadly, 
but he did not speak. Nor was Taylor able 
to learn at the time who the black man was, 
or why he had his strange place of refuge 
in the swamp. 

“Some more men and dogs will be here 
soon, won’t they?” Taylor at last suggested 
anxiously. 

“The’ cum no farder ’n th’ place whar 
de dawg is.” 

“Why not?” 

Once more the negro laughed and did not 
reply to the question. A half-hour after- 
ward he again leaned over Erwin and lis- 
tened intently to the young prisoner’s breath- 
ing. Apparently satisfied by his inspection, 
he stepped outside the hut, peered cautiously 
in every direction, and then swiftly de- 


386 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIFES 


scended to the ground. Not a word of ex-, 
planation did he give Taylor, and when, 
after an absence of another half-hour, he re- 
turned to the room, he was holding a wicker 
basket in his teeth. 

Taylor could scarcely credit the evidence 
of his own eyes when he saw the negro open 
the basket and take from it some fried 
chicken, a part of which he handed the as- 
tonished boy. Boiled rice also was there, 
and some roasted sweet potatoes, and all 
was warm, showing that the unexpected pro- 
visions had recently been cooked. 

The negro awakened Erwin, but only gave 
him some of the rice, while he and Taylor 
feasted upon the other food. The rain was 
falling now, and, as the black man declared, 
there was consequently no longer danger of 
pursuit or search. He became more talka- 
tive, and, as Taylor listened to the strange 
tale told him by his host, he almost forgot 
his peril in his interest until the negro sud- 
denly arose, and with a whispered word of 
caution, stepped hastily to the opening in 
the canvas and looked out. 


CHAPTER XXXI 


FKOM NIGHT TO NIGHT 

The negro remained at the opening a long 
time, and, as he did not speak, Taylor’s 
alarm naturally increased. However, at last 
the black man resumed his seat, and as he 
did not betray any anxiety in his manner, 
the fears of the young soldier in a measure 
were relieved. 

Calmly, as if there was no danger threat- 
ening, Richard, for such Taylor had already 
learned the name of his strange host to be, 
resumed his story. From his account, Tay- 
lor drew several conclusions. One was that 
the negro was almost unbalanced in his mind, 
though he was not insane. Then, too, evi- 
dently he was an object of fear and respect 
among the negroes of the region. From 
them he had drawn his support for more 
than a year — maintaining a shelter or home 
in the midst of the swamp. Either no 
thorough search for him had been made, or 
387 


388 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


in the multitude of troubles that threatened 
the country his hiding place had not been 
discovered. And Eichard had become fear- 
less, fully believing that he had a charmed 
life. Eecklessly he had gone by night to 
the quarters of the negroes on the planta- 
tions for miles adjacent, levying his tax of 
food or ammunition, regardless of possibili- 
ties of betrayal or capture. Time and again 
he had been chased by white men and dogs, 
but he had been able to hide his tracks so 
cleverly that he had always succeeded in baf- 
fling his pursuers. 

In the midst of all the peril and excitement 
of his life Eichard had maintained one al- 
most insane purpose — that of aiding the 
Yankees in their troubles in the South. He 
had even gone to their camps miles away 
and repeatedly had conducted escaping pris- 
oners to their friends. In every event, how- 
ever, he had returned to his improvised 
home among the trees on the little island in 
the swamp. 

By chance he had been near the border of 
this swamp when Taylor and Erwin had been 


FEOM NIGHT TO NIGHT 389 


fleeing. Instantly concluding that the two 
boys were what they really were, he had 
hastily brought his timely aid — an aid, as 
Taylor clearly understood, that had rescued 
them frorn the hands of their pursuers and 
the teeth of the dogs. 

The condition of Erwin made all thoughts 
of fleeing, or even of attempts at departure 
from the place, not to be thought of for a 
time. Eichard was positive in his declara- 
tion, and Taylor, although he was by no 
means so confident as the black man in the 
safety of the shelter, was also convinced that 
his friend was too weak to face the demands 
of a flight. 

Four days passed, and Erwin slowly re- 
gained strength under the care of the faith- 
ful Richard. The negro every night left the 
place, and when he returned in the early light 
of the morning, he never failed to come laden 
with food. How he was able to secure it in 
the poverty-stricken condition of the adja- 
cent country Taylor was unable to under- 
stand. However, he was glad to receive the 
food which both he and his comrade needed 


390 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


so much, and asked few questions, though it 
could hardly be said his silence was ‘‘for 
conscience’ sake.” 

Convinced that the improved condition of 
Erwin was such as to warrant a resumption 
of their efforts to make their way to Sher- 
man’s army, Taylor said to Eichard, when 
the latter was about to leave the hiding place 
the evening of the fifth day — “If you are able 
to get us a little extra food I think we’d bet- 
ter go on to-morrow night.” 

The black giant laughed good-naturedly 
and did not reply, as he swung himself from 
the tree and vanished in the darkness. In 
the absence of the negro, Taylor had en- 
deavored to keep guard, hut after two nights 
and the positive assertion of Eichard that 
such precautions were not necessary, he had 
in a measure abandoned the task and had 
slept almost as soundly as his friend. 

For some reason which he was unable to 
explain, a feeling of uneasiness possessed 
Taylor this night after Eichard departed. 
Perhaps, he thought, his alarm might be in 
part due to his own desire to escape. The 
confinement had been welcome for a time, 


FROM NIGHT TO NIGHT 391 


until lie had recovered from the violence of 
his labors in their flight from Sylvania; but 
now, when both he and Erwin were in much 
better condition than they had been for a 
long time, the longing to be gone was too 
strong to be suppressed. 

A half-hour after Eichard^s departure 
Taylor stepped forth upon the platform. 
About him were the trees festooned with 
creepers, the waters of the swamp, and the 
mounds across which he and the negro had 
moved in their successful flight from their 
pursuers. How weird and strange it all ap- 
peared in the dim light. How different it 
was from the country in which he had his 
home. The thought of the little New York 
State village added to the gloom of the young 
soldier. A feeling of restlessness swept 
over him. He was weary of the inactivity 
of the past few days. 

Eeturning hastily to the hut, Taylor said 
to his friend, ‘‘Erwin, I think I’ll take a lit- 
tle look about the swamp.” 

“Don’t! Stay right here where we know 
we are safe.” 

“I think I’ll be safe almost anywhere now. 


392 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


The Johnnies are quick, but they donT seem 
to hang on very wellJ’ 

‘ ‘ Hang on ! ” retorted Erwin. ^ ‘ Any other 
people on earth would have quit this war 
months — years ago!’’ 

‘‘That’s all right, but it isn’t what I 
meant. I was thinking of the sergeant. 
Eeally he was a good-hearted fellow, and he 
was more decent to us than any man we’ve 
met except Lieutenant Evans. He was too 
easy with us — that’s what got him into his 
trouble. What I meant was, that when we 
got away and the Johnnies started after us, 
they gave us a hot chase for awhile, but they 
didn ’t hang on very long. ’ ’ 

“You don’t know whether they’ve given 
up or not.” 

“If they haven’t given up they haven’t 
shown themselves or found us anyway,” 
laughed Taylor. It did the young soldier 
good just to hear his friend speak. 

That very afternoon he had laughed 
when Erwin had declared he was almost, 
if not quite ready to leave the place. 
How much good food and rest had done for 
him! 


FROM NIGHT TO NIGHT 393 


“If we were sure of that, we’d be ready 
to leave to-morrow night.” 

“I think we’ll leave anyway.” 

“Where’ll we go?” 

“We’ll just keep on,” said Taylor lightly. 

“Let us hope so. I wonder if Eichard 
will go with us part of the way.” 

“I think he will, though I haven’t said any- 
thing to him about it.” 

“Did you ever see a stronger man than 
he is?” 

“No, I don’t think I ever did. Think of a 
man drawing that big hound up into the tree 
and then throwing the body down just as if 
it was a light stone! I never saw anything 
like it.” 

“Eichard said the man wasn’t killed, but 
that both the man and the dog were gone.” 

“Yes, and I don’t know exactly what to 
make of that,” said Taylor thoughtfully. 

“Why? What do you mean?” 

“I think the man was dead. He may not 
have been killed by the force of the blow 
when the dog hit him, but it drove him face 
forward into the mud, and the body held him 
down.” 


394 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


‘^Perhaps it didn^t. At all events, the 
man got up and went away/’ 

Did he? I wish I was sure of that.” 

“Don’t you believe he did?” demanded 
Erwin quickly. 

“I have my fears. Of course we know 
both bodies are gone. The dog was dead, 
and I think the man was, too. Now, if he 
was dead, tell me how he got up and walked 
off and took the dead dog with him, too. ’ ’ 

“Of course he couldn’t and didn’t do any 
such thing.” 

“Do you believe he would have taken 
a dead dog with him through all this 
swamp?” 

“It doesn’t seem reasonable, does it?” 
said Erwin thoughtfully. “What do you 
think?” 

“I don’t know what to think. I know 
what I’m afraid of, though?” 

“That others found him?” 

“Yes.” 

“Why would they take a dead hound 
away?” 

“That I don’t know.” 

“Do you think we ought to keep watch?” 


FROM NIGHT TO NIGHT 395 


‘‘I do. I’m going out a little way and look 
around. ’ ’ 

‘‘Don’t go. Don’t leave the place. I’ll 
stand guard here,” protested Erwin eagerly. 
“You won’t gain anything by going into 
the swamp. Besides, you don’t know the 
way, and if you are lost — ” 

“I shan’t be lost. I’m not going far; but 
I must have a little look about the swamp. 
Besides, it will do me good — Hark ! ’ ’ Taylor 
sharply interrupted himself, and both boys 
listened intently. 

In a brief time their fears were increased 
when it became manifest that someone was 
certainly approaching. Before either could 
act, the opening into the hut was darkened 
and Eichard himself stepped within the 
room. 

Instantly it became manifest that the giant 
negro was greatly excited. He did not speak 
at first, but he was busying himself in strap- 
ping two guns to his shoulders and thrusting 
several of the knives into his belt. He sol- 
emnly handed a gun to each of his compan- 
ions and then said brusquely, “We-uns 
mus’ leab dis yere place right sma’t.” 


396 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


^^Wllat^s wrong? Have they found 
inquired Taylor. 

^‘Yaas. Come on.’’ 

Quickly the trio departed from the strange 
hut. The board was used as it had been 
when the boys had first approached the place, 
but this time even the negro was cautious. 
The little party had barely gained the firmer 
ground when they were startled by a fierce 
shout that rose behind them. Plainly the 
yell came from a band of men and was speed- 
ily followed by a volley of shots. 

‘‘Dey sho’ly done foun’ de place dis 
time,” muttered Eichard savagely, as he 
urged forward the flight. Swiftly the boys 
followed their huge leader. Occasionally the 
black man insisted upon his companions re- 
maining behind while he advanced alone to 
make sure of his ground. Every time when 
he rejoined the boys his (|emand for haste 
increased. Several times,^'iAjo, he sharply 
changed the direction in which the little party 
was moving, the boys following obediently, 
aware that their sole bone consisted in im- 
plicitly obeying the directions they received. 



Quickly the trio departed from the strange hut. 

Page 396. 













^- vr - TWi /^- 


\l- ■. 




\<^ 


.JV# 




, • lA 

Lt<« 


■^f:^ 


lb- 


»’«' 


'■^V 




K* <1 


» r>" 




c>< 


, ir 




“3?' 


— '•■’ i A'j ' . . . ^*-£ ''/■*• r\ ■ #1. *• .'■ ~ • . •^■ 

* t>’'V '»■ iQ /** 

i*’ -»"J^'r -. 





:-«? j? 






^ *» 







> 


« 

« 

■N 


; . /» 


a 

*• .Ai» 

1 V 

- , !/#♦* 

^ A ^ - 

fc-v' 

\ . 

> •« 

■ * ■«■ L 


- ■ i .- - -A^^ .^Ktv 


I'A- 




o •» 


- *. 


>v. 




A •* r - ♦ • . . ^ ^ ^ ^ • * 

- ’ ' .'• "'-' ^ • 

, . W; - , -r.' 

ISSft^.’ .,r'^^\ff- I^A “V 

_ - ?■' , • t '- . . 

MmL.' ^ •■ • • ^ 'V - « .— t* 

«Kra . •. -tf** ■ % , ^ ® . 


r -r 





-4 


»'* r::- 15 


■'1?^ ♦i'''-' *' 


:tfr, 


« 5 * • I # 


••-' -A’ V. 





•- .., /V 

*1 *‘ < : t. ^ ^ M 


u . 


gic-Tg ^ ^ «y «i3rAt »?. 




FROM NIGHT TO NIGHT 397 


At last the road was gained and here Eich- 
ard insisted upon each one leaping across it. 
He did not explain what the purpose of his 
demand was, hut each boy was confident that 
he understood and made no protest. 

Across the fields, through another great 
stretch of woods, into still another road, 
where again the boys leaped at the negro’s 
bidding, the little party fled. For an hour 
or more the flight was continued before the 
negro halted. When at last the boys stopped 
they were aware that they were in a worn 
path that apparently led the way among 
some hills. 

After a brief rest the flight was resumed 
until Erwin declared he could go no further. 
He was dripping with perspiration and his 
body was trembling with weakness. Despite 
his recent improvement, his strength was not 
sufficient to meet the demands of the power- 
ful Eichard. 

After another brief rest the black man 
brusquely ordered Erwin to place himself 
on his ( Eichard ’s) back and then the party 
again started. The load which the negro 


398 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


carried apparently did not greatly impede 
him, and an hour elapsed before another halt 
was called. 

They had stopped before a lonely cabin 
and there in response to Eichard^s hail the 
door was opened and a colored man ap- 
proached. After a brief conversation be- 
tween the two black men the boys were bid- 
den to enter the building. 

‘‘Dis yere’s safe now,” said Eichard. He 
further explained that the boys were to lie 
in hiding in the hut until the following night, 
when he promised to return and guide them 
to a place of safety farther on. His fear of 
pursuit apparently was gone. The two boys 
were so utterly wearied that neither asked 
any questions nor made any protest, glad of 
the opportunity of securing rest and food. 

Throughout the day that followed Eichard 
did not appear, but early in the evening he 
came and reported that his strange refuge in 
the swamp had been burned and that the 
white men, who at last had discovered his 
hiding place, believed that he and the two 
boys had escaped and that all further at- 
tempts to pursue them were useless. 


FROM NIGHT TO NIGHT 399 


The confidence of the negro was an in- 
spiration to both boys, and more eagerly, 
because both were now more hopeful, they 
followed their strange guide as he led them 
through the darkness. Familiar with the 
places of refuge in the region, Richard halted 
each morning before sunrise, and in some se- 
cure or hidden place the boys slept each 
day. From unaccountable sources the ne- 
gro obtained supplies of food, and as a con- 
sequence the privations and sufferings of the 
flight were less severe, although on several 
occasions Richard still insisted upon carry- 
ing Erwin upon his back. Indeed, the de- 
votion and determination of the black man 
did not once flag. 

Early in the morning of the sixth day of 
the flight, the boys were startled when in the 
dim light they discovered what plainly were 
the outposts of an army. It was still too 
dark to enable them to perceive what the uni- 
form of the men was, but upon the earnest 
advice of Richard they all three advanced 
until they were halted by the sharp challenge 
of the sentinel before them. 


CHAPTER XXXII 


CONCLUSION 

Only a few minutes were required to con- 
vince the guard that friends and not ene- 
mies were approaching. The little party of 
three was sent within the lines and explana- 
tions made and received. The fluttering flag 
of the camp roused even Erwin to a show 
of enthusiasm. 

‘‘For the Stars and Stripes!^’ shouted 
Taylor; and his words were followed by a 
cheer from the men in blue that quickly gath- 
ered about the newcomers. Richard insisted 
upon remaining in the camp and a place for 
Erwin was soon found by the hospital corps. 
The young soldier was so completely worn 
out by the terrible experiences through which 
he had passed that the care of nurses and 
physicians was required. Through Taylor’s 
representations a promise was secured that 
as soon as his friend was able to endure the 
strain of the long journey he should be sent 
400 


CONCLUSION 


401 


north on a furlough of at least three months. 

As for Taylor himself — ^he declared that 
the return to the army and the escape from 
the horrors and sufferings of the prison pens 
were sufficient rewards for him, and that he 
now was able to take his part in the heroic 
struggle that still continued. Among his 
first duties, however, was that of writing two 
letters. One was sent to his mother in the 
little far-away village in New York State. 
In it he described only a part of his recent 
experiences, and assured the anxious ones at 
home that he was well and full of hope that 
the struggle was drawing near its close. The 
other letter was to a certain Miss Sallie Hitt, 
in which he begged for information concern- 
ing the conditions that surrounded her, and 
also gave minute instructions as to how a re- 
ply might be sent him. Knowing her loyalty 
to her own cause as he did, Taylor was not 
hopeful of receiving any response to his re- 
quest ; but for reasons which he did not fully 
explain to any one, he sent the letter and 
waited until the result should become ap- 
parent. 

Meanwhile the young soldier, filled with in- 


.402 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


terest in his surroundings and doubly pa- 
triotic after his break for freedom, eagerly 
received the information which his comrades 
in arms were able to give him. From them 
he learned that, as early as the preceding 
May, Grant and Sherman had begun the ad- 
vance which then had been planned. Grant, 
taking Sheridan with him, went to Virginia, 
there to meet Lee. The constant ‘‘hammer- 
ing’^ which Grant had employed in the west 
had won him his victories there, and now he 
was the lieutenant-general, having command 
of all the Union forces. 

Between Fredericksburg and Eichmond 
was a region crossed from west to east by 
many rivers. Here Lee had erected many 
fortifications from behind which he fought 
Grant successfully for two weeks, repulsing 
the attempts of the Union men to take the 
places by storm. This region was known as 
the Wilderness, and here occurred the blood- 
iest fighting of the war. In the first three 
days of the Wilderness battles. Grant lost 
38,000 men; in the next eleven, at Spottsyl- 
vania Court-house, 26,000 more were lost — a 
total of 64,000 in two weeks. Lee’s loss in 


CONCLUSION 


403 


the same time was only about one-third that 
of Grant, in part at least indicating some- 
thing of the difference between attacking 
and defending a position. 

Grant now resorted to skill rather than to 
mere force of numbers. At each of Lee^s 
defenses he attacked lightly in front and at 
the same time pushed forward a part of his 
force to the left to attack Lee’s army in the 
rear. In this manner Lee’s army was ^‘ham- 
mered” until it was inside the main defenses 
of Eichmond, the center of which was at Cold 
Harbor. 

The entire army under Grant was hurled 
against Cold Harbor, but the defense was 
wonderful. In twenty minutes the assault 
was repulsed. Cold Harbor cost the Union 
army 15,000 men; the Confederates losing 
only a little more than one-tenth that num- 
ber. 

Eichmond had such strong defenses on the 
north that Grant now decided to move his 
army across the James river and attack 
the place from the south. By June (1864) the 
movement had been accomplished, but the 
problem of Grant was not less difficult than 


404 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


before. Lee bad moved bis own army as bis 
opponents moved. From Petersburg, about 
twenty miles south of Eicbmond, tbe Con- 
federate fortifications ran in an irregular 
curve to tbe north of Eicbmond — a distance 
of about thirty miles. 

Grant made one strong attempt to storm 
Petersburg. A mine was dug under one of 
tbe Confederate forts. This mine was filled 
with four tons of powder, and when it was 
exploded (July 30) tbe fort and its garrison 
were blown to pieces. But tbe assault which 
was to follow was badly managed, and tbe 
Union troops were driven back, suffering a 
heavy loss. Later, in September, tbe Union 
army in tbe Shenandoah Valley, was at- 
tacked at Cedar Creek, about twenty miles 
below Winchester. Tbe Confederates at 
first drove the Union men before them, but 
in tbe afternoon of tbe same day, Sheridan, 
who was at Winchester, rejoined tbe army, 
rallied bis men, and drove tbe Confederates 
far up the valley. 

Meanwhile, General Sherman bad been 
moving from Chattanooga with bis army. 


CONCLUSION 


405 


Opposed to Sherman was Johnston, and the 
two leaders were among the most skillful of 
the generals on either side in the great strug- 
gle. Johnston’s plan was to draw Sherman 
away from Chattanooga and meet him in bat- 
tle where the field might favor the Confed- 
erates. Sherman’s plan was to avoid a bat- 
tle as long as possible, and hold Johnston 
in the south so that he could not go north to 
aid his hardly beset comrade-in-arms. Gen- 
eral Lee. 

As Sherman advanced, all his supplies had 
to be brought by the single railroad behind 
him. This railroad had to be guarded or the 
Confederate cavalry would work into the re- 
gion in the rear of Sherman’s army, destroy 
this railroad, and so cut otf all supplies. To 
leave a guard for the railway as Sherman 
advanced required many men, and, as a con- 
sequence, the army was steadily weakened 
by the withdrawal of every new force of 
guards. This was exactly what the skillful 
General Johnston had planned to bring to 
pass, and his plan to attack the diminished 
forces had already been made, when suddenly. 


406 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


unexpectedly, the Confederate leader was re- 
moved from his position and Hood was ap- 
pointed in his place. 

Hood was a hard fighter, but not nearly so 
skillful a leader as Johnston. The change 
was fortunate for the Union army. Hood 
made three savage attacks on Sherman’s 
army but was repulsed in every one ; and on 
September 2 (1864) Sherman and his men 
entered and took possession of Atlanta. 

Hood now led his army northwest. His 
hope was that Sherman would be compelled 
to follow him, and that the war thus would 
be carried north. Sherman had been hop- 
ing that Hood would do the very thing he 
did do, something that Johnston never would 
have done at all. Pretending to follow 
Hood’s army until he was satisfied that it 
had really started for Tennessee, Sherman 
quickly returned to Atlanta, tearing up the 
railroads as he advanced, — in that manner 
preventing Hood from coming back, at least 
with any speed. General Sherman also had 
sent nearly half his army to Tennessee, un- 
der the command of General Thomas — one 
of the ablest of the Union generals. 


CONCLUSION 


407 


Thomas defeated Hood’s army both at 
Franklin and Nashville, and pursued it so 
vigorously that the troops were scattered in 
every direction. In this manner one of the 
two great armies of the Confederates had 
been put out of the conflict. 

General Sherman had an army of 60,000 
men when he returned to Atlanta, and be- 
tween him and Virginia there was not an 
organized Confederate army to be met. In 
the middle of November, Sherman burned 
Atlanta, cut all the telegraph wires to the 
north, and then began his famous march to 
the sea. His real aim, after he should have 
reached the coast, was to turn northward 
and attack the rear of Lee’s army in Vir- 
ginia, while Grant was attacking it in front. 
Hood’s mistake or incompetency had placed 
almost the entire Confederacy at the mercy 
of Sherman. 

In four columns, covering a strip of coun- 
try about sixty miles wide, Sherman’s army 
advanced. Railways were destroyed, bridges 
and depots burned, and the army lived upon 
the supplies it took from the region through 
which it was moving. 


408 FOR TEE STARS AND STRIPES 


Fort McAllister, which guarded Savannah, 
was stormed in a wild rush of fifteen minutes, 
about a month after Sherman set forth from 
Atlanta. Outside Savannah, a fleet of Union 
ships was blockading the town. Sherman 
opened communication with this fleet of 
blockaders. Savannah was besieged and after 
eight days, was taken. There Sherman and 
his men remained until February (1865). 
And with them was Taylor, restored fully to 
health now, and eager in his defense of the 
Stars and Stripes. 

On the first day of February (1865) Sher- 
man moved out of Savannah, marching di- 
rectly north to Columbia, South Carolina. 
While his army held that place, the city was 
burned, each side accusing the other of hav- 
ing set it on fire. Again Sherman started 
northward, following almost the same route 
which the British general, Cornwallis, had 
taken in 1781. Thus* far Sherman had met 
little armed opposition. There was no army 
to face him, the people were suffering from 
lack of food, and the Confederate money was 
now of so little value that a dollar was worth 
only two cents. Still the spirit displayed by 


CONCLUSION 


409 


the people of the Confederate States was 
marvelous. Even the women and children, 
who were suffering most of all, were still de- 
termined and loyal to their cause. 

When Sherman’s army arrived at Fay- 
etteville, their troubles were increased, for 
now General J ohnston had been recalled and 
was facing them with an army of 40,000 men 
drawn from the various straggling bodies, 
and from the defenses of the coast cities. 
And Sherman well knew the spirit and the 
ability of his opponent and respected both 
alike. 

At Goldsboro, Johnston furiously attacked 
the army under Sherman (March 19). For 
a time the issue of the battle was in doubt, 
but at last Sherman drove Johnston back 
and entered Goldsboro, where he was joined 
by fresh troops. Both armies now waited 
for the outcome of the work in Virginia, 
where it was Grant’s purpose to compel Lee 
to lengthen his lines and so weaken his 
force. 

Sheridan, with 10,000 picked cavalry, now 
scattered the Confederate troops in the 
Shenandoah Valley (under Early), and after 


410 FOB THE STARS AND STRIPES 


the railroads and bridges between Eicbmond 
and Lynchburg bad been destroyed and by 
this means much of Lee^s supplies bad been 
cut otf, be joined General Grant. 

Soon Sheridan made another movement to 
the southwest and held bis ground at Five 
Forks. To meet this new danger, Lee again 
extended bis lines, which now were so long 
that bis 40,000 men were not sufficient to 
guard them. Grant at once advanced bis 
army of 100,000 and broke through Lee’s en- 
trenchments (April 2). In the night Lee 
retreated westward, and the Union troops 
entered Eicbmond and Petersburg. 

General Lee was retreating between the 
James and Appomattox rivers, striving to 
reach Lyncbburgb and make bis way into 
North Carolina and have Johnston join him 
there. But Grant was in hot pursuit, and be- 
fore Lee could reach Lynchburg, Sheridan 
passed him, and with his troops was between 
the Confederate army and the place it was 
seeking. Lee’s retreat was cut oft, he was 
caught between the two armies, his men were 
almost worn out, and supplies had failed. At 
Appomattox Court-house (April 9) Lee sur- 


CONCLUSION 


411 


rendered. Grant was as brave and generous 
as his enemy. All he required was the prom- 
ise of Lee that the Confederate troops would 
no longer bear arms against the United 
States. They were to give up public prop- 
erty, but every man was to keep his horse to 
help in the spring ploughing. 

Sherman at once pushed forward from 
Goldsboro to Ealeigh, where Johnston sur- 
rendered (April 26). Johnston ^s men, like 
Lee^s, were dismissed on their promise not to 
do any further act of war. Early in May, 
the other Confederate forces east of the Mis- 
sissippi, and later in the same month those 
west of the same river, also surrendered. 
The war was ended. The Confederate sol- 
diers went back to their desolate homes as 
brave to begin the struggle for existence 
there as they had previously been on the field 
of battle. 

The armies of Grant and Sherman, 200,- 
000 strong, proceeded to Washington, where, 
near the end of May, they were reviewed by 
their leaders and the officers of the govern- 
ment. Two entire days were required for 
the lines of bronzed and brave soldiers to 


412 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


pass through the streets. The music of the 
military bands, the great displays of flowers, 
the cheers and shining faces of the people, 
who had assembled from every part of the 
country, were not the least interesting. 

The armies were paid and sent home at 
the rate of 300,000 a month until nearly every 
soldier had departed, though nearly 300,000 
brave men on either side in the awful strug- 
gle had given up their lives. The loss of 
property in slaves, the purchase of war ma- 
terial, payment of soldiers, losses in busi- 
ness, pensions granted, and all the various 
costs of such a terrible war mounted up to 
sums beyond our comprehension. The sor- 
row and suffering, the dead and the maimed, 
the sickness and disease that followed can- 
not even be reckoned. The old enmity is 
gone or going, and the best we can cherish 
to-day is the memory of the many brave 
men who fought and died for the land they 
loved. 

Among the first to return to their homes 
was Taylor — older, more bronzed, wiser than 
when, two years before, he had enlisted. Of 
his welcome we know little except that it was 


CONCLUSION 


413 


tender and strong. Erwin had not recovered 
sufficiently to re-enter the army and he was 
on the platform of the little village station 
eagerly awaiting the coming of his friend, 
when Taylor stepped down from the train. 

Another to greet Taylor warmly was the 
huge Eichard, who had previously made his 
way to the little village and was living in 
Erwin’s home. The coming of the black 
man was an event long remembered, for 
many had never before seen a negro. Eich- 
ard ’s enthusiasm and interest in his new life 
long continued and he remained in the home 
of Erwin until his death, ten years after the 
close of the war. 

Of Samuel — Uncle Sam” — not a word 
came. Whether he ever escaped from the 
bushwhackers, or had cast in his lot with the 
Southern people, or met a fate which could 
only be surmised, no one ever knew. His 
worn little mother professed to believe, even 
to the day of her death, that her boy would 
return, hut her hope was never fulfilled, and 
she died without seeing him. 

Not many weeks after the close of the war 
a letter from South Carolina come to Tay- 


414 FOR THE STARS AND STRIPES 


lor, who already had written several which 
he had addressed to Miss Sallie Hitt. The 
note which Taylor received was brief, but 
no less interesting to him, at least, because 
of that fact. 

‘Hf you could see the desolation in my old 
home you would understand why I have no 
heart for writing. My father and brother 
both were shot — by whom I think you know. 
Ne are so poverty-stricken that we scarcely 
know where our next meal is to be secured. 
Some of our negroes have remained with us, 
but they are almost a burden because we do 
not know how they are to be fed. We have no 
one to help us, and yet neither my sisters nor 
myself have any thought of giving up. We 
shall do our best and I am sure we shall find 
some way out of our difficulties. My heart 
is full of bitterness at times when I think of 
our home as it was, and then as it is to-day. 
As a class — ^you know how I feel toward the 
Yankees. Perhaps you understand. Some- 
times I think you do, better than some of 
your fellow soldiers. Of course there are 
exceptions. If good could come out of Naza- 
reth it may be that a good man may still be 
found in the midst of bad company. I do 
not know what to say to you in reply to your 
kind offer to come to our aid. The little we 


CONCLUSION 


415 


did for you was done, not because you were 
a Yankee soldier, but because of your sister 
and mother. You can’t be altogether bad — 
to speak of them as you did to me. I have 
not forgotten your words. All I can say is, 
that we can and we will live on — somehow. 
We are not asking nor are we receiving aid. 
Of course, if by any chance you should ever 
happen to be in this vicinity, you will be an 
exception to the general feeling we have. 
You have a sister and mother, and for their 
sake, if for no other, you will be welcome. I 
cannot, I will not invite you, but if you come 
I will try to be generous and not unmindful 
of your kind words. ’ ’ 

The letter bore the signature of Sallie Hitt. 
The following day Taylor started for South 
Carolina. 


THE END 


4 


I 


LRBFe’15 










\ ► 


X . 


%/ , #<!h.v5><. 

■'?lVi.,- ;v. . ,.;■. - 

,# • ;• 

^-■'S^ * *'■ • ~~ ~ir~^ ‘'» :s ■ ■», .*’ ' • 

. >. .j, ■ 'f r“i3* • 

CjniK_4 A* *■ ^a* 

Y ‘'; -‘‘Jii'y.'* ■ 

Vi.s Sif^ 


» ■ . ’ tfc 'i j^ 

[■4 


^ p 



‘■.r.Kiiii , 




'■i. ‘‘ *k ■ 


■ A’'^< ‘’ • 1 ’ w ^ 

&.'''Vv<:;;.ii‘''’^ 







" i - - , • -A 

->• i < i;/'Vi|/t^-i 

i’? 'ro- ■'• 


* 1 »•» rtf iC'#fc vy^^ •• 

v—-; ^ ^■■JaE ?>-at-,v'^' 











I i -x ii _2L^ r ' sc^*^ 

r hi !i «s^. ifi ^ ' - ^T^rtginr ''vtsisL 

H4<i! WBW&ii35!%gfc- 




li-' ■ . ^ ^ t j, ., i 

t;- . , > 





4C ^^•->;V''^A^ 

• .1 ./A V. 

_ % ' J 




• .rA 




< < 



»*> 


- ■ 


V» 



.c 






.V/ • 




' * .41#* 1' 


lm3 - 

W.A’' 


l< 




i»r 




I r ^ 









